User Manual Microwave Links

v e r s i o n 2.8.3

AT283_UMM_E2

Atoll User Manual

2

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

© Forsk 2010

Contact Information
Forsk (Head Office) 7 rue des Briquetiers 31700 Blagnac France

    

www.forsk.com sales@forsk.com helpdesk@forsk.com +33 (0) 562 74 72 10 +33 (0) 562 74 72 25 +33 (0) 562 74 72 11 sales_us@forsk.com support_us@forsk.com +1 312 674 4846 +1 888 GoAtoll (+1 888 462 8655) +1 312 674 4847 www.forsk.com.cn enquiries@forsk.com.cn +86 20 8553 8938 +86 20 8553 8285

Web Sales and pricing information Technical support General Technical support Fax Sales and pricing information Technical support General Technical support Fax Web Information and enquiries Telephone Fax

Forsk (USA Office) 200 South Wacker Drive Suite 3100 Chicago, IL 60606 USA

   

Forsk (China Office) Suite 302, 3/F, West Tower, Jiadu Commercial Building, No.66 Jianzhong Road, Tianhe Hi-Tech Industrial Zone, Guangzhou, 510665, People’s Republic of China

   

Atoll 2.8.3 User Manual Release AT283_UMM_E2 © Copyright 1997 - 2010 by Forsk The software described in this document is provided under a license agreement and may only be used or copied under the terms and conditions of the license agreement. No part of this document may be copied or reproduced in any form without prior authorisation from Forsk. The product or brand names mentioned in this document are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective registering parties.

About the Atoll User Documentation
The Atoll user documentation is a guide and reference for users working with Atoll. Atoll is easy to use and offers a clear, self-explanatory user interface. The user documentation helps the user make effective and efficient use of all the features that Atoll offers. The user documentation aims to familiarise the user with the working environment of Atoll and enable him to use all of Atoll’s features and functions. The Atoll user documentation is technology-specific. For each Atoll radio technology, the Atoll user manual contains instructions and information specific to that technology as well as chapters describing the Atoll working environment and the tools available.

© Forsk 2010

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

3

Atoll User Manual

4

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

© Forsk 2010

.....................................1.............................. 16 Working with Layers Using the Explorer ............................................................................4...4..........................................4 1..............................6 1......................................................6 1...Table of Contents Table of Contents Table of Contents....... 18 Modifying Sites and Microwave Link Extremities Directly on the Map ..................................... 26 Zooming In and Out .......4. 29 Using Zones in the Map Window....10..................................1 1............................................... 26 Zooming In on a Specific Area......8............2 1.......................1..............2 1........................ 17 Deleting an Object ............... Lines.........4........4...................................1........................3..........................5 1...............................................2. 38 Exporting an Individual Coverage Prediction in Raster Format ..3 1........................4........1...............................................................................................4....3 1.......4 1.....................................................................................................10....................1 1........3..............................2 1..3 1.... 30 Using a Focus Zone................. 31 Using a Printing Zone ......2 1....... 14 Docking or Floating an Atoll Window...................................................................8...... 28 Displaying the Map Legend ......4..........................4.........................8. 19 Changing the Antenna Position Relative to the Site Using the Mouse ........................................3 1................................3..................9.................2 1............................ 34 Creating Polygons............ 16 Working with Objects ............................1 1.....................................................4.........1 1...................10.3..............9 1.......................................................1....9. 36 Editing a Point......... and Points ..........................................................................................3................................ 37 Exporting an Individual Coverage Prediction in Vector Format .....................2..............................8........................2 1..........................2 1...... 13 The Atoll Work Area ..... 19 Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using the Mouse .......2.......................2.......................... 17 Displaying the Properties of an Object ..................... 36 Editing Contours...............................................2 5 The Working Environment ........... 21 Defining the Display Properties of Objects ....2 1.......................................5 1...........1 1................................ 34 Adding a Vector Layer .......... and Points..............................................................................3.............4................1 1.................................................. 20 Display Properties of Objects .......................................................................................8........................8 1..11 1..9.......................1 1.......................................... 39 Copying a Map to Another Application . 19 Moving a Site Using the Mouse ................................. 14 The Explorer Window ..................................................................................1 1..........4 1....3 1............................ 1 1.......12 © Forsk 2010 5 ......................4............. 29 Using a Computation Zone ....................................... 27 Choosing a Scale.............1................. 27 Changing Between Previous Zoom Levels.............................4............................................ 16 Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer..........4..................3........................2 1............................. 15 Navigating in the Explorer Window ......................1 1...................................................................... 31 Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools.....................3......................................................................................................................................... 25 Working with Maps.................................5 1.......................................................................3............................3............. 40 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 1.........4......... 28 Measuring Distances on the Map ......... 39 Saving a Map as a Graphic Image ..............2...3 1.......................................4 1........................................................8.......................................................2..........................................................................................4.............4..................3 1...................3 1................................ 19 Moving a Site to a Higher Location...................................................................4..................... 37 Exporting Coverage Prediction Results.......................................... 33 Editing Polygons.....................2 1...2.................4................ 28 Displaying Rulers Around the Map ....4..4............................... Lines............................3...................1 1...........4...............................3 1.... 27 Moving the Map in the Document Window.....................................6 1.................................................................4.................. and Points Using the Context Menu ...................................3......................................................................................................................................................................................................................... Lines............ 17 Renaming an Object ......3............. 20 Selecting Another Site for the Link Extremity Using the Mouse ..................... 29 Using a Filtering Zone.....................................................................................1 1....................................................... 13 Working with Document Windows ...................................................................7 1........................................4 1..................................................................4.................................. 18 Selecting One of Several Microwave Links ...........................2..........4...................3.............................4.................9.......................................3...................................................................4 1.......4.....................1.....10 1...............................................4.. 33 Using a Geographic Export Zone .............................. 21 Examples of Using the Display Properties of Objects .............................................................6 1........................ 26 Changing the Map Scale .....4...................................3 1............ 27 Centring the Map Window on an Object......................1 1...9............................ 27 Using the Panoramic Window ................ 17 Using the Object Context Menu ...........2.....................1.....4...2............................................ 38 Exporting Multiple Coverage Predictions.................................................................................. 35 Combining or Cropping Polygons Using the Toolbar.............................................................3........5 1..... 15 Working with the Explorer Window Tabs....9.......................................4 1.................... 35 Editing the Shape of Polygons and Lines ........................1...2 1...............................................4...............

................60 Advanced Sorting .....2 1..........................3 1.........3......................7......6........63 Restoring All Records.........................................69 Filtering on a Site List...............................................3...................72 Searching for a Map Object by Its Name ..................................................................................................4 1.........................................................................................52 Printing in Atoll .....1 1..43 Opening an Object’s Record Properties Dialogue from a Table ............70 Exporting a Folder Configuration............................2...............7.67 Creating a Site List ............................................43 Editing the Contents of a Table........42 Deleting a Field from an Object Type’s Data Table.....7...........................68 Adding Sites to a List Using a Zone ........3..2 1..2 1.............................................................................................................................................................................................7...5.....4 1.......6 1....................................................................................2.......................................8 1................................................................................................................6...........................3......6..................................................1 1.............................................8.............1 1...............................................................................................3 6 ................................. and Filtering Data...........................................................................................................................3 1.56 Configuring the Group By Submenu ....................49 Importing Tables from Text Files.............71 Tips and Tricks .....5...........................5.....7.....6...........2 1.........2................5..................................................................6 1.....................2...................................5..5...................................................7...................5...........Atoll User Manual 1.............62 Advanced Data Filtering ..............64 User Configurations ....................................5..................5 1......................1 1.................................................................................................1............................ and Editing Data Table Fields................................................................................................5.................5..................................................................................................8..........................6.7 1.................................3.....67 Site Lists.....................3 1...................................6 1.......................................................................................................................................................7 1......................69 Creating a Folder Configuration ...........................3 1..............................................3 1...........7.............5.......................................................................5 1.........................................70 Deleting a Folder Configuration........................6....................................4 1.................50 Exporting Tables to XML Files ....59 Sorting Data ..66 Exporting a User Configuration ......2 1.......................41 Opening a Data Table ...........47 Copying and Pasting a Table Element ...........................5......................................5 1.....52 Printing Recommendations ..............56 Grouping Data Objects..............................................................2...................................................................................42 Adding a Field to an Object Type’s Data Table ...............................7.......................................70 Reapplying the Current Folder Configuration .............................2 1.............................2 1.................................7..................1 1..1..................3 1.....................................................................................7.7...............................................67 Importing a User Configuration ......55 Printing a Docking Window ...................7..................7...................7..................................................71 Creating and Comparing Subfolders..........2.2.........................10 1..........1 1.................................1..7.........................5.....................................53 Defining the Printing Zone .................................................7.................5.......................5.......68 Adding a Site to a List from the Explorer Window ......1 1.............52 Printing Data Tables and Reports ................................72 Undoing and Redoing ...................................57 Grouping Microwave Links by Site .................2 1.....................6........................................................56 Grouping Data Objects by a Selected Property ..................................................................................49 Exporting Tables to Text Files.........................................................6....2........................................................................................................4 1..............6..........7...........5................................8......................................................................................3 1..............................................73 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 1...................7..........................................................................7 1.........................68 Editing a Site List......................................................................6 1..........................................................3................70 Applying a Saved Folder Configuration .....52 Printing a Map ......................7...............................7.................................................................................................1 1....................................................................8.6.......................................4 1.............................2 1...............2 1..5..............................68 Adding a Site to a List from the Map Window .....2 1.............................51 Importing Tables from XML Files .41 Adding.......................................................7....................................8...............................5...58 Advanced Grouping.........7..........6................................................................................................................................................................................................3 1..............................................44 Defining the Table Format........................................................................8..............................................6......................................................8 1....................40 1...........7...6................5 1..5 1....................4..................73 Searching for a Point on the Map .......1 1.........72 Refreshing Maps and Folders .7...........8 1.........42 Accessing an Object Type’s Table Fields ..........13 Map Window Pointers .....................................................................................44 Copying and Pasting in Tables ..........................5 1....... Sorting......................................69 Folder Configurations........5.....................................7.............53 Defining the Print Layout .....1 1.........47 Viewing a Statistical Analysis of Table Contents ...........1..............................................4 1..........7...............................................................7.........1 1............5.........................................2 1...............................................................7...11 Working with Data Tables ........2 1...........................................72 Searching for a Map Object using Any Text Property ......5................................................................1 1....................72 Searching for Objects on the Map............62 Filtering in Data Tables by Selection..........................................3 1.....................................4...............................................................54 Previewing Your Printing.......7....................................7............................70 Importing a Folder Configuration........64 Advanced Filtering: Examples ...............4.....................................4 1...............3 1....................................7.............47 Pasting the Same Data into Several Cells ....................................... Deleting.........................................9 1.........7........5...............................2 1..........6.............................58 Examples of Grouping .................71 Filtering Data Using a Filtering Zone............................................6....6 1............................1..56 Grouping.........61 Filtering Data..................................1 1..................3.7.........60 Sorting Data in Tables.................................1 1.................................

............................10 3................... 99 Importing One MSI Planet® Geo Data Type ...............................1................................................................................ Lines.............................................. 74 Using Icons from the Toolbar ........................................2.........................................2. 81 Working in a Multi-User Environment ......................2 3...................................1 3...............2.............................................1 2......................................................................................................1 3.........5 1.......................... 111 Displaying Information About Geo Data .......2 3.............................................5.............................2..............3 2...................................... 86 Archiving the Modifications of an Atoll Document in the Database ............................................................................2.3 3..1 3..............3..12...............1 3................................................................................................. 107 Scanned Images ..... and Points ............................................................................... 90 Configuring Automatic Backup ..........2 2......................... 111 Example 2: Clutter Classes and DTM Maps Representing the Same Area ....................................2 3...............................................3 Contours................................ 102 Digital Terrain Models ...... 97 Importing a Vector-format Geo Data File .............................................................................................................................. 109 Setting the Priority of Geo Data.....4 1..............................3 3...... 101 Grouping Geo Data Files in Folders..................2 3.................................................................................... 79 Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template .....................6 3.............1......... 112 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 7 .2 2...................1 3...........................................2 3............3......................................................3................2 3.................................................................................................................... 107 Defining the Display Properties of Scanned Images ..5 Clutter Classes.2...........5 3........... 107 Importing Several Scanned Images ...........................................2............................2.................................... 96 Importing a Raster-format Geo Data File ................................................ 80 Defining a New Atoll Document ............... 95 Supported Geographic Data Formats .............................................2....7 Using the Status Bar to Get Information..............................1 © Forsk 2010 Geographic Data Sets ............................. 84 Working With a Document on a Database.......................3................. 91 Making and Sharing Portable Atoll Projects ............................................10....................................3 3.................................................................................................. 75 2 2.............................. 99 Importing a MSI Planet® Geo Database .......................................................9 3.....................8 3.......................... 104 Adding a Clutter Class............2 3....................................1 3..........2.........................................................................................................................2..............9............................................................................11 3.......................2..................... 112 3.2..........................................1.............. 112 Exporting a Geo Data Set .............3 2.. 111 Example 3: Two Clutter Class Maps Representing a Common Area . 100 Importing a WMS Raster-format Geo Data File ................................................................................................................................................ 85 Refreshing an Atoll Document from the Database .............Table of Contents 1....................................3...................................................................................................................................5.............5.....................................1 2.....................3...............................................1 3..........7................8............................. 74 Using Shortcuts in Atoll ......................................................................................2...................... 83 The Atoll Multi-User Environment .....4 3........................................... 87 Making a Backup of Your Document ......................... 79 Templates Available ....................................................................8.............................. 109 Setting the Priority of Geo Data in Calculations ................................5 3................. 103 3...........2................6 3..........7.................. 108 Managing Geoclimatic Map Properties ..................1 3...................................... 83 Creating a New Atoll Document from a Database .7 Managing Geographic Data .............................................................5............................2......................................... 98 Importing MSI Planet® Geo Data..................................10...........................................3................................................................. 109 Setting the Display Priority of Geo Data ...7 3......................................4 2.........................................3 3.... 105 Refreshing the List of Clutter Classes .............3 2.......................................................... 108 Geoclimatic Maps ...........................................................5 Starting an Atoll Project ....................................10. 90 Recovering a Backup ...........10......1 2.................2.............................................................3.....................4 3 3........... 102 Repairing a Broken Link to a Geo Data File...............6 1................................................................................................................................ 79 Before Starting a Microwave-Planning Project .............................................1 2...8....................................8..................................3........ 105 Displaying Total Surface Area per Clutter Class ......................2 2.. 79 Creating an Atoll Document ... 106 Moving a Vector Layer to the Data Tab..3.......................... 79 Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template ............ 91 2....................................................... 106 Managing the Display of a Vector Layer .12 3........................................2...................................... 105 Clutter Heights ............. 110 Example 1: Two DTM Maps Representing Different Areas ..................................................................... 109 Displaying Geoclimatic Statistics............................................................4 3..............................................2 3............................................5............... 95 Geographic Data Types .. 102 Embedding Geographic Data ............... 103 Assigning Names to Clutter Classes ..............................3...............8...................... 106 3...........3.........................................2 2...............................................................10......................................3.................................................................................................................1 3..8.....1 2....... 106 Managing the Properties of the Vector Layer....................................................................2 2..................................... 73 Saving Information Displayed in the Event Viewer..................................4 3.....................9............ 104 Defining Clutter Class Properties .......................... 96 Importing Geo Data Files ..........2 3.7...

.................................4 4.........137 Defining Microwave Waveguides and Cables..........1 3.............................................138 Using the Microwave Antenna/Equipment Compatibility Table ............................115 Saving Geographic Data ..........................................2 6.......................................................14.........14..............................156 Defining Calculation Parameters .................................1.........................3 4.........................................139 Using the Assistant to Define Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility ...........2..........................................................................................................4 Antennas and Equipment...........118 Exporting an Embedded File.....2................................................................1 8 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 ..146 5...........................2 Importing a Geo Data Set ...........................138 Defining Compatibility Manually ...13............................................3.........................................................1......1 6.....................................2 4...........................156 Global Parameters ............................................................3 Managing Frequency Bands and Sub-bands ....1 4.......................1 4........................................................................3........................................................................................................2 5.........1 6..............................................................................................................................2.........................................3....................114 Editing Clutter Polygons .....................452 Model.........................................125 Editing Microwave Antenna Patterns .....................132 Advanced Configuration..........................13......................2 Editing Geographic Data ......................................................1 Defining Microwave Link Frequency Sub-bands ..........14 3................................................118 Creating a New File from a Larger File .........13........................................................1..............................................2 5....2 6.3 4...........................................................1 3...............136 Microwave Waveguides and Cables ..3 3..........3..............................151 Working with the Microwave ITU-R P........................................123 Creating an Antenna ........................154 Defining Performance Objectives..................145 Microwave Frequency Bands ......137 Modifying a Microwave Waveguide or Cable .............155 Defining Availability Objectives ........2..........1 6.........................132 Digital Hierarchies .................................................................................................2............151 Working with the Microwave Propagation Model ............................113 Editing Clutter Class Maps....................................................4 3..123 Importing Microwave Antennas....................................................................2 3.................................1 4.....14........1 5......................................13 3..........128 Importing Microwave Equipment...................................1...................................123 Defining the List of Manufacturers .............................146 Defining Microwave Link Frequency Bands .........................147 Example of Creating a Frequency Sub-band ...........114 Displaying the Coordinates of Clutter Polygons ................................4.3..................1.........................................................................................................................................................................126 Microwave Equipment...................117 Combining Several Files into One File.........................Atoll User Manual 3...................................................154 Defining Quality Objectives ............116 Exporting an Edited Clutter Class Map in a Raster-Format File...............1 3..2 5 5..5.................156 6.........................................1 4.....................................2 3..................3 4...........................................................................1 4........154 Microwave Link Classes.......................................................................................................12...................................1 6.............................................2.........................................................................................................2.....116 Exporting an Edited Vector Layer in Vector-Format File ...............2................3 3.......2 Managing Calculations in Atoll ...................................................2 4.....................1.....................................1 4...............................14...............133 Theoretical Graphs..2 4...2 4............................5 4 4.............13...........146 Short-Haul Frequency Band..........................................3.................151 Using Propagation Models in Microwave Projects ....13..................................................3...................132 Interference Reduction Factor ..............................153 Defining Microwave Link Classes and Performance Objectives .....................................................................5.................................................2 4...............................139 Using Assistants to Define Compatibility............................................117 Updating the Source File...............1 4...................................................3.......................116 Saving Modifications to an External File ..5......................3 6...........................................................................145 Long-Haul Frequency Band .......................................115 Editing Geoclimatic Maps...................................................2 3..............................................................................................1.........................................1 5..............2.............................1 4........138 Using the Microwave Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility Table .....139 Using the Assistant to Define Antenna/Equipment Compatibility ..................................................................................140 4....................2...1 3.............14..............................................................................................................................1..................................2 4..........5...........................................2 6..................................1.................................1..............1............13..............................................................148 6 6...................14..............125 Printing Microwave Antenna Patterns ..............................................................4 3.........1....................................115 Deleting Clutter Polygons...................2 4......................14................................................................................................4........5 4...................................119 3..138 Microwave Antenna/Equipment/Waveguide Compatibility .........................3..................................127 Modelling the IDU and ODU in Atoll....................................113 3.........................................3 4....................2.............3....5..........................3...........145 Medium-Haul Frequency Band .................1..3 5..........................2....5.......123 Defining Antennas.114 Creating a Clutter Polygon ..........................................................

..................................................... 210 Displaying Reflection.................................2..................1 7............................... 159 Defining Calculation Parameters for a Single Microwave Link .............................2.......1 7.....1 7.........1 7...2 7.................1 7...... 206 Analysing Microwave Links ............................4 7.......................... 200 Adjusting Microwave Antenna Heights Using the Mouse ........................2................................................4.......3 7.....3..................................3........ 194 Zooming In on the Profile.........2.....6.............................3 7....................................................1 7.....................8 7.........................................................1...2............5.....................2...................... 191 Modifying Microwave Sites and Microwave Links Directly on the Map ......................................5........................................... 207 Managing Link Budget Calculation Validity.................................................................................................................2 6........................4. 206 Printing and Exporting the Link Budget Report........................4...2 7........2 7...... 197 Determining Microwave Link Antenna Heights...................................................................................................... 173 Designing a Microwave Link Network ......2........................................2 7...2..................................................2........................................................................................ 165 7 7............................................................4 7..............1... 191 Display Tips for Microwave Sites and Links ...........................................4........................................................................................................3.......... 190 Creating or Modifying a Microwave Link Template....2.........1............5 7...................................... 208 Performing a End-to-End Reliability Analysis ................................................................................................................................1............3 7.......................3......................... 200 Adding a Microwave Passive Repeater.................. 179 Displaying the Terrain Profile Between Candidate Sites ......................................... 211 Analysing Reflections .................... 206 Setting a Microwave Link as Active .............4....5...............1...Table of Contents 6...................7 7.........3 7......................................3...........................................................1.........2 7.................2 7.........3.........3 7.........................................................5 7..... 195 Modifying Microwave Link Profile Values ..................................4... 212 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 7......................................4 7.............3........ 206 Defining the Content of the Link Budget Report ..............2 7...4. 175 Site Survey Tools ..................................5...3 7................1 7.....................2.................. 203 Calculating Microwave Link Required Margins..........................................9 7.....3 Microwave Link Project Management ..........................................................3................1 7.............2 7. 193 Displaying the Path Profile .................................. 202 Analysing Microwave Link Reliability ....................................................................2 7............. 200 Defining Microwave Antenna Heights......3............................................ 184 Creating Microwave Links ....................................................2............. 185 Definition of a Microwave Link..............................................................................................3 7....................................6.................................................... 195 Displaying Microwave Link Clearance Values Along the Profile............................5.......................................................5...............................................................1 7............................ 174 Site Description............................................ 192 Analysing the Path Profile ............... 203 Analysing a Single Microwave Link ...............3.............................................1 7............................... 159 Defining Calculation Parameters for All Microwave Links ............ 163 Defining Calculation Parameters for a Group of Microwave Links ..................................................2....................... 193 Studying Microwave Link Clearance............3...................................4............................................... 194 Printing a Microwave Link Profile.....7 7.....................................1 7...........5...................................................5 7.........2.... 190 Managing Microwave Link Templates .....................................6 7.....................5..............2 © Forsk 2010 9 ........3......... 193 Viewing a Microwave Link Profile ........................1...2.2...2................................................ 180 Displaying a 360° View Around One Site .............1........................6 7.........1 6...... 188 Defining Port Parameters ............3..........................................2 7................................................................................. 208 Creating Multi-hops....2............................................................... 207 Calculating Multiple Microwave Link Budgets....3..............................................................3 7........................................................................5....3 7...........................................................5......................... 185 Creating or Modifying a Microwave Link ...................................... 173 Planning and Optimising Microwave Sites ................................... 192 Checking Data Consistency ............4..... 191 Deleting a Microwave Link Template.........2 6...........................................2....................................5....... 189 Placing a New Microwave Link Using the Microwave Link Template..............4.............................4......3......4................5.....................................................1 7............3............................1...................................1 7.........3.5 7...............1.4 7............................................................ 191 Adding a Field to a Microwave Link Template ....................1.....................................................5............ 176 Displaying the Line of Sight Area Around One Site ................. 174 Creating Sites .........5.............................. 176 Finding the Best Route Between Two Sites ....4 7.......................4............. 175 Creating or Modifying a Site ... 208 Performing a End-to-End Reliability Analysis ...........4..........2.................... 194 Managing Microwave Link Profile Display Options......................3 Link Parameters .................................................1 7.......1.....................................2 7.......1....... 176 Analysing the Line of Sight Between Candidate Sites.................................2 7.......... 205 Configuring the Link Budget Report Display.............................. 201 Creating or Modifying a Passive Repeater ...5...........3.......... 204 Modifying Microwave Link Calculation Parameters ................5.............. 204 Calculating a Microwave Link Budget...................... 181 Search Tools for New Sites ................................4 7.........4................................. 201 Description of a Passive Repeater .......5 7........................2......2 7......2..............2 7..........3....................................................................................................3 7................................................2...............................................1 7.....3 7......6 7.........................3...........................................4......... 200 Automatically Optimising Microwave Antenna Heights........................... 210 Studying Reflection .......................................... 202 Placing a Passive Microwave Repeater on the Map Using the Mouse .................... 192 Setting the Working Area of an Atoll Document ......................................................................1.....5.....2.....................2.....3........

......................221 Defining IRF Graphs Manually ..............1........................................................6 7...................4 7....................3 7....................5 7...............9............................................219 Displaying Third-order Intermodulation Products.....7.....................................................................................................................................1 7.................217 Checking Site Parities on the Map .........8...............4 7..............218 Performing Semi-automatic Channel Search.............................214 Solutions Against Reflections........9...3 7........7....................9............222 Using IRF in Interference Calculations........................1 7...........225 Calculating Interference on Multiple Microwave Links ....1.................226 Advanced Configuration...........................225 Defining the Content of the Interference Report.................................228 Setting all Microwave Links of a Point-to-Multipoint Link as Active.....221 Defining IRF Graphs with the Assistant..............3 7............5 7...............................................................................................................................2 7.230 Adjusting the Antenna of the Point-to-Multipoint Hub Using the Mouse.6.......Atoll User Manual 7.....................................3 7................................7...................8..................................................................9......1....................227 Point-to-Multipoint Link Properties ............................9................214 Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters .............................................................................230 Adjusting the Antenna of the Point-to-Multipoint Hub.....................................6.................1 7.....226 Displaying Interference on the Map ......9..............1................230 Deleting a Point-to-Multipoint Link...................................................2 7..............2 7.......7 7............1...218 Working with the Frequency Spectrum Analyser ...................8 7..................................5 7......................................................6..231 Index ..............1 7....................4 7............................................................1........8......................217 Creating a Report on Site Parities..........9........................ 233 10 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .2 7....10 Displaying the Reflection Analysis Report.............2...........215 Planning Microwave Link Channels ........8................................1....................................................6.......................4.221 Interference Reduction Factor...................1.........................................7.............................................................2...220 Analysing Interference .............9.......................229 Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link Using the Mouse ...............224 Performing an Interference Analysis on Multiple Microwave Links .................................8..................3 7...........................................................1....................................................................................216 Checking Microwave Link Site Parities .......2 7........226 Managing Interference Calculation Validity....................1...................................227 Creating a Point-to-Multipoint Link ....................................................1.............................229 Mapping Microwave Links to Point-to-Multipoint Links Globally...........8.......9................2......1........227 Point-to-Multipoint Links.............8....................................................1 7...........................2 7..................................................................7................9..............................................................217 Using the Search Tool to Display Channel Reuse ...........230 Deleting a Microwave Link from a Point-to-Multipoint Link................................................................7 7.............................................................................................................1....1 7.7................................................................1 7........2 7.........8..............9 7.............................4.................212 Configuring the Reflection Analysis Report .................224 Performing an Interference Analysis on a Single Microwave Link ................................................................7.......229 Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link .................9.....1...............9 7.......8 7.....................................8.6 7..8...1 7........................

Chapter 1 The Working Environment .

.

or a vector. and Filtering Data" on page 56 "Tips and Tricks" on page 72. and clutter classes. and support for standard Windows shortcuts. calculations. The tools open in separate windows. Using the Explorer window.. consists of the main window where the map window and data tables and reports are displayed and the Explorer window. to use it in other documents. such as a search tool to locate either a site. You can sort and filter the data in a table. support for drag-and-drop. parts of it. or configuration. Atoll uses standard Windows interface elements. The Explorer window contains most of the objects in a document arranged in folders. You can change the view by moving or zooming in or out and you can choose which objects are displayed and how they are displayed. allowing you to manage large amounts of data. with the ability to have several document windows open at the same time. Atoll also provides other tools. It is presented in detail in "The Explorer Window" on page 15. The map is the working area for your document and Atoll provides many features for working with the map. shown in Figure 1. Sorting. for cutting and pasting. You can also use the table feature to enter large amounts of information by cutting and pasting the information from any Windows spreadsheet into the table.1 The Atoll Work Area The Atoll work area. You can also export the current display definition. define various studies or configure the parameters or display of data objects. for example. The Explorer window contains the data and objects of a document. for example. Atoll offers a variety of tools to help you plan a network. The content of the folders in the Explorer window can be displayed in tables. or only certain objects. You can. Atoll offers the standard Windows Print functionality. Atoll also allows you to undo recent changes to your document. The Explorer window plays a central role in Atoll.1 on page 14. etc. you can manage all objects in the Atoll document: sites. or change how the data is displayed. context menus. a point on the map. You can save the entire project as a single file.Chapter 1: The Working Environment 1 The Working Environment The Atoll working environment provides a comprehensive and integrated set of tools and features that allow you to create and define your microwave-planning project in a single application. arranged in folders. This chapter explains the following topics: • • • • • • • • "The Atoll Work Area" on page 13 "The Explorer Window" on page 15 "Working with Objects" on page 17 "Printing in Atoll" on page 52 "Working with Maps" on page 26 "Working with Data Tables" on page 41 "Grouping. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 13 . with added functionality allowing you to print either the entire map window.1 on page 14). or you can link your project to external files. 1. as well as geographic data such as the Digital Terrain Model (DTM). some of which can be docked into the work area or floated over the work area (see Figure 1.

and minimise document windows as you can in any Windows-based application.1. To cascade document windows: • Select Window > Cascade. in order to display all of them at the same time. this button can be in the upper-left or upper-right corner. To tile document windows: • Select Window > Tile. To display a window: • On the View menu. maximise. they will display the content of the active document. display the content of the active document. Other windows and tools.1 Working with Document Windows When you have one Atoll document open. when you switch to a different document.1: Atoll user interface 1. 1. You can also choose to remove them from their position and float them over the Atoll working environment. or you can have it float over the working environment. such as the Explorer window. You can resize. or cascade them. To maximise a window in its docking area: • Click the Maximise button ( ) near the corner of the window. Depending on the position of the docking window. this button can be in the upper-left or upper-right corner. You can leave a window in its docking area. You can change how much room a window takes if it shares a docking area with other windows by maximising or minimising the window. To minimise a window in its docking area: • Click the Minimise button ( ) near the corner of the window.2 Docking or Floating an Atoll Window Only document windows are part of an individual Atoll document. you can tile document windows. They are not part of the individual Atoll document. 14 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . To close a window: • Click the Hide button ( ) in the corner of the window. Depending on the position of the window. As well. but part of the working environment and.1. Depending on the position of the window. in order to display the title bar of each document window. this button can be in the upper-left or upper-right corner. you can have several document windows open at the same time.Atoll User Manual Toolbar Document window (map) Workspace Explorer window (docked) Panoramic window (floating) Point Analysis window (docked) Figure 1. allowing you to maximise the amount of area for document windows or other windows. You can change how these windows and tools are displayed. select the name of the window.

The Explorer window contains the data and objects of a document. Or • Click the title bar of the docking window and drag the window to a different docking area. scanned images. Note: You can move the docking window by clicking the title bar and dragging it. In this section. 1. WiMAX 802.1 Working with the Explorer Window Tabs The Explorer window has three tabs: • The Data tab: The Data tab allows you to manage radio data and calculations. The number of folders depends on the number and types of geographical data types (vector data. CDMA2000) • The Modules tab: The Modules tab allows you to manage the propagation models and additional modules.16d Simulations. CDMA2000 Parameters. WiMAX 802. Each object and folder has a context-specific menu that you can access by right-clicking.) you import or create: Clutter classes Clutter heights Digital Terrain Model Population data Any other geo data map Traffic (GSM/GPRS/EDGE/TDMA. As well. 1. press CTRL as you drag the docking window.2 The Explorer Window The Explorer window plays a central role in Atoll. To dock a window: • To return the window to its previous docked location. You can modify items at the folder level. Depending on the modules installed with Atoll. GSM/GPRS Parameters. or LTE Simulations Traffic analysis (GSM/GPRS/EDGE projects only) Hexagonal design Microwave links CW Measurements and Drive test data The Geo tab: The Geo tab allows you to manage geographic data.Chapter 1: The Working Environment To float a window: • Double-click the docking window title bar. It contains: A Propagation Models folder with the following propagation models: Longley-Rice Okumura-Hata Cost-Hata Standard Propagation Model ITU 526-5 ITU 370-7 (Vienna 93) © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 15 . they remain the same no matter which document you open. most folder contents can also be accessed in a table. allowing you to easily manage large amounts of information. or LTE Parameters UMTS Simulations. For information on working with tables. or you can access and edit items individually. the Data tab has the following folders: • Sites Antennas Transmitters Predictions UMTS Parameters. see "Working with Data Tables" on page 41. UMTS HSPA. arranged in folders. double-click the docking window title bar. WiMAX 802. To prevent the window from docking as you move it.2. WiMAX 802.16e Parameters. Note: The window positions for docking windows are not associated with the current document.16e simulations. etc. The docking window leaves the docking area and floats over the working environment. with changes affecting all items in the folder. CDMA2000 Simulations . the following are described: • • • • "Working with the Explorer Window Tabs" on page 15 "Navigating in the Explorer Window" on page 16 "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 16 "Working with Layers Using the Explorer" on page 16.16d Parameters.

2. the map is made of objects arranged in layers. ) and the 1.2 Navigating in the Explorer Window The Explorer window has three tabs. To expand a folder to display its contents: • Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of its name. For example. To move from one tab to another: • Click the tab at the top of the Explorer window. a horizontal black line indicates where the object will remain when you release the mouse button (see Figure 1.4 Working with Layers Using the Explorer In Atoll. Select the tab of the Explorer window that contains that object. 16 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .Atoll User Manual ITU 1546 WLL Microwave Propagation Model Erceg-Greenstein (SUI) The AFP models available in your Atoll installation. Click and drag the object to its new position. As you drag the object. so that the results of one prediction are more clearly displayed. 1.3 Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer You can use the Explorer to display or hide objects on the map. 2. each tab has objects and folders containing objects. it will still be taken into consideration during calculations. Clear the check box ( ) immediately to the left of the object name. Note: You can hide the contents of an entire folder by clearing the check box to the left of the folder name. Select the tab of the Explorer window that contains that object. it indicates that the folder contains both visible and hidden objects. Each folder containing at least one object has an Expand ( ) or Contract button ( ) to the left of its name. The visibility of the lower layers depends on which layers are above and visible (see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 16) and on the transparency of these layers (see "Defining the Transparency of Objects and Object Types" on page 23).2. Any additional module created using the API. 2. A folder on a tab can be opened to allow you to view its contents. This allows you to hide one type of object so that another type of object is more plainly visible. When the check box of a folder appears greyed ( ). you could hide all predictions but one.2). The layers on the top (as arranged on the Data and Geo tabs) are the most visible on the screen and in print. 1. Note: Hiding an object affects only its visibility in the map window. The check box appears cleared ( object is no longer visible on the map. To hide an object on the map: 1. To move a layer up or down: 1.2.

the items found in the Explorer window and displayed on the map are referred to as objects. In this section. The context menu appears.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Figure 1.1 Renaming an Object You can change the name of an object in Atoll.2: Moving a layer Note: Before you print a map. 3. For example.1.3. To delete an object: 1. Individual objects are distinguished from each other by the number added automatically to the default prefix. You can change the default prefix for sites by editing the atoll. Note: In Atoll. objects such as sites are named with default prefixes. 1.3. For more information. 1. 1. an object’s context menu gives you access to commands specific to that object as well as to commands that are common to most objects.1. Enter the new name and press ENTER to change the name. To rename an object: 1. For more information. 1.3. The context menu appears. the following are explained: • • • "Using the Object Context Menu" on page 17 "Modifying Sites and Microwave Link Extremities Directly on the Map" on page 18 "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21.2 Deleting an Object You can delete objects from either the Explorer window or from the map. Select Rename from the context menu. a transmitter is an object of the type transmitter. see the Administrator Manual. you should pay attention to the arrangement of the layers.1 Using the Object Context Menu In Atoll.3 Working with Objects In Atoll. see "Printing Recommendations" on page 53.ini file. 2. Most objects in Atoll belong to an object type. The selected object is deleted. Right-click the object either in the Explorer window or on the map. Properties: "Displaying the Properties of an Object" on page 18. Delete: "Deleting an Object" on page 17. Select Delete from the context menu. the following context menu commands common to all objects types are explained: • • • Rename: "Renaming an Object" on page 17. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 17 . In this section. Right-click the object either in the Explorer window or on the map. 2. Atoll enables you to carry out many operations on objects by clicking the object directly or by right-clicking the object and selecting the operation from the context menu.

You can also change the position of a site by dragging it. you can switch only within one site (co-site transmitters). clicking the transmitters in the map window opens a context menu allowing you to select the transmitter you want (see "Selecting One of Several Microwave Links" on page 19). it can be difficult to find the data object in the Data tab.2 Modifying Sites and Microwave Link Extremities Directly on the Map In a complex microwave or -planning project. the following are explained: • • • • • "Selecting One of Several Microwave Links" on page 19 "Moving a Site Using the Mouse" on page 19 "Moving a Site to a Higher Location" on page 19 "Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using the Mouse" on page 19"Changing the Antenna Position Relative to the Site Using the Mouse" on page 20 "Selecting Another Site for the Link Extremity Using the Mouse" on page 20. 1. Right-click the object either in the Explorer window or on the map. To open the Properties dialogue of a data object: 1. to access the properties of co-site transmitters without closing and reopening the Properties dialogue. you can switch only within transmitters having the same activity and the same flag. Tip: When you are selecting data objects on the map. For propagation model properties. sites. for example. When a transmitter is selected. it can be difficult to ensure that the correct object has been selected. If transmitters are grouped by activity and by a flag. or by letting Atoll find a higher location for it. Select Properties from the context menu.3 Displaying the Properties of an Object You can modify the properties of an object in the Properties dialogue. The Display tab of the Properties dialogue is explained in the following section. When a site is selected. although it might be visible in the map window. Atoll prompts you to confirm these changes before switching to the next Properties dialogue. Switching Between Property Dialogues You can switch between the Properties dialogues of items (antennas. both ends of its icon have a green point ( ). When opening the an item’s Properties dialogue by double-clicking its record in a table. Atoll lets you access the Properties dialogue of sites and microwave links directly from the map. 18 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . You can use this feature. The context menu appears. When there is more than one microwave link with with the same azimuth.) in the same folder or subfolder in the Explorer window by using the browse buttons ( • • • • : jump to the first item in the list : jump to the previous item in the list : jump to the next item in the list : jump to the last item in the list ) in the lower-left corner of each Properties dialogue: If you have made any changes to the properties of an item.Atoll User Manual 1.3. For repeater properties.3. The browse buttons are not available: • • • • When creating a new item. 2.1. For example: • • • If transmitters are grouped by site. you can switch only within this group. the site (and its name) is surrounded by a black frame ( ). etc. If transmitters are grouped by a flag. Switching is performed within the lowest subfolder in the hierarchy. In this section. The Properties dialogue appears.

To have Atoll move a site to a higher location: 1.2. Move the pointer to the end of the antenna with a green circle ( ). the exact coordinates of the pointer’s current location are visible in the Status bar. click the link extremity whose azimuth you want to modify. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 19 . Tip: While this method allows you to place a site quickly. 2. To select one of several microwave link with the same azimuth: 1. Atoll moves the site to the highest point within the specified radius. with 0° indicating north.Chapter 1: The Working Environment 1. An arc with an arrow appears under the pointer. Atoll enables you to select a specificmicrowave link. As you drag the site.2.3: Selecting one microwave link 2. move the Microwave Radio Links folder on top of the Sites folder as explained in "Working with Layers Using the Explorer" on page 16. Atoll locks the position of a site. 1. in terms of reception and transmission. By default. 4. On the map. Click the green circle and drag it to change the antenna’s azimuth.4 Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using the Mouse In Atoll. or you can modify it on the map. In the Move to a Higher Location dialogue. A context menu appears with a list of thelinks with the same azimuth (seeFigure 1. 3. Figure 1. or by using the mouse. 2. enter the radius of the area in which Atoll should search and click OK.3. The context menu appears.3 Moving a Site to a Higher Location If you want to improve the location of a site. When the position of a site is locked. 1. click thelinks. 3. 3. Click Yes to confirm. - When you select a microwave link. Select thelink from the context menu. To move a site using the mouse: 1.2. Click and drag the site to the desired position. Atoll asks you to confirm that you want to move the site.3. Select Move to a Higher Location.3. Right-click the site in the map window. The current azimuth of the antenna is displayed in the far left of the status bar. you can adjust the location more precisely by editing the coordinates on the General tab of the Site Properties dialogue. In the Data tab of the Explorer window. both ends appear white and the link itself appears outlined ( ). In the map window.3. Atoll can find a higher location within a specified radius from the current location of the site. It is defined in degrees.2 Moving a Site Using the Mouse You can move a site by editing the coordinates on the General tab of the Site Properties dialogue. To modify the azimuth of the antenna using the mouse: 1. 2.2. you can set the azimuth of a link’s antenna by modifying it on the Radio tab of the Microwave Link Properties dialogue. Release the site where you would like to place it. using the mouse.3).1 Selecting One of Several Microwave Links If there is more than one microwave link with the same azimuth. 1.

you can change the link extremity and place it on another site using the mouse. in the toolbar) 1. 2. To move a microwave link extremity using the mouse: 1. 4. Note: If you make a mistake when changing the position of the link extremity.6 Selecting Another Site for the Link Extremity Using the Mouse In Atoll.Atoll User Manual 5. On the map. you can change the position of the antenna relative to the site either by adjusting the Dx and Dy parameters or by entering the coordinates of the antenna position on the General Tab of the Microwave link Property dialogue. but a short distance away. antennas are placed on the site. or by clicking to undo the changes made. 3. you can undo your changes by using Undo (by selecting Edit > Undo. by pressing CTRL+Z. Release the mouse when you have set the azimuth to the desired angle. However. Click the green rectangle and drag it to the other site on the map.3. Move the pointer to the end of the antenna with a green rectangle ( ). A cross appears under the pointer. The current coordinates (x and y) of the antenna are displayed in the far right of the status bar. you can undo your changes by using Undo (by selecting Edit > Undo. A cross appears under the pointer.2. Release the mouse when the frame appears around the site. by pressing CTRL+Z. 5.3. Move the pointer to the end of the antenna with a green rectangle ( ). you can undo your changes by using Undo (by selecting Edit > Undo. To select another site for the link extremity on the map: 1. In the Data tab of the Explorer window. In Atoll. Dx and Dy are the distance in metres of the antenna from the site position. 20 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . click the link extremity you want to move. 2. move the Microwave Radio Links folder on the top of the Sites folder as explained in "Working with Layers Using the Explorer" on page 16. 5. You can also modify the position of the antenna on the map. 3. The site for the selected link extremity is modified on the General tab of the Microwave Link Properties dialogue and the link is renamed. On the map. The position of the selected link extremity is modified on the General tab of the Microwave Link Properties dialogue. or by clicking in the toolbar) to undo the changes made.2. 1. Release the mouse when you have moved the selected link extremity to the desired position. by pressing CTRL+Z. In the Data tab of the Explorer window. Note: If you make a mistake when changing the azimuth. move the Microwave Radio Links folder on the top of the Sites folder as explained in "Working with Layers Using the Explorer" on page 16. click the link extremity you want to move. antennas are occasionally not located directly on the site. using the mouse. The antenna’s azimuth relative to the link direction is modified on the Radio tab of the Microwave Link Properties dialogue. 4. Click the green rectangle and drag it to change the antenna’s position relative to the site.5 Changing the Antenna Position Relative to the Site Using the Mouse By default. Note: If you make a mistake when changing the position of the link extremity. or by clicking in the toolbar) to undo the changes made. indicating it is selected.

The Display tab is similar for all object types whose appearance can be configured. The context menu appears. 1. Options that are inapplicable for a particular object type are unavailable on the Display tab of its Properties dialogue (see Figure 1. The Properties dialogue appears.5: The Display tab for an individual site To define the display properties of an object type: 1.4). most objects. In this section. Figure 1. the following options are available: "Defining the Display Type" on page 22 "Defining the Transparency of Objects and Object Types" on page 23 "Defining the Visibility Scale" on page 23 "Defining the Object Type Label" on page 23 "Defining the Object Type Tip Text" on page 24 "Adding an Object Type to the Legend" on page 24 4. the Display tab will only show the options applicable to an individual object (see Figure 1.3. 3. 2. the display options are explained.Chapter 1: The Working Environment 1.3. How an individual object appears on the map depends on the settings on the Display tab of the object type’s Properties dialogue. Select Properties from the context menu.5). Select the Display tab. belong to an object type. such as sites. Set the display parameters.1 Defining the Display Properties of Objects Figure 1.3. followed by a few examples of how you can use them while working on your Atoll document (see "Examples of Using the Display Properties of Objects" on page 25). Depending on the object type.4: The Display tab for Sites When you access the Properties dialogue of an individual object. Right-click the object type folder in the Explorer window.3 Display Properties of Objects In Atoll. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 21 .

For information on the commands available. For an example. For more information. Click OK to close the Symbol Style dialogue. 2. Enter the upper and lower limits of the value in the First Break and Last Break boxes respectively. objects of different types. v. click the symbol in the table below. Using the Actions Button The Actions button on the Display tab of the Properties dialogue allows you to modify the display type as defined in "Defining the Display Type" on page 22. Notes: • • When you create a new map object. To modify the appearance of the symbol. Atoll inserts a new threshold in the table before the threshold selected in the table.ini file. sites. For information on the commands available. Value intervals: defines the display of each object according to set ranges of the value of a selected field. you can choose from the following display types: unique. Click OK. Insert before: When the selected display type is value intervals. ii. Modify the symbol as desired. For example. you select Shading to define the number of value intervals and configure their colour. This display type can be used to distinguish objects of the same type by one characteristic. ii. The Actions menu gives you access to the following commands: Select all: Atoll selects all the values in the table. By defining a unique symbol for an object type. Insert after: When the selected display type is value intervals. vi. Select the name of the Field by which you want to display the objects. i. 2. Select the name of the Field by which you want to display the objects. iv. Click OK to close the Symbol Style dialogue. 22 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Shading: Atoll opens the Shading dialogue. Click OK to close the Symbol Style dialogue. see the Administrator Manual. discrete values. for example. Atoll inserts a new threshold in the table after the threshold selected in the table. see Figure 1. iii. or the altitude of sites. value intervals. to distinguish population density.Atoll User Manual 5. You can define the default symbol used for sites and how it is displayed by editing an option in the atoll. Properties: Atoll opens the Display dialogue where you may change the colour and style. i. The Symbol Style dialogue appears. You can click the Actions button to access the Actions menu. Delete: Atoll removes selected value from the table. v. This display type can be used. click the symbol in the table. Modify the symbol as desired. To access the Actions menu: 1. Access the Display tab of the Properties dialogue as explained in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. a new site. iv.7 on page 24. or to distinguish inactive from active sites. you could use this display type to distinguish transmitter by antenna type. The Symbol Style dialogue appears. for example. When "Value Intervals" is the selected display type. Select the display type from the Display Type list: Unique: defines the same symbol for all objects of this type. you must click the Refresh button ( ) for Atoll to assign a colour to newly created object according to the set display type. Defining the Display Type Depending on the object selected. iii. or automatic. To change the display type: 1. To modify the appearance of a symbol. You can click the Actions button to access the Actions menu. see "Using the Actions Button" on page 22. i. Click the Actions button. for example. are immediately identifiable. and enter a value in the Interval box. The value intervals will be determined by the set values and coloured by a shade going from the set start colour to the set end colour. Define the ranges directly in the table below. iii. Discrete values: defines the display of each object according to the value of a selected field. see "Using the Actions Button" on page 22. To modify the appearance of a symbol. signal strength. Access the Display tab of the Properties dialogue as explained in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. Define the colour shading by choosing a Start Colour and an End Colour. click the symbol in the table below. The Symbol Style dialogue appears. ii. Modify the symbol as desired.

2. Access the Display tab of the Properties dialogue as explained in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. They do not affect which objects are considered during calculations. To change the transparency: 1. Figure 1. such as clutter classes. Defining the Object Type Label For most object types. Defining the Transparency of Objects and Object Types You can change the transparency of some objects.6: Defining a label 3. To define a label for an object type: 1. 4. Select the fields which you want to display in the label: a. you select Shading to choose a Start Colour and an End Colour. such as sites. prevent the map from being cluttered with symbols when you are at a certain scale. To define an object visibility range: 1. is within this range. Visibility ranges are taken into account for screen display. 2. To remove a field from the list of Group these fields in this order. This can be used to. To select a field to be displayed in the label for the object type. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 23 . b. Enter a Visibility Scale minimum in the between 1: text box. you can display information about each object in the form of a label that is displayed with the object. The objects will be grouped in the order of the fields in the Selected Fields list. so that you can share them with other users or use them in other documents. Enter a Visibility Scale maximum in the and 1: text box. To change the order of the fields. Access the Display tab of the Properties dialogue as explained in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. and some object types. You can display information from every field in that object type’s data table. Move the Transparency slider to the right to make the object or object type more transparent or to the left to make it less transparent. Configuration: Select Import if you want to import an existing display configuration. such as predictions. Click OK to close the Field Selection dialogue and click OK to close the Properties dialogue. An object is visible only if the scale. 2. 3. Click the Browse button ( ) beside the Label box. and for printing and previewing printing. Access the Display tab of the Properties dialogue as explained in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. c.6). from top to bottom. Defining the Visibility Scale You can define a visibility range for object types. select the field in the Available Fields list and click to move it to the Selected Fields list.Chapter 1: The Working Environment When "Discrete Values" is the selected display type. Select Export if you want to export the display settings of the current object to a configuration file. including from fields that you add. as displayed on the Map toolbar. to allow objects on lower layers to be visible on the map. The Field Selection dialogue appears (see Figure 1. select the field in the Selected Fields list and click to remove it. select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list. for example.

2. Access the Display tab of the Properties dialogue as explained in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. b. 3. see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 16. Only visible objects appear in the Legend window. see "Defining the Object Type Label" on page 23. Click the Browse button ( ) beside the Tip Text box. To activate the tool tip function: • Click the Display Tips button ( ) on the toolbar. You can display information from every field in that object type’s data table. The Legend window appears. see "Defining the Object Type Tip Text" on page 24. the intervals defined are: • • • Signal level >= -65 red -65 > Signal level >= -105 shading from red to blue (9 intervals) Signal level < -105 not shown in the coverage. In the Explorer window. 1. Tool tips will now appear when the pointer is over the object. and Point to Multipoint folders. To define tip text for an object type: 1. you must activate the tool tip function before they appear. The entries in the Legend column will appear in the Legend window. Links. The defined display will appear on the legend. Access the Display tab of the Properties dialogue as explained in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. Multi-Hops. you can display information about each object in the form of a tool tip that is only visible when you move the pointer over the object. The Field Selection dialogue appears (see Figure 1.Atoll User Manual Note: For most object types. To display the Legend window: • Select View > Legend. you can enter information in the Legend column to be displayed on the legend. Select the fields which you want to display in the tool tip: a. 2. For more information on tool tips.7. such as sites and microwave links.7: Defined thresholds as they will appear in the Legend With value intervals. If there is no information entered in this column. Adding an Object Type to the Legend You can display the information defined by the display type (see "Defining the Display Type" on page 22) in your Atoll document’s legend. This option has the advantage of keep object-related information permanently visible. To remove a field from the list of Group these fields in this order. This option has the advantage of not filling the map window with text. the tool tip displays the total numbers of elements present in the Sites. Figure 1. To select a field to be displayed in the tool tip for the object type. Once you have defined the tool tips. the maximum and minimum values are displayed instead. In Figure 1. select the field in the Selected Fields list and click Note: to remove it. 24 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . For information on displaying or hiding objects. For most object types. and their subfolders. For more information on tool tips. Check the Add to legend box.6). including from fields that you add. you can also display object information in the form of a tool tip that is only visible when you move the pointer over the object. select the field in the Available Fields list and click to move it to the Selected Fields list. you can also display object information in the form of a label that is displayed with the object. on the Display tab of a signal level prediction. Defining the Object Type Tip Text For most object types.

In this example.Signal Level Study Atoll displays the results of a signal level study as value intervals. see the Administrator Manual. Figure 1. The following two figures show the results of the same best server area and handover margin study. 3. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 25 . The context menu appears. In Figure 1. for each pixel on the map. the study results are also immediately visible. Select "Automatic" as the Display Type.ini file.2 Examples of Using the Display Properties of Objects In this section are the following examples of how display properties of objects can be used: • • "Automatic Display Type . the transmitter display type is "Discrete Values. you can change the range of data displayed. or you can change the colours to make the intervals more visible. Automatic Display Type . You can use the Shading command to define the appearance of these value intervals to make the results easier to read or more relevant to your needs. which server is best received. these value intervals appear as differences of shading. 1. if you are more interested in reception from -80 dBm to -105 dBm. The difference in colour is insufficient to make clear which transmitter is best received on each pixel. Right-click the Transmitters folder in the Explorer window. Shading . Select Properties from the context menu.Server Coverage Studies When doing a best server prediction. 6. In Figure 1.8.Server Coverage Studies" on page 25 "Shading . you can identify immediately which transmitter is best received on each pixel.Signal Level Study" on page 25.8: Value interval display type Figure 1. Figure 1. Select the Display tab." Because Atoll ensures that each transmitter has a different colour than the transmitters surrounding it.ini file. Atoll calculates. The Properties dialogue appears. Click the Refresh button ( ) to update the display of the study results. the transmitter display type is "Automatic. the interval between each break." Atoll colours each pixel on the map according to the colour of the transmitter that is best received on that pixel.10 shows the results of the best signal level plot from -60 dBm to -105 dBm. On the map. 2. Click OK. 4. you can change the shading to display only those values.Chapter 1: The Working Environment You can also display the comments defined in the properties of a coverage prediction in the Legend window by setting an option in the atoll. For more information about setting options in the atoll. The result is visible in Figure 1.3. This way." with the site name as the chosen value. For example.11.9: Automatic display type To display the results of a server coverage study with the transmitters set to the Automatic display type: 1.3.9. If the selected display type for transmitters is "Automatic. 5. However.

Change the value of the First Break to "-80".4.11: Shading from -80 dBm to -105 dBm 1." 6. or by holding down the CTRL key and rotating the mouse wheel button forward. Expand the Predictions folder in the Explorer window and right-click the signal level study. The context menu appears. Click the Zoom icon ( ) on the Map toolbar (or press CTRL+Q). To zoom in on the map: 1. Click OK to close the Shading dialogue. Note: You can also zoom in by pressing CTRL++. you do so based on the position of the cursor on the map. Click Actions to display the menu and select Shading. 4. 3. 26 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .10: Shading from -60 dBm to -105 dBm To change how the results of a signal level study are displayed: Figure 1.4. 1.1. by selecting Zoom In from the View menu. 2. When you zoom in or out on the map. "Map Window Pointers" on page 40. 1. 2. Click the map where you want to zoom in. Atoll also allows you to define a zoom range outside of which certain objects are not displayed (see "Defining the Visibility Scale" on page 23). by zooming in on a specific area of the map. Select the Display tab.4 Working with Maps Atoll has the following functions to help you work with maps: • • • • • • • • • • • • "Changing the Map Scale" on page 26 "Moving the Map in the Document Window" on page 27 "Using the Panoramic Window" on page 27 "Centring the Map Window on an Object" on page 28 "Measuring Distances on the Map" on page 28 "Displaying Rulers Around the Map" on page 28 "Displaying the Map Legend" on page 29 "Using Zones in the Map Window" on page 29 "Editing Polygons. Leave the value of the Last Break at "-105. 1.1 Zooming In and Out Atoll offers several tools for zooming in and out on the map. 5. The Shading dialogue appears. or by choosing a scale. The Properties dialogue appears. and Points" on page 34 "Saving a Map as a Graphic Image" on page 39 "Copying a Map to Another Application" on page 40. Select Properties from the context menu.Atoll User Manual Figure 1.1 Changing the Map Scale You can change the scale of the map by zooming in or out. 7. Lines. Click OK to close the Properties dialogue and apply your changes.

. by selecting Zoom Out from the View menu. ) on the Map toolbar.1. click the Next Zoom button ( level (or press ALT + →).1. 2.4. the dark rectangle). Click in the scale box ( 2. Select the scale from the list.e. 3.3 Choosing a Scale To choose a scale: 1. To resize the displayed map area: 1. ) to return to the latest zoom 1. Click in the Panoramic window on one of the four corners of the area you want to zoom in on.Chapter 1: The Working Environment To zoom out on the map: 1. 1. To move between zoom levels: • • Click the Previous Zoom button ( ) to return to a zoom level you have already used (or press ALT + ←). Click the Zoom Area icon ( ) on the Map toolbar (or press CTRL+W). Click the Move Map Window button ( ) on the Map toolbar (or press CTRL + D). Click in the Panoramic window on a corner or border of the zoom area (i.4.4. Note: You can also zoom out by pressing CTRL+–. allowing you to move quickly between previous zoom levels and zoomed areas. Atoll zooms in on the selected area. 1.2 Moving the Map in the Document Window You can move the map in the document window using the mouse. 2.3 Using the Panoramic Window The Panoramic window displays the entire map with all of the imported geographic data. helping you situate the displayed area in relation to the entire map. Click the Zoom icon ( ) on the Map toolbar (or press CTRL+Q). When you release the mouse button. Atoll zooms the map to the entered scale. Enter the desired scale. If the scale value you want is not in the list: 1. 2. Drag to the opposite corner. When you release the mouse button.4 Changing Between Previous Zoom Levels Atoll saves the last five zoom levels. You can use the Panoramic window to: • • • Zoom in on a specific area of the map Resize the displayed map area Move around the map. Drag to the opposite corner. Right-click the map where you want to zoom out.2 Zooming In on a Specific Area To zoom in on a specific area of the map: 1.4.1. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 27 . Click the arrow next to the scale box ( 2. Click in the map on one of the four corners of the area you want to select. 2. 1. 1. Press ENTER. Move the pointer over the map and drag the map in the desired direction. 2. To move the map in the document window: 1.4. Drag the border to its new position. Atoll zooms in on the selected area. or holding down the CTRL key and rotating the mouse wheel button backward. Once you have returned to a previous zoom level. To zoom in on a specific area of the map: 1. ) on the Map toolbar. A dark rectangle indicates what part of the geographic data is presently displayed in a document window. 3.

such as a site. To display rulers: 1.12: Measurement data in the status bar 1. the azimuth of each segment between two points. 2. 1.4 Centring the Map Window on an Object You can centre the map on any selected object.4. Right-click the object in the map window or in the Explorer window.5 Measuring Distances on the Map You can measure distances on the map by using the Distance Measurement tool. Click the Distance Measurement button ( ) on the toolbar. Total distance between Azimuth between secondfirst and last point last and last point Distance between secondlast and last point Figure 1. Place the pointer over the second point on the map. In the Options dialogue. To measure the total distance on the map on a line over a series of points: 1. Click once on the map at each point on the line between the first point and the final point. As you move the pointer away from the first point.12): The total distance between the first point and the last point The distance between the second-last point and the last point The azimuth between the last two points. 2. you can select it in the Explorer window and then select the Centre in the Map Window command. a site. 2. on the map. 2. To measure a distance on the map between two points: 1. 2. You can select the object in the map window or in the Explorer window. Click the first point on the map once. the dark rectangle). You can also use the Distance Measurement tool to measure distance along a line with several points. where you will have to change direction on the line. Atoll marks the initial position and connects it to the pointer with a line.Atoll User Manual To move around the map: 1. 3. and the total distance. or on any zone in the Zones folder on the Geo tab of the Explorer window. As you move the pointer away from the first point.6 Displaying Rulers Around the Map You can display rulers around the map in the document window. Atoll marks the initial position and connects it to the pointer with a line. The status bar displays the following (see Figure 1. Click the Distance Measurement button ( ) on the toolbar. 3. the status bar displays the following (see Figure 1. click the Coordinates tab. Drag the rectangle to its new position.e. When centring the map window on an object the current scale is kept. The Distance Measurement tool also gives you the azimuth of a straight line between two points.4. Tip: If you want to quickly find an object.4.12): The distance between the two points The azimuth between the two points. Atoll will then give you the distance between each point (as you measure). 28 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Click in the Panoramic window in the zoom area (i. 4. When you reach the last point on the line. a transmitter. for example.. 1. Select Tools > Options. Select Centre in the Map Window from the context menu. Click the first point on the map once. To the map window on a selected object: 1.

Zones can be used to define areas of the map for the following purposes: • Filtering Zone: The filtering zone is a graphical filter that restricts the objects displayed on the map and on the Data tab of the Explorer window to the objects inside the filtering zone. For example. if you have drawn a zone.8 Using Zones in the Map Window On the Geo tab of the Explorer window. b. etc.1 Creating a Filtering Zone To create a filtering zone: 1. even if you have cleared the filtering zone’s visibility check box. Printing Zone: The printing zone allows you to define the area to be printed.4.4. • • • • 1. 3. interference analysis. it will be taken into account whether or not its visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window is selected. link budget. Geographic Export Zone: The geographic export zone is used to define part of the map to be exported as a bitmap. etc. the sites outside the filtering zone will not be taken into consideration in coverage predictions. 5. Focus Zone: With the focus zone. you can reduce the time and cost of calculations and make visualisation of data objects on the map clearer. To display the legend: • Select View > Legend. you can select the areas of coverage predictions or other calculations on which you want to generate reports and results. 1. 4. You will have to delete the zone if you no longer want to select sites using a filtering zone.4.4. c. By limiting the number of sites. see "Adding an Object Type to the Legend" on page 24.. Draw the filtering zone: a. Select Draw from the context menu. Computation Zone: The computation zone is used to define which microwave links are to be taken into consideration in calculations (i.e. lines.Chapter 1: The Working Environment 3. The zones are a type of polygons.1. For information on adding object types to the legend. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of Zones folder to expand the folder. 2. Click once on the map to start drawing the zone. Click OK. if you have drawn a zone.8. Atoll provides you with a set of tools known as zones.8. Important: Zones are taken into account whether or not they are visible. The filtering zone is taken into account whether or not it is visible. if you have filtered the sites using a filtering zone. You will have to delete the zone if you no longer want to select sites using a filtering zone. Click once on the map to define each point on the map where the border of the zone changes direction. it will be taken into account whether or not its visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window is selected. Under Display rulers. 4. or points. which can be created and modified in the same way as contours.7 Displaying the Map Legend You can display a map legend. It also restricts which objects are used in calculations such as coverage predictions. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 29 . The legend will contain the information on the object types that you have added to it. In this section. Click twice to finish drawing and close the zone.1 Using a Filtering Zone The filtering zone is a graphical filter that restricts the objects displayed on the map and on the Data tab of the Explorer window to the objects inside the filtering zone. the following are explained: • • • • • • "Using a Filtering Zone" on page 29 "Using a Computation Zone" on page 30 "Using a Focus Zone" on page 31 "Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools" on page 31 "Using a Printing Zone" on page 33 "Using a Geographic Export Zone" on page 33. It also restricts which objects are used in calculations such as coverage predictions. In other words. In other words.). etc.. 1. Right-click the Filtering Zone folder. select where you want the rulers to be displayed in the map window. 1.

• Once you have created a computation zone. In other words. and intersects the computation zone.2. a polygon describing an administrative area. that are selected by the current filter parameters). b. you can import it and use it as a computation zone. Atoll calculates all the microwave links that are active. 1. Select Draw from the context menu. Atoll makes its calculations on all microwave links that are active and filtered and for the entire extent of the geographical data available. Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon. the computation zone allows you to restrict your studies to the part of the network you are currently working on. By allowing you to reduce the number of microwave links studied. Right-click the Computation Zone folder. Click once on the map to define each point on the map where the border of the zone changes direction. you can use Atoll’s polygon editing tools to edit it. Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a computation zone by right-clicking it and selecting Use as > Computation Zone from the context menu. The computation zone is delimited by a red line. Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon. On the Data tab of the Explorer window. You will have to delete the computation zone if you no longer want to define an area for calculations. When working with a large network. The computation zone is taken into account whether or not it is visible. 30 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . filtered (i.4. Fit to Map Window: You can create a computation zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map Window from the context menu. You can also create a filtering zone as follows: • • • Vector Edition toolbar: You can use the New Polygon ( ) and New Rectangle ( ) buttons available in the Vector Edition toolbar to draw the filtering zone. for example. For more information on the polygon editing tools.8.e. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window.4. by right-clicking the Filtering Zone folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Export from the context menu. • Once you have created a filtering zone.8. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Zones folder.Atoll User Manual The filtering zone is delimited by a blue line. you can use Atoll’s polygon editing tools to edit it. For more information on the polygon editing tools. any folder whose content is affected by the filtering zone appears with a special icon ( ). If there is no computation zone defined. so that you can use it in a different Atoll document. Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a filtering zone by right-clicking it and selecting Use as > Filtering Zone from the context menu. You can also create a computation zone as follows: • • • Vector Edition toolbar: You can use the New Polygon ( ) and New Rectangle ( ) buttons available in the Vector Edition toolbar to draw the computation zone. You can import it by right-clicking the Filtering Zone folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu. When you make a link budget or you study interference. a polygon describing an administrative area. you can import it and use it as a filtering zone. 1. You can import it by right-clicking the Computation Zone folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu. The data objects outside of the selected zone are filtered out. for example. 5. to indicate that the folder contents have been filtered. Fit to Map Window: You can create a filtering zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map Window from the context menu. Click twice to finish drawing and close the zone.1 Creating a Computation Zone To create a computation zone: 1. Draw the computation zone: a.. it will be taken into account whether or not its visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window is selected. Atoll reduces both the time and computer resources necessary for calculations. if you have drawn a computation zone. Note: You can export the filtering zone as a polygon. 3. Click once on the map to start drawing the zone.2 Using a Computation Zone The computation zone is used to define the area where Atoll carries out calculations. c. see"Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools" on page 31. see "Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools" on page 31. 4. 2. The context menu appears.

Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Zones folder. for example. instead of displaying statistics for every site that has been calculated. so that you can use it in a different Atoll document. etc. Click once on the map to start drawing the zone. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window.8. 2. in the following ways: Saving the computation zone in the user configuration: For information on exporting the computation zone in the user configuration. you can display the statistics for a specific number of sites.4 Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools Atoll provides you with several different ways of editing the computation zone.8. You will have to delete the zone if you no longer want to define an area for reports.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Note: You can save the computation zone. Select Draw from the context menu. 1. You can import it by right-clicking the Focus Zone folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu. However.4. and the potential interferers while the focus zone filters the displayed results. and filtering zones. Atoll bases the statistics on the area covered by the focus zone.3 Using a Focus Zone Using the focus zone . Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon. • 1. The context menu appears. The computation zone defines the sites and microwave links calculated in link budget. Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a focus zone by right-clicking it and selecting Use as > Focus Zone from the context menu. by combining several polygons. if no focus zone is defined. You can edit these zones by editing the points that define them. 3. see "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 67. you can import it and use it as a focus zone. it will no longer be displayed but will still be taken into account. see "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 67. Right-click the Focus Zone folder. Atoll will use the computation zone. focus zone. 5. it will be taken into account whether or not its visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window is selected. In other words. Draw the focus: a. b. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 31 . you can define an area on which statistics can be drawn and on which reports are made. If you clear the zone’s visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window.It is important not to confuse the computation zone and the focus and hot spot zones. a polygon describing an administrative area. Click once on the map to define each point on the map where the border of the zone changes direction. or by deleting parts of the polygons that make up these zones. if you have drawn a focus zone. you can delete it from the map. When you no longer need the zone. Click twice to finish drawing and close the zone. interference studies. - 1. Atoll takes the focus zone taken into account whether or not they are visible. You can also create a focus zone in one of the following ways: • • • Vector Edition toolbar: You can use the New Polygon ( ) and New Rectangle ( ) buttons available in the Vector Edition toolbar to draw the focus zone. A focus zone is delimited by a green line. by using a focus zone for the report. 4. in the following ways: Saving the focus zone in the user configuration: For information on exporting the focus zone in the user configuration. Note: A focus zone can consist of more than one polygon. Note: You can save the focus zone . Exporting the computation zone: You can export the computation zone by rightclicking the Computation Zone folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Export from the context menu. Fit to Map Window: You can create a focus zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map Window from the context menu.4.8. c.3.1 Drawing a Focus Zone To define a focus zone: 1. The polygons of a focus zone must not intersect or overlap each other. Exporting the focus zone: You can export the focus zone by right-clicking the Focus Zone folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Export from the context menu.4. so that you can use it in a different Atoll document.

whereas the coordinates of the vertices of holes within polygonal areas are in counter-clockwise order. 3. You can now edit it by: Moving a point: i. Select Edit from the context menu. Put the polygon zone in editing mode as explained in "Editing Polygon Zones" on page 32. The filtering. iii. whereas the coordinates of the vertices of holes within polygonal areas are in counter-clockwise order. Position the pointer over the polygon zone border where you want to add a point.4. The Vector Edition toolbar has the following buttons: i. computation. ii. The pointer changes ( ). 4. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the polygon zone. 2. : To delete part of the selected polygon zone: 32 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Tip: You can also activate the vector tools by selecting the polygon zone to edit from the Vector Edition toolbar list. The pointer changes ( ). ii. The pointer changes ( ). 2. Atoll creates a group of polygons of the selected and new contours.8. In this section. Double-click to close the polygon zone. Select the polygon zone. The holes within polygonal areas are differentiated from overlaying polygons by the order of the coordinates of their vertices. The point is deleted. Atoll merges them. and focus zone polygons can contain holes. you must first put it in editing mode. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the new polygon zone. The holes within polygonal areas are differentiated from overlaying polygons by the order of the coordinates of their vertices. v. the following are explained: • • "Editing Polygon Zones" on page 32 "Removing a Polygon Zone" on page 33. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. Right-click the folder containing the polygon zone you want to edit. Right-click and select Insert Point from the context menu. Position the pointer over the point you want to move. The coordinates of the vertices of polygonal areas are in clockwise order. 1. To put the polygon zone in editing mode: 1. If polygon zones overlap. 2. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of Zones folder to expand the folder.1 Editing Polygon Zones You can edit polygon zones in several ways. you can create complex polygon zones by using the tools on the Vector Edition toolbar. Deleting a point from a polygon zone: i. To edit a polygon zone using the icons on the Vector Edition toolbar: 1. Editing Polygon Zones Using the Toolbar In Atoll. : To combine several polygon zones: In the Vector Edition toolbar. iv. Adding a point to the polygon zone: i. ii. click the Combine button ( ). You can now edit the polygon zone as explained in the following sections: • • • "Editing the Points of a Polygon Zone" on page 32 "Editing Polygon Zones Using the Toolbar" on page 32 "Editing Polygon Zones Using the Context Menu" on page 33.4.Atoll User Manual The computation and focuspolygons can contain holes. Draw more polygon zones if desired. The vector tools on the Vector Edition toolbar are activated. A point is added to the polygon zone border at the position of the pointer. Click the contour to edit. The coordinates of the vertices of polygonal areas are in clockwise order. Right-click and select Delete Point from the context menu. Drag the point to its new position. ii. Editing the Points of a Polygon Zone To edit a point of a polygon zone: 1. Put the polygon zone in editing mode as explained in "Editing Polygon Zones" on page 32. Before you can edit a polygon zone. Position the pointer over the point you want to delete.

5 1. Atoll creates a new polygon of the overlapping area of the two polygons and deletes the parts of the polygons that do not overlap. Right-click the polygon zone to display the context menu and select one of the following: Properties: Select Properties to open the Properties dialogue of the selected polygon zone. ii. Delete: Select Delete to remove the selected contour. click the Delete button ( ).8. click the Intersection button ( ). Tip: You can also delete it by right-clicking its border on the map and selecting Delete from the context menu. ii. you can access certain commands using the context menu. see "Defining the Printing Zone" on page 53.6 Using a Printing Zone The printing zone allows you to define the area to be printed. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. or point on the map.4. line. line. or point from the map. : To create a polygon out of the overlapping area of two polygons: In the Vector Edition toolbar. Move the contour. Atoll offers you the option of exporting only the area covered by the zone if you export the map as a raster image. iv. 1. 3. The polygon zone is removed and all document data are now displayed. line. iii. iii. From the context menu. To edit a polygon zone using the context menu: 1. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the polygon.8. In the Vector Edition toolbar. Insert Point: Select Insert Point to add a point to the border of the contour at the position of the pointer. i. ii. Right-click the folder containing the zone you want to remove. 1. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of Zones folder to expand the folder. iii. Atoll deletes the area from the selected contour.8. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the area. To remove a polygon zone: 1.4. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the polygon. Double-click to close the polygon. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the polygon that will overlap the selected one. Editing Polygon Zones Using the Context Menu When you are editing polygon zones. or point. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 33 . iv.4. 4.2 Removing a Polygon Zone When you no longer need a polygon zone. For information on using the printing zone. Atoll separates the area covered by the polygon from the selected polygon and creates a new polygon. select Delete Zone. line. Draw the area you want to delete from the selected polygon zone by clicking once on the map where you want to begin drawing the area to delete. iv. click the Split button ( ). Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the polygon that will split the selected one. 2. 2. Double-click to close the polygon.Chapter 1: The Working Environment i. Quit edition: Select Quit Edition to exit editing mode. or point. you can remove the zone and redisplay all data objects. i. Using a Geographic Export Zone If you want to export part of the map as a bitmap.4. you can define a geographic export zone. Double-click to close the area. The Properties dialogue gives the coordinates of each point that defines the position and shape of the polygon zone. : To split the selected polygon into several polygons: In the Vector Edition toolbar. After you have defined a geographic export zone. iii. Click the polygon zone you want to edit. Move: i. Click to place the contour. Select Move from the context menu to move the contour. ii.

line. You can move or delete the points that define polygons. by adding a vector layer to them and afterwards adding polygons. Note: You can export the geographic export zone as a polygon. The holes within polygonal areas are differentiated from overlaying polygons by the order of the coordinates of their vertices. Drag to the opposite corner of the rectangle that will define the geographic export zone. and Points Using the Context Menu" on page 37. 4.Atoll User Manual To define a geographic export zone: 1. Important: The geographic export zone can only export in raster format.9.4. by a transmitter attribute. Lines. lines. 5. Select Draw from the context menu. When you no longer need the polygon. for example. Polygons. and Points Atoll uses different types of polygons. and Points" on page 35 "Editing the Shape of Polygons and Lines" on page 35 "Combining or Cropping Polygons Using the Toolbar" on page 36 "Editing a Point" on page 36 "Editing Contours. In this section. you can delete it from the map. see "Editing Geoclimatic Maps" on page 115. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Zones folder. If you clear the geographic export zone’s visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window. described in "Using Zones in the Map Window" on page 29. 1. b. and points in the map window. The geographic export zone is delimited by a light purple line . 34 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . lines and points. Lines. can along with lines and points. so that you can use it in a different Atoll document. the different ways of editing polygons. the zones such as the computation and focus. called contours. You can edit polygons by editing the points that define them. be used to add additional information to geographic data. For example. geoclimatic maps. and points. For information on modifying certain geographic data maps by adding a vector layer. whereas the coordinates of the vertices of holes within polygonal areas are in counterclockwise order. Click the point on the map that will be one corner of the rectangle that will define the geographic export zone. by path loss. and points are explained: • • • • • • "Adding a Vector Layer" on page 34 "Creating Polygons. Another type of polygon. Draw the geographic export zone: a. you can import it and use it as a geographic export zone. 1.1 Adding a Vector Layer You can add vector objects such as polygons. lines. by right-clicking the Geographic Export Zone folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Export from the context menu. or point. and points. The context menu appears. Atoll provides you with several different ways of editing the polygons. You can not export in raster format if the coverage prediction was made per transmitter (for example.4. lines. You can import it by right-clicking the Geographic Export Zone folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu. or by total losses). You can also modify certain geographic data maps. Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a geographic export zone by right-clicking it and selecting Use as > Geographic Export Zone from the context menu. coverage predictions with the display type set by transmitter. by signal level. For more information on the polygon editing tools. 2. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. see "Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools" on page 31. it will no longer be displayed but will still be taken into account. lines or points to geographical map information in a project by first creating a vector layer. Fit to Map Window: You can create a geographic export zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map Window from the context menu. Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon. Lines. the geographic export zone will be created from the rectangle defined by the two corners. Right-click the Geographic Export Zone folder. • Once you have created a geographic export zone. including the computation and focuspolygons can contain holes. 3. You can also create a geographic export zone as follows: • • • Vector Edition toolbar: You can use the New Polygon ( ) and New Rectangle ( ) buttons available in the Vector Edition toolbar to draw the geogaphic export zone. When you release the mouse.9 Editing Polygons. or by deleting parts of the polygons. lines. by combining several polygons. you can use Atoll’s polygon editing tools to edit it. The coordinates of the vertices of polygonal areas are in clockwise order. Only the coverage area of a single transmitter can be exported in raster format. are specific types of polygons.

The context menu appears. Select Edit from the context menu. New Line: a. For information on adding vector objects such as contours. 1. c. The vector tools on the Vector Edition toolbar are activated.4. see "Editing Geoclimatic Maps" on page 115. Select Edit from the context menu. To add a polygon. Click once on the map where you want to begin the line. Right-click the vector layer on the Geo tab. © Forsk 2010 Position the pointer over the point you want to move. b. right-click the vector layer folder. c. c. see "Renaming an Object" on page 17. Click each time you change angles on the line. Select the contour or line. Atoll creates a folder called "Vectors" on the Geo tab of the Explorer window. you must define the value the polygon or rectangle represents and map the vector layer. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the contour. The context menu appears. Note: If the polygon or rectangle is on the vector layer of a geoclimatic map. By renaming each vectors folder. Click one of the following buttons on the Vector Edition toolbar: New Polygon: a. you can add polygons. line. Lines. b. To edit the shape of polygons and lines: 1. as explained in "Adding a Vector Layer" on page 34. and Points" on page 35. Lines. lines. New Rectangle: a. and points to the vector layer. it might be difficult to know which Vectors folder you are selecting. 3. Tip: You can also activate the vector tools by selecting the vector layer to edit from the Vector Edition toolbar list.. 2. Because Atoll names all new vector layers "Vectors" by default. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the contour.9. 1.Chapter 1: The Working Environment To add a vector layer to the Geo tab: • Click the New Vector Layer button ( ) ) on the Vector Edition toolbar. The tools on the Vector Edition toolbar are available. 3. 2. New Point: Click once on the map where you want to place the point. Double-click to end the line.3 Editing the Shape of Polygons and Lines You can edit the shape of polygons and lines on the vector layer. On the Explorer window tab containing the vector layer. select View > Vector Edition Toolbar. For information on renaming objects. you can ensure that you select the correct folder. The pointer changes ( Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited ). Double-click to close the contour.9. Drag to the opposite corner of the rectangle. Tip: You can also make the vector tools available by selecting the vector layer to edit from the Vector Edition toolbar list. For more information. 4. and Points Once you have created a vector layer. Click the point on the map that will be one corner of the rectangle. 35 . Press ESC to deselect the currently selected button on the Vector Edition toolbar.2 Creating Polygons. and points to it. You can now edit by: Moving a point: i. If the Vector Edition toolbar is not visible. see "Creating Polygons.4. b. lines. or point to a vector layer: 1. Release the mouse to create the rectangle defined by the two corners.

The pointer changes ( ). ii. 36 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .4. you can create complex contours by using the tools on the Vector Edition toolbar. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the area. Double-click to close the contour. click the Delete button ( ). Click the contour to edit. ii.4. Atoll deletes the area from the selected contour. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the contour. 1. click the Split button ( ). The vector tools on the Vector Edition toolbar are activated. iv.Atoll User Manual ii. The context menu appears. 3. Atoll separates the area covered by the contour from the selected contour and creates a new contour. Deleting a point from a contour or a line: i. The Vector Edition toolbar has the following buttons: i.4 Combining or Cropping Polygons Using the Toolbar In Atoll. Right-click and select Delete Point from the context menu. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the contour. ii. Tip: You can also activate the vector tools by selecting the vector layer to edit from the Vector Edition toolbar list. A point is added to the contour border or line at the position of the pointer. Drag the point to its new position. Right-click and select Insert Point from the context menu. right-click the vector layer folder. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the contour. : To combine several contours: In the Vector Edition toolbar. If contours overlap. The point is deleted. : To split the selected contour into several contours: In the Vector Edition toolbar. Draw the area you want to delete from the selected contour by clicking once on the map where you want to begin drawing the area to delete. On the Explorer window tab containing the vector layer. Double-click to close the area. The context menu appears. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the contour that will split the selected one. iii. iv. 1. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the new contour. The pointer changes ( ). i. i. Atoll merges them. iii. i. Draw more contours if desired.5 Editing a Point To edit a point: 1. right-click the vector layer folder. ii. The vector tools on the Vector Edition toolbar are activated. v. Select Edit from the context menu. Double-click to close the contour. iv. iii. Adding a point to a contour or a line: i. click the Combine button ( ). Position the pointer over the point you want to delete.9. : To create a contour out of the overlapping area of two contours: In the Vector Edition toolbar. Select Edit from the context menu. ii. 2. Atoll creates a new contour of the overlapping area of the two contours and deletes the parts of the contours that do not overlap. On the Explorer window tab containing the vector layer. Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the contour that will overlap the selected one. iii. 2. Position the pointer over the contour border or line where you want to add a point. iv. To edit a vector object using the icons on the Vector Edition toolbar: 1. Double-click to close the contour. ii. Atoll creates a group of polygons of the selected and new contours. : To delete part of the selected contour: In the Vector Edition toolbar.9. click the Intersection button ( ).

Convert to Polygon: Select Convert to Polygon to convert the selected line to a contour. When exporting in GRD or GRC formats. Drag the point to its new position. When you export a coverage prediction in vector format. or point from the map. line. Close Line: Select Close Line to add a segment between the last and the first point of the line. Quit edition: Select Quit Edition to exit editing mode. the following are explained: • • • "Exporting an Individual Coverage Prediction in Vector Format" on page 38 "Exporting an Individual Coverage Prediction in Raster Format" on page 38 "Exporting Multiple Coverage Predictions" on page 39. 1. When you export more than one coverage prediction. Deleting a point: i.9. Select the point. Select Move from the context menu to move the contour. The file exported can then be imported as a vector or raster object in Atoll or in another application. ii. you can export the entire coverage prediction. Note: 1. TIF. The point is deleted. Right-click and select Delete from the context menu. iii. In this case. or AGD formats. or point on the map. and Points Using the Context Menu When you are editing contours. Right-click the vector object to display the context menu and select one of the following: Delete: Select Delete to remove the selected contour. Move the contour. or Vertical Mapper (GRD and GRC) formats. Convert to Line: Select Convert to Line to convert the selected contour to a line. and points. Click the point you want to delete. you can export in ArcView©. line. JPEG 2000. the exported zone is delimited by the rectangle encompassing the coverage. The pointer changes ( ). Move: i. by path loss. you can not export a coverage prediction in raster format if the coverage prediction was made per transmitter (for example. All coverage types can be exported. you can export the coverage areas of a coverage prediction in raster or vector formats.4. line. ii. lines.6 Editing Contours.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Tip: You can also activate the vector tools by selecting the vector layer to edit from the Vector Edition toolbar list.4. Click the vector object you want to edit. The pointer changes ( ). ii. You can now edit by: Moving: i. coverage predictions with the display type set by transmitter. and any Properties of the contour. or point. Lines.10 Exporting Coverage Prediction Results In Atoll. you can access certain commands using the context menu. or you can export a defined area of the coverage prediction. or point. however. To edit a vector object using the context menu: 1. or by total losses). In raster formats. Open Line: Select Open Line to remove the segment between the last and the first point. Insert Point: Select Insert Point to add a point to the border of the contour at the position of the pointer. line. Geometry: This tab gives the coordinates of each point that defines the position and shape of the contour. you can export in BMP. ArcView© grid. 2. In this section. Click the point you want to move. only the coverage area of a single transmitter can be exported in raster format. or point. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 37 . by a transmitter attribute. or point are displayed in the context menu. line. In vector formats. the Surface of the object. Atoll allows you to export files larger than 2 GB. Click to place the contour. MapInfo©. The Properties dialogue has two tabs: General: The General tab gives the name of the vector Layer. Properties: Select Properties to open the Properties dialogue of the selected contour. 3. line. line. or point. Atoll suggests the formats that can be used for all the coverage predictions to be exported. You can export coverage predictions separately or you can export several coverage predictions at the same time. line. Only the commands relevant to the selected contour. by signal level. or point. When you export a coverage prediction in vector format.

In the Save As dialogue.2 Exporting an Individual Coverage Prediction in Raster Format To export a coverage prediction in raster format 1. For information on displaying objects in the map window.4. b. Right-click the part of the coverage prediction you want to export. 5. Click Save to export the coverage prediction results. or 38 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Select Export the Coverage from the context menu. Draw the geographic export zone by clicking the point on the map that will be one corner of the rectangle that will define the geographic export zone and dragging to the opposite corner of the rectangle that will define the geographic export zone. under Coordinate Systems. enter the File name and select the vector format from the Save as type list. 3. 5. Click the Expand button ( Note: ) to expand the Predictions folder. 6. If desired. c. To export part of the coverage prediction: a. Right-click the Geographic Export Zone folder. Right-click the coverage prediction you want to export. the geographic export zone will be created from the rectangle defined by the two corners. Click Save to export the coverage prediction results. The Computation Zone to export a rectangle containing the entire computation zone. If desired. select the area to export: The Coverage Area of the Prediction Study to export a rectangle containing only the area covered by the study. 2. or part of the coverage prediction. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. To export the entire coverage prediction: Right-click the coverage prediction you want to export. The default resolution is the resolution of the coverage prediction results (as set in the coverage prediction Properties dialogue). Enter the file name and select the type and the path of the file to be exported. Select Export the Coverage from the context menu. f. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the coverage prediction. c. The coverage prediction must be displayed in the map window before it can be exported. The Raster Export dialogue appears.10. 2. 7.4. The context menu appears. see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 16. 3. change the reference coordinate system for the file being exported. For information on displaying objects in the map window. The Save As dialogue appears. If you have chosen to export the prediction coverage in a vector format other than in AGD format: a. You can export the entire coverage prediction.1 Exporting an Individual Coverage Prediction in Vector Format To export a coverage prediction in vector format: 1. Select the Data tab in the Explorer window. To export the geographic export zone. Select the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. d. the geographic export zone. 1. The Save As dialogue appears. In the Save As dialogue. it will no longer be displayed but will still be taken into account. a. 4. 4. Select Draw from the context menu. If desired.Atoll User Manual 1. change the Resolution of the exported coverage. The geographic export zone is delimited by a light purple line. enter the File name and select the raster format from the Save as type list. When you release the mouse. to define how much Atoll smooths the exported coverage. move the Smoothing slider. Under Region. b. The coverage prediction must be displayed in the map window before it can be exported.10. define the geographic export zone: a. If you clear the geographic export zone’s visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Zones folder. Click the Expand button ( Note: ) to expand the Predictions folder. e. or enter the percentage in the text box. see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 16.

by path loss. In the Coverage Export dialogue. Atoll allows you to save files larger than 2 Gb. the file is converted using the selected coordinate system. 1. Geographic Export Zone Printing Zone ) in the Map toolbar. BIL. Define the area to save: a. Atoll selects the check boxes of all coverage predictions whose visibility check box is selected on the Data tab of the Explorer window. Resolution in metres: You can define a resolution for the exported coverage predictions. 4. The selected coverage predictions are saved in the selected folder. In the Map Export dialogue. 5. by signal level. To save a map as a graphic image: 1. Select Export Coverages from the context menu. By default. 8. 7. Click the Select an area button ( 2. Right-click the the Predictions folder. Time stamp: If you select the Time stamp check box. BMP. When saving in BIL format. Atoll will add the date and time to the file name of each exported coverage prediction. move the Smoothing slider. 1. The Map Export dialogue appears.4. Notes • When selecting a coordinate system different than the one initially defined in Atoll. You can select: Selection: The area on the map selected in step 1. 4. Drag to the opposite corner. If you wish to use the saved file as a digital terrain model. enter a File name. you can define the following parameters: Folder: Enter the folder you want to store the exported coverage predictions in or click the Browse button ( ) to navigate to it.Chapter 1: The Working Environment The Geographic Export Zone to export the rectangle defined by the geographic export zone.11 Saving a Map as a Graphic Image You can save a map as a graphic image.4.3 Exporting Multiple Coverage Predictions If you have several coverage predictions that you want to export. you can export them at the same time. The geographic export zone is only taken into consideration for raster file formats. Click in the map on one of the four corners of the area you want to select. In the Save as dialogue. select the zone that you wish to save as an image.10. BIL. You can define the size of the exported image in one of two ways: © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 39 . The following file formats are supported: TIF. b. 2. The context menu appears. to define how much Atoll smooths the exported coverage. 6. The Exported Image Size dialogue appears. Select File > Save Image As. or TXT format. Click Save. or by total losses). 3. 6. and select a file type from the Save as type list. c. select the check boxes corresponding to the coverage predictions you want to export. 5. Note: When you export several coverage predictions at the same time. The Coverage Export dialogue appears. Click Export. and ArcView Grid (TXT). Format: Select the vector file format you want Atoll to export the coverage predictions in. b. coverage predictions with the display type set by transmitter. Click OK to finish exporting the coverage prediction results. • You can not export in raster format if the coverage prediction was made per transmitter (for example. Select the Data tab in the Explorer window. If desired. 3. Atoll does not take the geographic export zone into consideration. select a destination folder. you should select the TIF. or enter the percentage in the text box. by a transmitter attribute. Only the coverage area of a single transmitter can be exported in raster format. The Save As dialogue appears. Click Export to export the selected coverage predictions. Under Options. To export several coverage predictions at the same time: 1.

Click the Select an area button ( 2. select Edit > Paste Special. and each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the polygon. 6. 7. click pointer once to start. Open the application into which you want to paste the image. in the Panoramic window. and enter a pixel size in the text box. In the Paste Special dialogue. To copy a selected area of the map into a document created using another application: 1. Define the resolution of the image in one of the following ways: Select Use Screen Resolution Select Use Custom Resolution and enter a resolution in metres. is pasted as an image into the new document. and by double-clicking to close the polygon. 9. To define a zone. Pixel Size: If you wish to define the size by pixel size. you can define a zone to print or copy and. Define the area to copy: a. Note: You can also select Bitmap to paste the selection without rulers. or draw vector or raster polygons on the map. ) in the Map toolbar. select Pixel Size. The pencil pointer indicates you can create a polygonal clutter zone. 8. or Text to paste the upper left and lower right coordinates of the selection. The zoom pointer indicates you can click to zoom in and right-click to zoom out at the location of the mouse pointer The zoom area pointer indicates you can zoom in on an area of the by clicking and dragging to define the area. once to create each corner. click and drag diagonally.4. Close the polygon by clicking twice. 3. 9. including the rulers. If you wish to export the image with rulers. b.4. Important: If you wish to use the exported file as a digital terrain model.12 Copying a Map to Another Application You can copy a selected area of the map into a document created using another application. The area of the map. 1. Atoll then creates a geo-reference file for the exported image. by clicking once to start the polygon. 5. The polygon drawing pointer indicates you can draw a zone to filter either sites or links. To define a zone.13 Map Window Pointers In Atoll. Click OK. select Picture (Enhanced Metafile). you must define the size of the exported image by pixel size. select Include Rulers. Drag to the opposite corner. on the map. The Copy Image dialogue appears. the pointer appears in different forms according to its function. Zoom area Pencil 40 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . or draw vector or raster rectangles on the map. 4. Select Edit > Copy Image. Click OK.Atoll User Manual Scale: If you wish to define the size by scale. select Scale. 1. you can define the zone to be displayed on the map. Rectangle drawing pointer Hand Zoom tool The rectangle drawing pointer indicates you can draw computation/focus/hot spot/filtering/printing/geographic export zones. enter a scale in the text box and a Resolution. In the new application. click and drag diagonally. Click OK. Each pointer is described below: Appearance Description Selection arrow Meaning The zone selection pointer indicates that. draw computation/focus/hot spot/filtering/printing/ eographic export Polygon drawing zones. The hand pointer indicates you can move the visible part of the displayed map. To draw a polygon. Click in the map on one of the four corners of the area you want to select.

You can right-click to open a context menu to delete a point. You can also export the data or import data into the Atoll data tables. In the case of a point-to-multipoint. The microwave link pointer indicates you can click a point on the map to create the first point of a microwave link. You can filter. or centre the map on the polygon. Right-clicking the polygon border opens a context menu allowing you to add a point. microwave links. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 41 . and group the data contained in these tables. When you create a new column. containing all their parameters and characteristics. the microwave link pointer changes and the next click ends the link. delete the polygon. the distance between the first point and the pointer is displayed in the status bar. In this section. As you move the pointer. the following are explained: • • • • • • • • • • • "Opening a Data Table" on page 41 "Adding.5. 1.5 Working with Data Tables Atoll stores object data (sites. and Editing Data Table Fields" on page 42 "Editing the Contents of a Table" on page 43 "Opening an Object’s Record Properties Dialogue from a Table" on page 44 "Defining the Table Format" on page 44 "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 47 "Viewing a Statistical Analysis of Table Contents" on page 49 "Exporting Tables to Text Files" on page 49 "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 50 "Exporting Tables to XML Files" on page 51 "Importing Tables from XML Files" on page 52. In the case of a multihop link. Right-click the data folder of which you want to display the data table. and view a statistical analysis of the data.1 Opening a Data Table To open a data table: 1. delete the polygon. You can also create a list of options (for text fields) from which the user can choose when filling in the field. The terrain profile between the two points is displayed in the Point Analysis window and stored under Terrain Sections in the Geo tab. sort. Select Open Table from the context menu. You can move an existing point by clicking and dragging an existing point. or centre the map on the polygon. each subsequent link creates anew point. The rotate hub antenna pointer indicates you can click the hub antenna and drag it to a new position to change the azimuth of the hub antenna. Deleting. each subsequent click creates another point in the link. The data contained in prediction reports are also stored in the form of tables. You can add columns to the data table and you can delete certain columns. antennas. Select/create points Microwave link start End Multi-hop or point-tomultipoint microwave link Rotate hub antenna of point-tomultipoint link Measurements on the map Terrain section 1. you can create a default value for a field you create. The position indicator pointer indicates you can select the border of a polygon. 3. You can add a new point and modify the polygon contour by clicking on one of the edges and dragging. The select/create points pointer indicates you can modify the polygon in the map window. connected to the hub by a link. The terrain section pointer indicates that you can create a terrain section by clicking once on the map to create the first point and once more to create the second point. etc. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. The measurement pointer indicates you can click on the map to set the start point of your measurement.) in the form of tables. The multihop and multipoint pointer indicates you can click once to create the first point of a multi-hop link or the hub of a point-to-multipoint link. Once you have created the first point.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Appearance Description Deletion Position indicator Meaning The deletion pointer indicates that you can delete a newly created polygonal clutter zone by clicking its border. 2.

instead of loading all custom fields. true/false.2. Deleting. instead of loading all custom fields. Figure 1. double. Access the object type’s table fields as explained in "Accessing an Object Type’s Table Fields" on page 42.13): The Name of the field in the database (Name). single. To add a custom field to an object type’s data table: 1.14). Select Table Fields from the context menu.5.2 Adding a Field to an Object Type’s Data Table You can add a custom field to any object type’s data table. Choice List: The Choice List field is only available if you have selected "text" as the Type. enter a default value that will appear each time you create a new record of this object type. Right-click the table in the map window. you can then select a specific group of custom fields to be loaded from the database. each corresponding to a field. Click Add.1 Accessing an Object Type’s Table Fields The fields contained in an object type’s table are defined in a dialogue. date/time. The Type of the field.Atoll User Manual 1. A dialogue appears where you can view the existing fields and add or delete new ones. long integer. The context menu appears. and Editing Data Table Fields The data for each object type is stored in the form of a data table. The Field Definition dialogue has the following text boxes: Name: Enter the Name for the field that will appear in the database Group: If desired. To access an object type’s table fields: 1. 3. Legend: Enter the name for the field that will appear in the Atoll document. the following functions are explained: • • • "Accessing an Object Type’s Table Fields" on page 42 "Adding a Field to an Object Type’s Data Table" on page 42 "Deleting a Field from an Object Type’s Data Table" on page 43 1. Every data table in Atoll is created with a default set of columns. separating each list item with a hard return. - 42 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .13: The Table tab 1. short integer. Enter a size in characters.5. The Default value of the field. In the Explorer window.2. The Field Definition dialogue appears (see Figure 1. 2. The Group to which the field belongs. or currency) Size: The Size field is only available if you have selected "text" as the Type. Type: Select a type for the field (text. 2. The Name of the field in the ATL file (Legend). You can create a choice list by entering the list items in the Choice List text box. open the data table as described in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41.2 Adding. you can select a group of custom fields to be loaded from the database. you can define a Group that this custom field will belong to. The maximum Size of the field.5. When opening an Atoll document from a database. The dialogue displays the following information for each type of data (see Figure 1. When you open an Atoll document from a database. Default Value: If you want. In this section. 3.

Right-click the data folder of which you want to display the data table.14: The Field Definition dialogue 1. Tip: Some fields can not be deleted. as explained in "Adding a Field to an Object Type’s Data Table" on page 42. To delete a custom field from an object type’s data table: Caution: All data stored in the field will be lost when you delete the field itself. 1. 3.16) or enter a new value. 5. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 43 . If you select a field and the Delete button remains unavailable.2. 1.5. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Select the custom field that you want to delete. You can find these fields in the Other Properties tab of an object type’s Properties dialogue. Edit the content of the table by entering the value directly in the field (see Figure 1. Figure 1. The field is deleted from the object type’s data table. Click OK to return to the object type table. Make sure that you are not deleting important information. 2. Tip: If a list of options has been defined for a field.3 Editing the Contents of a Table To edit the contents of a table: 1. 3. Your changes are automatically saved. 2. Select Open Table from the context menu.15).5. Note: User or custom fields are for information only and are not taken into account in any calculation.Chapter 1: The Working Environment 4. Click elsewhere in the table when you have finished to update the table. you can select a value from the list (see Figure 1. Access the object type’s table fields as explained in "Accessing an Object Type’s Table Fields" on page 42.3 Deleting a Field from an Object Type’s Data Table You can delete custom fields from an object type’s data table. Click Delete. the selected field is not a custom field and can not be deleted. Custom fields are the fields that the user adds to an object type’s data table. 4.

for example. double-click the left margin of the record instead of the record itself.5 Defining the Table Format Atoll lets you format the data tables so that the data presented is more legible or better presented.Atoll User Manual Figure 1. Select Record Properties from the context menu. antenna.16: Choosing data in the transmitters data tables 1. 3. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. transmitter. To open the Record Properties dialogue of an object: 1. 1.5.5. Right-click the record whose properties you want to see. To avoid editing the record when you double-click. from its data table. You can change the format of the data table by: • • • • • • "Formatting the Column Headers" on page 45 "Formatting Table Columns" on page 45 "Changing Column Width or Row Height" on page 45 "Displaying or Hiding a Column" on page 46 "Freezing or Unfreezing a Column" on page 46 "Moving Columns" on page 46 44 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .15: Editing data in the transmitters data tables Figure 1. or cell.4 Opening an Object’s Record Properties Dialogue from a Table You can open the Record Properties dialogue of an object. 2. Note: You can also open the Record Properties dialogue by double-clicking the record. a site.

2. Borders: You can select the Border. and the Colour for each column header. a Background colour. the Type. Figure 1. and a pattern from the list box. Borders: You can select the Border. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. Alignment: You can select both the Horizontal and Vertical alignment of the column header text. you change the row height for every row in the table. Click the border separating two rows and drag to change the row height (see Figure 1. The Format dialogue has the following tabs: Font: You can select the Font. You can also select a 3D Effect for the header. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. Effects. Outline (the font style). Alignment: You can select both the Horizontal and Vertical alignment of the column header text. and the Colour for each column header. 2. Click OK. To change the column width: 1. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. When you change the row height.17). Colour: You can select the background colour (Interior) of the column headers. Click the border separating two column headers and drag to change the column width (see Figure 1. Formatting Table Columns 1.18). you change the width only for the selected column. Click OK. 3. Select Format > Column Format. The Format dialogue has the following tabs: Font: You can select the Font. The Format dialogue appears. 2.18: Changing row height © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 45 . Outline (the font style). 3. 2.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Formatting the Column Headers 1. by selecting a Foreground colour. Changing Column Width or Row Height You can change the column width and row height in a data table. To change the row height: 1. 4. by selecting a Foreground colour. 4.17: Changing column width Figure 1. You can also select a 3D Effect for the header. When you change the column width. and Text Colour. font Size. font Size. Colour: You can select the background colour (Interior) of the column headers. a Background colour. the Type. however. and a pattern from the list box. The Format dialogue appears. Select Format > Header Format. Effects. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. and Text Colour.

To move a column: 1. 3. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41.19). 46 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . you can freeze one or more columns of a data table so that they always remain visible as you scroll horizontally through the table. Select the header of the column you want to freeze. Click and drag over several headers to select more than one column to move. 2. You can keep this column. To unfreeze columns: • Select Format > Unfreeze columns. Note: You can only freeze adjacent columns. Right-click the selected header or headers and select Freeze columns from the context men. 3. Select the header of the column you want to move. Freezing or Unfreezing a Column In Atoll. The Columns to Be Displayed dialogue appears (see Figure 1. 2. You can hide more than one column by pressing CTRL while selecting the columns and then selecting Hide Columns from the context menu. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. To display or hide a column: 1. 4.Atoll User Manual Displaying or Hiding a Column You can choose which columns in data tables to display or hide. clear its check box. To freeze a column: 1. For example. Figure 1.19: The Columns to Be Displayed dialogue Note: You can also right-click the data table and select the Display Columns or Hide Columns command from the context menu. 5. you can change the column order so that you can group similar columns or present data in a determined order. To hide a column. while scrolling through the Sites table. Select Format > Display Columns. Moving Columns In Atoll. To display a column. by freezing it. 2. you might want to have the Name column always visible. Click and drag over several headers to select more than one column to freeze. Click Close. Tip: You can also hide a column by right-clicking on its header and selecting Hide Columns from the context menu. Note: You can not freeze a column in a report table. or any other column visible. select its check box.

preceded by "Copy of.6. 4.5. 3.6. using Fill Up or Fill Down. Click in the left margin of the table row marked with the New Row icon ( ) to select the entire row.20: Moving columns Note: It may be necessary to click Refresh in the Map toolbar for your changes to appear. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. Click again on the selected column and drag to the desired area.5.1 Copying and Pasting a Table Element You can create a new element in tables by copying an existing element. Click on the cell with the data you wish to copy and drag to select the cells into which you wish to copy the data (see Figure 1. You can copy and paste data to create new elements or you can copy and paste the same data into several cells.21). 2. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. 5. Note: Each element in a table must have a unique Name. 1. 1. To create a new element by copying and pasting: 1.2 Pasting the Same Data into Several Cells You can paste the same data into several cells.5.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Note: You can only move several columns at the same time when they are adjacent. the position the column will occupy is indicated by a red line (see Figure 1. In this section. and Paste (CTRL+V) commands on the Edit menu. To paste the same data into several cells: 1. Cut (CTRL+X). 1. creates a new element from the copied data. Select Edit > Copy to copy the table row. Select Edit > Paste to paste the copied data into the new row. pasting it into a new row and editing the details that are different.20). The name of the new element is the same as that of the copied element.6 Copying and Pasting in Tables In Atoll. you can copy and paste data in tables using the Copy (CTRL+C). Figure 1. 2. As you drag the column." You can edit this name. 3. Click in the left margin of the table row containing the element to select the entire row. the following is explained: • • "Copying and Pasting a Table Element" on page 47 "Pasting the Same Data into Several Cells" on page 47. Atoll. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 47 .

22).Atoll User Manual Figure 1. Copy into the selected cells: To copy the contents of the top cell of the selection into the other cells. select Edit > Fill > Down (see Figure 1. select Edit > Fill > Up (see Figure 1. Figure 1.23: Copying the contents of the bottom cell 48 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Figure 1.22: Copying the contents of the top cell To copy the contents of the bottom cell of the selection into the other cells.21: Selecting the cells 3.23).

To export a table: 1. Select the column data you want to analyse: To view a statistical analysis of an entire column: Click the column title. Select Statistics from the context menu.Chapter 1: The Working Environment 1. Right-click the table. You can select contiguous cells by clicking the first cell and dragging to the last cell of the selection you want to analyse. For more information.24).7 Viewing a Statistical Analysis of Table Contents You can view a statistical analysis of the contents of an entire column in a table or of the contents of a selection of cells. or selected columns. If you leave the Statistics dialogue open. see "Grouping. To view a statistical analysis of table contents: 1. Tip: In Atoll you can organise data in several different ways. Sorting. 3. The Export dialogue appears. 1.24: The Statistics dialogue The statistics displayed depend on the type of numerical data selected. 3. Right-click the selection of cells. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. and Filtering Data" on page 56. formats) and to MS Excel files.25). The contents of the Statistics dialogue are updated automatically. You can select non-contiguous cells by pressing CTRL and clicking each cell in the column separately. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. and Comma Separated Value. TXT. The context menu appears.5. The entire column is selected. you can view the statistical analysis of other cells by selecting them in the table. allowing you to select only certain data. or by clicking the first cell. The context menu appears. 2. You can see how the exported table will appear in the Preview pane (see Figure 1. to ASCII text files (in text. Figure 1. 4. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 49 . The Statistics dialogue appears (see Figure 1. CSV. 2. pressing SHIFT and clicking the last cell. Select Export from the context menu.5.8 Exporting Tables to Text Files You can export entire Atoll data tables. To view a statistical analysis of a selection of cells in one column: Select the cells you want to analyse.

To import a table: 1. Links. you can click Load in the Export dialogue to open your configuration file with the same settings you used this time. You can export the Sites. The fields at the top of the Exported Fields appear at the left of the exported table.9 Importing Tables from Text Files You can import data in the form of ASCII text files (in TXT and CSV formats) into Atoll data tables. 8. Select a Field Separator from the list. Select the Header check box if you want to export the names of the columns with the data. select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list. To select a field to be exported. select the field in the Exported Fields list and click to remove it. The Save As dialogue appears. Multi-Hops. The context menu appears. Select the fields (displayed as columns in the table) you want to export. 2. 6. Click Save to export the table. see "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 50. 10. enter the File name and select the format from the Save as type list.5. Select a Decimal Symbol from the list. pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field. 7. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. to move it b. To remove a field from the list of Exported Fields. 50 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . You can select contiguous fields by clicking the first field. 1. To change the order of the fields. For information on importing data into a data table. Click Export. c. select the field in the Available Fields box and click to the Exported Fields list.Atoll User Manual Figure 1. In the Save As dialogue. a. All fields in the Exported Fields list will be exported. The next time you export a data table. 9. 5. Right-click the table. You can display all the fields belonging to a table by clicking the Expand button ( ) to the left of the table name. and Point to Multipoint tables to text files by selecting the folder or a subfolder in the Explorer window and pressing CTRL+E. Note: You can save the choices you have made in the Export dialogue as a configuration file by clicking the Save button at the top of the dialogue and entering a name for the file in the Save As dialogue that appears. You can select non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRL and clicking each fields separately.25: Exporting a data table 4.

26). The values of these records are replaced when the Update Records check box is selected. Align the content of the source file with the content of the destination file by clicking the column header in the Destination row and selecting the corresponding column from the Atoll data file (see Figure 1.10 Exporting Tables to XML Files You can export the data tables in your Atoll document to XML files. The Import dialogue appears (see Figure 1. Click Import. these records are not imported. Enter the number of the first line of data in the 1st Data Line box. Select a Field Separator from the list.26). The Open dialogue appears. Select the Update Records check box if you want to replace the data of records already existing in the table. there are two header rows: Source: The column headers from the text file you are importing. Destination: The column headers from the Atoll data table. 6. 7. See "Changing Column Width or Row Height" on page 45. Select the ASCII text file you want to open and click Open. and Point to Multipoint tables by selecting the folder or a subfolder in the Explorer window and pressing CTRL+I. The contents are imported in the current Atoll data table. For information on exporting the information in a data table into a text file. You can use XML to exchange information between Atoll and the OMC. If the Update Records check box is not selected. 9. Select a Decimal Symbol from the list. you can click Load in the Import dialogue to open your configuration file with the same settings you used this time. Select Import from the context menu. 4. Note: 10. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 51 . 1. Multi-Hops. Under Field Mapping. Links. see "Exporting Tables to Text Files" on page 49. You can save the choices you have made in the Import dialogue as a configuration file by clicking the Save button at the top of the dialogue and entering a name for the file in the Save As dialogue that appears.5. Tip: You can change the width of the columns to make the contents easier to work with. Select <Ignore> for source file columns that you do not want to import. Note: Atoll compares the values in the left-most column of the data to be imported with the values in the same column of the data table to see if records already exist.26: Importing information into a data table 5. The next time you export a data table. Figure 1. You can import data from text files into the Sites. 8.Chapter 1: The Working Environment 3.

etc.2 Printing a Map You can print a map in Atoll and create a paper copy of studies. see the Technical Reference Guide.6. For information on importing the data tables from XML files into your document. . 3. choose Selected in the Print dialogue. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. you can print any part of your document. antennas used by transmitters must be imported before the transmitters themselves. the technologyTDMA. Atoll offers several options allowing you to customise and optimise the printed map. select it by clicking in one corner of the area and dragging diagonally to the opposite corner. For example. All the data tables in the document are exported to XML files.11 Importing Tables from XML Files You can import data tables into your Atoll document from XML files. During the import procedure. Do not modify the order of tables in the index. Once the import is complete. To import data tables into your document from XML files: 1. The index. both be printed in the same way.. 52 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . UMTS. In order for Atoll to be able to correctly import the data tables from XML files. The Browse for Folder dialogue appears. For information on exporting the data tables in your document to XML files. 1. some data must be imported before other data. document reports. 1. Click OK. To export all the data tables in your document to XML files: 1. including A4 and A0. CDMA. 2. data tables. 1.xml file is located. Select File > Data Exchange > XML File Import.xml file that contains the mapping between the tables that were exported and the XML files corresponding to each data table. the technologyTDMA. Click the Make New Folder button if you want to create a new folder to store the XML files.Atoll User Manual Atoll creates one XML file for each exported data table. etc. If you wish to see how the table will appear once printed. predictions. 4. If you want to print an area of the table. including maps. existing data in the tables are overwritten by the data from the XML files. 2. This section explains the following: • • • "Printing Data Tables and Reports" on page 52 "Printing a Map" on page 52 "Printing a Docking Window" on page 56 1. Note: Tables are imported in the same order they appear in the index. Atoll supports printing to a variety of paper sizes. and a duplicate records check to ensure that the import did not create database problems. The Browse for Folder dialogue appears. and antenna patterns. and the version of Atoll with which the XML files were created. Select File > Data Exchange > XML File Export. UMTS.1 Printing Data Tables and Reports Data tables and reports are both presented in tabular format in Atoll and can. .xml file are imported in the document ..5.6. therefore.).xml file because the order in which the data is imported is very important. CDMA. see the Technical Reference Guide. see "Importing Tables from XML Files" on page 52. If you want to print only a selected area.).6 Printing in Atoll In Atoll. and an index. etc.xml file also stores the information on the system (GSM. see "Previewing Your Printing" on page 55. the XML files and the current Atoll document must use the same system (GSM. Click OK to print. For more information about the formats of the XML files. 3. Atoll performs a database integrity check. etc. Select the folder where the index.xml file. and the Atoll version used to create the XML files must be the same as the version used to import the data. 2. 5. Select File > Print. You can use XML to exchange information between Atoll and the OMC. To print a table: 1. etc. see "Exporting Tables to XML Files" on page 51. 3. Select the folder where the XML files are to be stored. Click OK. For more information about the formats of the XML files. The data tables from the XML files listed in the index.

visible objects on the Data tab. Right-click the vector layer you wish to move to the Data tab. 1. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 53 . it is recommended to organise the layers from top to bottom as follows. The printing zone is delimited by a light green line (see Figure 1. such as roads.2 Defining the Printing Zone You can define an area to be printed.1 Printing Recommendations The appearance of the map is determined by the arrangement and properties of the objects the map contains. 3. To create a printing zone: 1. click the Geo tab. it is strongly recommended to put vector layers. For this reason.2.6. see "Defining the Transparency of Objects and Object Types" on page 23). The layers on the top (as arranged on the Data and Geo tabs) are the most visible on the screen and in print. geoclimatic. Antennas. Select File > Print. Objects in Atoll are arranged in layers. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Zones folder. You can see how the map will appear once printed (see "Previewing Your Printing" on page 55). Right-click the Printing Zone folder. The context menu appears. lines (vectors such as roads. Important: Printing graphics is a memory-intensive operation and can make heavy demands on your printer. for example. it will no longer be displayed but will still be taken into account. and predictions. To print a map: 1. b. when a document contains surface layers (raster maps or polygonal vector maps). Before printing a map. transmitters. or clutter height maps (non-transparent maps).Chapter 1: The Working Environment Before you print a map. For performance reasons. Click the Data tab. The context menu appears. You can accept the default layout or you can modify the print layout (see "Defining the Print Layout" on page 54). Drag to the opposite corner of the rectangle that will define the printing zone.6. and others Clutter class maps (transparent raster maps) Images. Select the document window containing the map. or you can define an area of the map to be printed in one of the following ways: • • Selecting the print area (see "Defining the Printing Zone" on page 53). You now have the following options before printing the map: You can select a print area ("Defining the Printing Zone" on page 53) or create a focus zone ("Drawing a Focus Zone" on page 31). This will ensure that these vector layers are visible when you print the map. Sites and transmitters must be above all the other layers.2. You can see how the map will appear once printed (see "Previewing Your Printing" on page 55). DTM. If you clear the printing zone’s visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. you should review the "Printing Recommendations" on page 53 to avoid any memory-related problems. To put vector layers from the Geo tab over predictions: 1. 4. 2. Drag the vector layer to a position above Predictions but below Sites. the printing zone will be created from the rectangle defined by the two corners. Click the point on the map that will be one corner of the rectangle that will define the printing zone. 1. or airport). 4. 2. you have the following options: • You can print the entire map. You can modify the print layout ("Defining the Print Layout" on page 54). sites. When you release the mouse. Select Draw from the context menu. 3. 5. 3. and points (measurements. The visibility of the lower layers depends on which layers are above it and on the transparency of these layers (for information on transparency. 2. In the Explorer window. are displayed above objects on the Geo tab. 4. Select Transfer to Data from the context menu. traffic maps (vector or raster).): • • • • • • Points (vectors) Roads and Lines (vectors) Surface polygons (vectors) Multi-format maps .27). Before printing for the first time. and Transmitters. etc. Click OK. Creating a focus zone (see "Drawing a Focus Zone" on page 31). Draw the printing zone: a. 5. over predictions. however.population.

and the Header/Footer tab. so that you can use it in a different Atoll document. Choose to print the area outside the focus zone. These settings can be saved as a configuration. You can see any changes you make in the schematic preview on the right side of the Print Setup dialogue. Select File > Print Setup. 54 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . or footer. • Once you have created a printing zone.3 Defining the Print Layout You can use the Print Setup dialogue to define how your map will appear when you print it. To define the appearance of the map when it is printed: 1.27: Printing zone You can also create a printing zone as follows: • • • Vector Edition toolbar: You can use the New Polygon ( ) and New Rectangle ( ) buttons available in the Vector Edition toolbar to draw the printing zone.2. Add a title. You define the print set up on the Page tab. You can also use Atoll’s polygon editing tools to edit the printing zone. Existing polygon: You can use any existing polygon on the map as a printing zone by right-clicking it and selecting Use as > Printing Zone from the context menu. as well as the page orientation and the margins. Note: If you have previously defined a configuration file containing all the necessary settings. you can change its size by dragging the edges of the zone displayed on the rulers of the map window. you can import it and use it as a printing zone. comment. header. see "Using Polygon Zone Editing Tools" on page 31. logo. The Print Setup dialogue appears. Importing a polygon: If you have a file with an existing polygon. Fit to Map Window: You can create a printing zone the size of the map window by selecting Fit to Map Window from the context menu. 1. Choose to print the rulers with the map. allowing you to define a standard appearance which you can then import the next time you print a similar document. the Components tab. Select paper size and source. You can import it by right-clicking the Printing Zone folder on the Geo tab and selecting Import from the context menu. you can click the Import button under Configuration to import those settings.Atoll User Manual Figure 1.6. by right-clicking the Printing Zone folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Export from the context menu. For more information on the polygon editing tools. Note: You can export the printing zone as a polygon. On the Print Setup dialogue. Choose to print the legend. you can: • • • • • • Set the scale of the map.

in the form of a BMP graphic. Select the your graphic in BMP format and click Open.bmp is present in this folder. iii. b. b. you can define graphics that appear for the map. click OK to close the Print Setup dialogue. Clicking the Properties button opens a dialogue where you can enter text and set variables such as the current time and date. The buttons outside of the square will place the legend outside of the map.3 © Forsk 2010 Previewing Your Printing When you want to print maps. d. - Click a Font button to open the Font dialogue to define the font of the legend. i. the Source of the paper. Under Margins. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 55 . select whether the page should be printed in Portrait or Landscape. If you want the title to appear on the map (and not outside of it). you can define the page size. data tables. If a file named logo. The buttons inside the square will place the legend on top of the map. However. If your logo is in a different format. Under Paper. 3. select the On the map check box. Select the Comments check box if you want to print a comment with the map and set its Position. Click the Header/Footer tab. set the margins of the page in millimetres. you can preview your printing. For the selected check box. it is considered as the default header logo. click the Properties button.Chapter 1: The Working Environment 2. you can define the appearance of the printed map: Select the Rulers check box if you want to print the map with a scale around it. you can set the position of graphic elements. you must first convert it using a graphics programme to the BMP format. c. b. you can define the placement of the legend. v. a. Under Scaling. or reports. Note: Only BMP graphics can be used as logos. or click Print to print the document. 1. margins. Under Legend. Click the Components tab. The Open dialogue appears. 4. Select the Legend check box if you want to print a legend with the map. select the On the map check box. Under Orientation. select the On the map check box. If you want the comment to appear on the map (and not outside of it). Select the Area inside focus zone only check box if you only want to print the part of the map inside the focus zone. select the Size of the paper and. ii. Under Map. or by selecting Scale and defining the scale. The graphics can be a company logo or other information. The Logo dialogue appears. Select the Header/Footer check box if you want to define a header or footer for the map and set its Position. Clicking the Properties button opens a dialogue where you can enter text and set variables such as the current time and date. c. define the scale of the printed image either by selecting Fit to page. Click a button to set the Position of the legend. 5. Once you have made your settings. such as copyright information. Click OK. Atoll searches for the header and footer logos in the Atoll’s installation folder. and orientation and the scale of the printed map: a. Click the Page tab. Click File. On the Header/Footer tab. Clicking the Properties button opens a dialogue where you can enter text and set variables such as the current time and date. Note: You can save the current settings as a configuration file by clicking the Export button under Configuration. On the Page tab. optionally. By default. Select the correct Width and Height (in pixels). you can select a different file. Select the Map Title check box if you want to define a title for the map and set its Position.6. This enables you to re-use the same settings the next time by importing them. iv. c. Under Logo 1 and Logo 2. a. If you want the header or footer to appear on the map (and not outside of it).

1. you can click one of the following buttons: Click Print to open the Print dialogue. Right-click the window you wish to print. Once you have grouped data objects. The objects to be grouped can be in a data folder or in a subfolder (see "Creating and Comparing Subfolders" on page 71). see "Adding an Object Type to the Legend" on page 24) Point Analysis Tool CW Measurement Analysis Tool (for more information on this tool. Select the map or table you want to print. sort. In this section the following will be explained: • • • • • "Grouping Data Objects" on page 56 "Sorting Data" on page 60 "Filtering Data" on page 62 "Folder Configurations" on page 69 "Creating and Comparing Subfolders" on page 71 1. allowing you to select only certain data and then. 2. Open the docking window you want to print. sort. For examples of grouping data objects. and Filtering Data In Atoll you can organise data in several different ways.7 Grouping.7.Atoll User Manual To preview your printing: 1. 56 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . If you want to print a Point Analysis window. Click OK to print. For information. Click Next Page to display the following page Click Prev Page to display the previous page. selecting File > Print only prints the contents of a document window.1 Grouping Data Objects by a Selected Property You can group data objects by a selected property using the Group By command on the context menu. After you have defined how you will group. The Print Preview window appears. Click Zoom Out to zoom out on the print preview. or by several.4 Printing a Docking Window You can print the content of many docking windows using the context menu.6. You can save the grouping parameters as a folder configuration. The docking windows whose contents you can print are: • • • • • Legend Window (for more information on this tool.1. Select Print from the context menu. The Print dialogue appears. modify only selected data or run calculations on the selected data. Atoll allows you to group. Drive Test Data Analysis Tool Microwave Link Analysis (for more information on this tool. 2. 1. Click Two Page to display two pages side by side Click One Page to display a single page. you can save this information as a folder configuration. Grouping objects in the Explorer window is similar to sorting data in the data table because it puts all records with the selected property together. Sorting. see "Examples of Grouping" on page 59. 3. see "Folder Configurations" on page 69. or filter data quickly by one criterion. Select File > Print Preview. as explained in "Printing a Map" on page 52. 1. see the Measurements and Model Calibration Guide. click the tab of the study you want to print. At the top of the Print Preview window.7. This section explains: • • • "Grouping Data Objects by a Selected Property" on page 56 "Configuring the Group By Submenu" on page 57 "Advanced Grouping" on page 58. You can also define the properties by which you can group objects.1 Grouping Data Objects You can group objects according to a selected property on the Data tab of the Explorer window. you can access their Properties dialogue from the context menu to edit properties on all grouped objects. for example. or filter data. Click Zoom In to zoom in on the print preview. 4. see "Studying Reflection" on page 210) To print the content of a docking window: 1.

7.Chapter 1: The Working Environment To group data objects by a selected property: 1. Right-click the folder or subfolder whose objects you have grouped. You can select non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRL and clicking each fields separately. see "Configuring the Group By Submenu" on page 57. To remove a field from the list of Grouping Fields. select from the Group By > None. 5. Figure 1. The Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 1. To select a field to appear in the Group By submenu. The objects in the folder are grouped by that property.1. You can make it easier to group data objects by configuring the Group By submenu to display only the properties that are relevant for grouping. Note: If the range of properties available in the Group By submenu has been configured as explained in "Configuring the Group By Submenu" on page 57. Right-click the folder or subfolder whose objects you want to group. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Select Properties from the context menu. select the property by which you want to group the objects. To undo the grouping: 1. you can select additional properties by selecting More Fields from the Group By submenu. Click OK to close the Configuration dialogue and click OK to close the Properties dialogue. 7.28: The Configuration dialogue 6. The context menu appears. See "Examples of Grouping" on page 59. select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list. The context menu appears.28). have a large number of properties that will appear by default in the Group By submenu. 4. From the Group By submenu. For information on using the dialogue that appears. To configure the Group By submenu: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. You can display all the fields belonging to a table by clicking the Expand button ( ) to the left of the table name. Click the Configure button next to the Group By field that shows how the data objects are presently grouped. 3. select the field in the Available Fields list and click to move it to the Grouping Fields list. Right-click the folder whose Group By submenu you want to configure. 3. such as transmitters. To change the order of the fields. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. The objects will be grouped in the order of the fields in the Grouping Fields list. 3. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 57 . 2. From the context menu. from top to bottom. Select the General tab of the Properties dialogue. select the field in the Grouping Fields list and click to remove it. You can select contiguous fields by clicking the first field. pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field. 2. The Group By submenu will now contain only the fields you selected. 2.2 Configuring the Group By Submenu Some data objects. Select the fields you want to appear in the Group By submenu. 1.

select the field in the Available Fields list and click to move it to the Group these fields in this order list. To select a field to be used to group the objects. Select Classify by Site from the context menu. select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list.30). 3.4 Advanced Grouping You can group data objects by one or more properties. 3. You can select contiguous fields by clicking the first field. Figure 1. Right-click the Links folder.7. 4. To remove a field from the list of Group these fields in this order.3 Grouping Microwave Links by Site You can find all the microwave links that are connected to a specific site by grouping all links by site. from top to bottom. 3. 2. using the Group By button on the Properties dialogue. The default display of the contents of the Links folder is restored.29: Grouping microwave links by site To restore normal display of microwave links: 1. select the field in the Group these fields in this order list and click to remove it. pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field. The objects will be grouped in the order of the fields in the Group these fields in this order list. Select the fields by which you want to group the objects.30: The Group dialogue 6. Right-click the Links folder. 1. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. The Group dialogue appears (see Figure 1. To group data objects by one or more properties: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.1.7. Click the Group By button. 4. Select the General tab of the Properties dialogue. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Select Properties from the context menu. 5. Atoll creates subfolders for each site with a microwave link and sorts the links by site (see Figure 1. 58 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Select Classify by Site from the context menu. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.29).1.Atoll User Manual 1. 2. Figure 1. 2. The context menu appears. 4. The context menu appears. To change the order of the fields. You can select non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRL and clicking each fields separately. Right-click the folder or subfolder whose objects you have grouped. To group microwave links by site: 1.

Right-click the folder or subfolder whose objects you have grouped. To undo the grouping: 1. 1. From the context menu.7. therefore. you can only see a very long list of transmitters under the Transmitter folder. By right-clicking the Transmitter folder and selecting Group By > Site (Figure 1. you can group the transmitters by the site they are located on. While it is easy to see on the map which transmitters are part of which site. Click OK to close the Group dialogue and click OK to close the Properties dialogue and group the objects.1. Figure 1.5 Examples of Grouping In this example.31: Grouping transmitters by site The result of grouping can be seen in Figure 1. select from the Group By > None.31). in the Explorer window. transmitters. 2.32. there is an Atoll document with a large number of sites and. Figure 1.Chapter 1: The Working Environment 7. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 3.32: Transmitters grouped by site © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 59 .

This section explains the following: • • "Sorting Data in Tables" on page 60 "Advanced Sorting" on page 61 1.34: Transmitters grouped by site 1. Atoll then sorts the records by the second column. When you sort data by several columns. when you are working on a certain area of the network.33: Grouping transmitters by zone The result of grouping can be seen in Figure 1. Figure 1.7. By right-clicking the Transmitter folder and selecting Group By > Polygon > Focus Zone (Figure 1. you can group the transmitters in the focus zone together.31). You can sort the data by either one or by several columns. Atoll sorts the records by the first column and then. 10 to 1) order. the transmitters you are working on are immediately visible under the Transmitter folder. you can save the settings as a folder configuration. see "Folder Configurations" on page 69. for example. within each group of identical values in the first column. you can sort the document data either in the data tables or using the Sort function of Properties dialogue. By grouping them by computation or focus zone. You can sort the data in ascending (A to Z.2. 60 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . and so on. Figure 1. The transmitters are now in two groups: those inside the focus zone and those outside the focus zone.Atoll User Manual You can also group objects by the computation or focus zone.7.32. 1 to 10) or descending (Z to A. You normally create a computation or focus zone when you want to concentrate on a given subset of transmitters. Once you have sorted data objects.1 Sorting Data in Tables When sorting data in tables. you can sort by one column or by several columns. For information.2 Sorting Data In Atoll.

The entire column is selected. The Sort dialogue appears (see Figure 1. see "Advanced Sorting" on page 61. Sorting by Several Columns You can only sort in a table by adjacent columns. Click the Sort button.2 Advanced Sorting You can sort data by several criteria using the Sort function of the Properties dialogue. Select the column name from the And by list. b.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Sorting by One Column To sort data in a table by one column: 1. Choose whether you want to sort in ascending or descending order. Tip: If you want to sort data by several columns without moving the columns. Right-click the column headers. To sort data in a table by several columns: 1. 1. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. For the first column you want to sort on: a. 2. select how you wish to sort: Sort Ascending: sort the data table records from the lowest value in the first reference column to the highest value. Select the header of the column that you want to sort on. 3. Click the header of the first column and drag over the adjacent columns that will be your sort references.2. Choose whether you want to sort in ascending or descending order. 2. The entire column is selected. 5. Right-click the column header.35). select how you wish to sort: Sort Ascending: sort the data table records from the lowest value in the reference column to the highest value. 7. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. For each other column you want to sort on: a. 6. 4. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. Sort Descending: sort the data table records from the highest value in the first reference column to the lowest value. Select the General tab in the Properties dialogue. 4. Sort Descending: sort the data table records from the highest value in the reference column to the lowest value. To sort data using the Sort function of the Properties dialogue: 1. If you want to sort by columns that are not adjacent. you can move the columns first as explained in "Moving Columns" on page 46. From the context menu. The context menu appears. Right-click the folder whose data you want to sort. The context menu appears. b. The context menu appears 3. 8. For information. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 61 . 2. you can use the Sort function on the Properties dialogue. Click OK. From the context menu.7. 3. Select the column name from the Sort by list.

This section explains the following: • • • • "Filtering in Data Tables by Selection" on page 62 "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 63 "Restoring All Records" on page 64 "Advanced Filtering: Examples" on page 64. 2. Select one of the following from the Records menu: Filter by Selection: All records with the selected value or values are displayed. You can save the filtering parameters as a folder configuration. You can now modify these records or make calculations on them as you would normally do with the entire data table (see Figure 1. you can choose to view only records that have the same value or only records that do not have that value. 3. Select the value to filter on. To select more than one value.1 Filtering in Data Tables by Selection You can filter a data table by selecting one or more values.Atoll User Manual Figure 1.7. - Figure 1. The filtered data objects are the data objects that remain after you have applied your filter criteria.3.35: The Sort dialogue 1.7. press CTRL as you click the other values. you can filter data according to one or several criteria. For information. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41.3 Filtering Data In Atoll. You can now modify these records or make calculations on them as you would normally do with the entire data table (see Figure 1. Once you have selected one or more values. To filter a data table on one or more fields: 1. 1. or to facilitate working with large documents by reducing the amount of records displayed.36 on page 62). Filter Excluding Selection: All records without the selected value or values are displayed.36: Filtering by selection (Antenna AO9209) 62 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . see "Folder Configurations" on page 69. You can filter data to be able to work with a subset of data.37 on page 63).

Click Clear All to clear all check boxes. b. Underneath each column name. Select as many columns as you want (see Figure 1.37: Filtering excluding selection (Antenna AO9209) 1.38). Click the Advanced tab: a. Select the check boxes next to the values you want to include in the filter. The Filter dialogue appears. 2. enter the criteria on which the column will be filtered as explained in the following table: Formula =X <> X <X Data are kept in the table only if value equal to X (X may be a number or characters) value not equal to X (X may be a number or characters) numerical value is less than X © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 63 .Chapter 1: The Working Environment Figure 1. Open the data table as explained in "Opening a Data Table" on page 41. In the Column row.38: The Filter dialogue .7. Select a Field from the list. Tip: You can also access the Filter dialogue by clicking the Filter button of the Properties dialogue. Under Values to Include.Advanced tab b. you will find all the values represented in the selected field.3. To create an advanced filter: 1. Figure 1. 4. Note: Making selections on the Filter tab of the Filter dialogue is the equivalent of filtering by selection as explained in "Filtering in Data Tables by Selection" on page 62. Click the Filter tab: a. 3.2 Advanced Data Filtering You can use advanced data filtering to combine several criteria in different fields to create complex filters. Select Records > Advanced Filter. select the name of the column to be filtered on from the list.

1.3. 1. you may want to cancel the filter criteria and display all the records again.3.3 Restoring All Records After you have applied filter criteria to records. see "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 63): • The first criterion. you will find a few examples of advanced filtering: • • • "Advanced Filtering: Example 1" on page 64 "Advanced Filtering: Example 2" on page 65 "Advanced Filtering: Example 3" on page 65. there is an Atoll document with antennas from two manufacturers and with different characteristics. The result of this advanced filter can be seen in the second pane of Figure 1. See "Advanced Filtering: Examples" on page 64.4. then vertically. Filters are combined first horizontally. • • The combination of these criteria is all antennas from manufacturers with a name beginning with "K" and with a beamwidth under 100° but over 50°. To restore all records: • Select Records > Remove Filter. 1. To do this. is all antennas made by a manufacturer with a name beginning with a "K" ("=K*"). Click OK to filter the data according to the criteria you have defined.40. it is not necessary because there is only one manufacturer with a "K.4 Advanced Filtering: Examples In this section. as shown in Figure 1.7.Atoll User Manual Formula >X <=X >=X *X* X* Data are kept in the table only if numerical value is greater than X numerical value is less than or equal to X numerical value is greater than or equal to X text objects which contain X text objects which start with X 5. While you could write in the entire name ("=Kathrein"). The third criterion is all antennas with a beamwidth over 50°.7. 64 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .40.1 Advanced Filtering: Example 1 In this example. Figure 1.3.39: Initial table The objective of this example is to use filter criteria to find antennas manufactured by Kathrein with a beamwidth between 50 and 100°.7." The second criterion is all antennas with a beamwidth under 100°. the following filter syntax is entered in the Advanced tab of the Filter dialogue (for information on the Advanced tab.

Chapter 1: The Working Environment Figure 1. the entered filter syntax contains errors: • • As shown in Figure 1. all antennas are displayed.2 Advanced Filtering: Example 2 In this example. see "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 63).7. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 65 .40: Advanced filtering 1. The objective of this example is the same as well: to use filter criteria to find antennas manufactured by Kathrein with a beamwidth between 50 and 100°. The filter syntax is entered in the Advanced tab of the Filter dialogue (for information on the Advanced tab. or all antennas over 50°. the first criterion is all antennas made by a manufacturer with a name beginning with a "K" ("=K*").3. see "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 63). however. The filter syntax is entered in the Advanced tab of the Filter dialogue (for information on the Advanced tab.40.4. in this case.3 Advanced Filtering: Example 3 In this example. The result of this advanced filter can be seen in the second pane of Figure 1. The objective of this example is the same as well: to use filter criteria to find antennas manufactured by Kathrein with a beamwidth between 50 and 100°.7. the objective of this example was to use filter criteria to find antennas manufactured by Kathrein with a beamwidth between 50 and 100°.41: Errors in filtering As previously stated.41. the first criterion is all antennas made by a manufacturer with a name beginning with a "K" ("=K*"). because the second criterion (beamwidth under 100° and over 50°) is malformed. The second criterion is all antennas with a beamwidth under 100° and over 50°. The result of this advanced filter can be seen in the second pane of Figure 1. however.40.4. The second criterion is all antennas with a beamwidth under 100° and over 50°. the entered filter syntax contains errors: • • As shown in Figure 1.42. in this case. it functioned as an OR condition and not as an AND condition. However. 1. The resulting filter searched for all antennas manufactured by Kathrein with a beamwidth under 100°. Figure 1. with "> 50" placed under "< 100". the document is the same as in "Advanced Filtering: Example 1" on page 64.3. the document is the same as in "Advanced Filtering: Example 1" on page 64.

Vector maps must have the same coordinate system as the raster maps. standard deviations. tips text. and the display settings of radio data folders (including measurement display settings). etc. You can create a user configuration file. The file extension of the user configuration file is CFG. the following are explained: • • "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 67 "Importing a User Configuration" on page 67. you can export many types of settings you have made in a user configuration and then import the settings in another document. and not to a specific Atoll document. When you create a user configuration file. such as geographic data. orthogonality factor.42: Errors in filtering As previously stated. If only the geographic data set or computation and focus zones are being exported in the user configuration file. 66 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . however. 1. the coordinate system of any vector geographic data must be the same as that of the raster geographic data. see the Administrator Manual. If you are working in a multiple-user environment with a central database. the information stored in a user configuration.Atoll User Manual Figure 1. the filtering zone." Because the file is in XML (eXtensible Markup Language).7. Because a macro is linked to an Atoll session. transparency. the visibility scale. Important: If you export the geographic data set in a user configuration file. and indoor loss) and raster or user profile traffic map description. height. because the second criterion is malformed. In this section. Microwave Link Parameters: The settings of microwave links. clutter description (code. Macros: The complete path of any macros. However. you can open and edit it with any XML-capable text editor. default standard deviations. the objective of this example was to use filter criteria to find antennas manufactured by Kathrein with a beamwidth between 50 and 100°. • • Computation and Focus Zones: The computation and focus zone in the current document. grouping and filtering settings (those saved by the user and the current settings. Folder configurations: Sorting. you can export the following information: • Geographic data set: The complete path of imported geographic maps. name. • • For a detailed description of the user configuration file. you can export the macros in a user configuration even if you do not have an Atoll document open.). map display settings (such as. to ensure that all users in a large radio-planning project use the same settings. even if not saved). the percentage of pilot finger of each clutter class. is not stored in the database. indoor loss. Atoll gives the file the extension "GEO. the filter only generates an error message and no antennas are filtered out.4 User Configurations In Atoll.

Chapter 1: The Working Environment 1. 1. 3. To export a user configuration: 1.4. 3. Select Tools > User Configuration > Import.43). or to facilitate working with large documents by reducing the amount of records displayed. 2. Select the check boxes of the information you want to export as part of the user configuration.44). you can create lists of sites.7. Figure 1. Click OK.43: Exporting a user configuration 2. The Save As dialogue appears.2 Importing a User Configuration You can import a user configuration that you or another user has created. Click Open. The User Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 1.7. 1. it into your current Atoll document. Select the check boxes of the information you want to import. The user configuration is imported.7. as explained in "Exporting a User Configuration" on page 67. 5. 4. Once you have created a site list.1 Exporting a User Configuration You create a user configuration by exporting the selected settings to an external file.44: Importing a user configuration 4. The User Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 1. The Open dialogue appears. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 67 . Select the user configuration file with the data you want to import. Figure 1.4. you can modify the list and use it to filter data to be able to work with a subset of data. To import a user configuration: 1. Select Tools > User Configuration > Export. Click OK.5 Site Lists In Atoll. The folder configuration has been saved. Enter a File name for the user configuration file and click Save.

Right-click the Sites folder. The site is added to the selected list. Right-click the folder where you want to create the list: Site list: if you want to create a site list: a. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of Sites folder to expand the folder. To create a site list: 1. Site list: if you want to add a site to a list: Select Add Site to a List from the context menu. the following are explained: • • • • • • "Creating a Site List" on page 68 "Adding a Site to a List from the Explorer Window" on page 68 "Adding a Site to a List from the Map Window" on page 68 "Adding Sites to a List Using a Zone" on page 68 "Editing a Site List" on page 69 "Filtering on a Site List" on page 69. 3. Select the name of the list from the dialogue. 2. The Site Lists table appears. site lists can be stored in the database.5. 3. Enter the name of the new list in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ).7. 1.4 68 Adding Sites to a List Using a Zone You can add the sites contained in a zone to a site or transmitter list. When you open a document from a database. 1. Right-click the site you want to add to the list.5. A dialogue appears.7. Tip: You can quickly create a complete list by first filtering the contents of the Sites folder as explained in "Filtering Data" on page 62. To add a site to a list: 1. The site is added to the selected list. you can select the sites to load according to any defined site lists. Click OK.5. In this section. 1. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . The selected site will be added to the new list. Select the name of the list from the dialogue. 2.Atoll User Manual In a multi-user environment. To add a site to a list: 1.5. Tip: You can create a new list by entering a name in the list instead of selecting the name from the list. The context menu appears. A dialogue appears.3 Adding a Site to a List from the Map Window You can add a site to a list by selecting it from the map window. 2. The selected site will be added to the new list. you can add the filtered contents of folder to the list you select. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. this allows you to more effectively manage your resources by reducing the unnecessary data you retrieve from the database. In the map window. 5.2 Adding a Site to a List from the Explorer Window You can add a site to a list by selecting it from the Explorer window.7. Then. by right-clicking the Sites folder and selecting Site Lists > Add Sites to a List from the context menu. right-click the site you want to add to a list. Tip: You can create a new list by entering a name in the list instead of selecting the name from the list. 3.7. The context menu appears. b. 4. In a large radio-planning project. Site list: if you want to add a site to a list: Select Add Site to a List from the context menu. Select Site Lists > Open Table from the context menu. Click OK.1 Creating a Site List You can create lists of sites that you can then use to filter the data displayed. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 1.

7.6 Filtering on a Site List You can use site or transmitter lists to filter the contents of Sites folder. A dialogue appears. Select Properties from the context menu.7. The Properties dialogue appears. The Properties dialogue appears. Click OK to close the Filter dialogue. Click in the left margin of the row containing the site to select it. 8.6 Folder Configurations In Atoll. the following are explained: • • • • • • "Creating a Folder Configuration" on page 70 "Applying a Saved Folder Configuration" on page 70 "Reapplying the Current Folder Configuration" on page 70 "Exporting a Folder Configuration" on page 70 "Importing a Folder Configuration" on page 70 "Deleting a Folder Configuration" on page 71. You can use a filtering.5. Tip: You can create a new list by entering a name in the list instead of selecting the name from the list. Press DEL to delete the site from the list. 3. Right-click the folder whose contents you want to filter. The selected site will be added to the new list. there will be an additional tab: Sites: Click the Site Lists tab. Click OK. right-click the zone and select the following from the context menu: Add Sites to a List: Select Add Sites to a List to add the sites in the zone to a site list. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 1. b. Only sites that belong to the selected list are now displayed in the Data tab of the Explorer window and in the map window. b. click the Filter button. printing. filtering. To edit a site list: 1.5. the parameters defining how data contained in a folder are grouped. On the Geo tab of the Explorer window.7. The context menu appears. 5. Create a zone as explained in "Using Zones in the Map Window" on page 29 that contains the sites you want to add to a list. 1. The Site Lists table appears. 4. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 69 .5 Editing a Site List You can edit a site list using the Site List table. 5. sorted. Click OK to close the Properties dialogue. 2. 4. In this section. Select the check box of the list or lists that you want to display. 4. Right-click the Sites folder. or sorting criteria. 3. Select the name of the list from the dialogue. The sites contained in the zone are added to the selected list. or filtered are referred to as a folder configuration. Select the name of the list you want to edit and click Properties. 1. Right-click the folder where you want to create the list: Site list: if you want to edit a site list: a. To filter folder contents using a site list: 1.7. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Select Site Lists > Open Table from the context menu. 2. or geographic export zone. You can define folder configurations and save them. To delete a site from the list: a.Chapter 1: The Working Environment To add the sites contained in a zone to a list: 1. 3. Click OK when you have finished editing the site list. 2. The context menu appears. allowing you to consistently apply the same grouping. If you have created a list. focus. You can now edit the list: To add a site to the list: Select the name of the site in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ). computation. 6. On the General tab of the Properties dialogue. The Filter dialogue appears.

Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.3 Reapplying the Current Folder Configuration If you have grouped. Select Properties from the context menu. 3. 4. However. 3. Click Open. On the Configurations submenu. you can save the parameters defining how data contained in a folder are grouped. In this case. you can export it as part of a user configuration to an external file.6. select the name of the configuration you want to apply.6. 8. The User Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 1.7. The previously configured folder configuration is reapplied to the data. select those check boxes as well. Select the Folder Configuration check box. Select Tools > User Configuration > Export. 2. 1. 2. Select the Folder Configuration check box. or sorted a data folder. Select Apply Current Configuration from the context menu. 2.2 Applying a Saved Folder Configuration You can apply a configuration that has been created and saved for the present folder. 7. The Save As dialogue appears. 6. Right-click the folder to which you want to apply a configuration.4 Exporting a Folder Configuration When you create a folder configuration. Enter the name of the configuration in the Save Configuration dialogue. 3. 4. 70 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Select the CFG file with the folder configuration you want to import. 1. To reapply the folder configuration: 1. Right-click the folder whose settings you want to save.6. 1. you can import it into your current document. To import a folder configuration: 1.Atoll User Manual 1. you can reapply the same filter or sort settings to the new or modified data.7. Right-click the folder whose folder configuration you want to reapply. The saved folder configuration is only available for the current folder and can be reapplied to the folder by selecting it from the Configurations submenu on the folder’s context menu. Under Configuration.5 Importing a Folder Configuration Once you have exported a folder configuration as explained in "Exporting a Folder Configuration" on page 70. set the following parameters as desired: Group By (see "Grouping Data Objects" on page 56) Sort (see "Sorting Data" on page 60) Filter (see "Filtering Data" on page 62). The Open dialogue appears. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. If you have not yet done so. 4. Select Tools > User Configuration > Import. To apply a saved folder configuration: 1. The folder configuration has been saved. 3. you save it to the current ATL document. Click OK.7.6.7. filtered. If you then add or modify data.43 on page 67). The folder configuration is applied to the current folder.1 Creating a Folder Configuration In Atoll. To export a folder configuration: 1. To create a configuration: 1. so that it can be used in other documents. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. or sorted as a folder configuration. Click OK to save the configuration and click OK to close the Properties dialogue. The context menu appears. 2. the properties of these may not match the folder configuration you previously made on the data folder. If you want to export other configurations at the same time. 3. filtered. 5. 2. Select the General tab in the Properties dialogue.7.6. you have created and applied a folder configuration.44 on page 67). 1. Enter a File name for the CFG file and click Save. click Save. The User Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 1.

For information on renaming an object. 1. 1. Select the check box of one of the subfolders. with its grouping. Once you have performed the actions on each subfolder. Select Create a Subfolder from the context menu. You can remove subfolders by deleting them. or filtering settings by creating subfolders of object folders in the Data tab and applying different settings to each subfolder. 4. Click OK. Each subfolder contains a copy of the data in the object folder in which it was created. To compare subfolders: 1. Click Delete. the data do not reappear under the initial folder. clear the check boxes to the left of each subfolder.7. Clear this check box and select the check box of a different subfolder. by displaying in turn each subfolder. A subfolder is created containing a copy of the original folder content. 3. Right-click the folder with the folder configuration you want to delete. leaving the check boxes of the other subfolders cleared. sorting. sorting.6. sorting. Tip: If you have created several subfolders.8 Filtering Data Using a Filtering Zone In Atoll. 5. Tip: If. To delete a folder configuration: 1.7 Creating and Comparing Subfolders You can compare the effects of different grouping. see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. To create a subfolder of a folder: 1. the data contained are not deleted. The folder configuration is imported. 2. Select Properties from the context menu. sorting. or filtering settings. For more information on display properties. 2. In the Data tab of the Explorer window. you can simplify your calculations by using a polygon on the map to limit the amount of data considered in calculations. or filtering settings. you can refresh the display by right-clicking the folder and selecting Group By > None from the context menu. 5. You can now perform the following actions on the subfolder: • • • Grouping (see "Grouping Data Objects" on page 56) Sorting (see "Sorting Data" on page 60) Filtering (see "Filtering Data" on page 62).7. Atoll will not ask for confirmation.6 Deleting a Folder Configuration You can delete a folder configuration from the Atoll document when you no longer need it. The data objects are not displayed on the map.7. or filtering settings of the selected subfolder. When you delete a subfolder. it is deleted immediately. By limiting the number of sites. The data objects of the selected subfolder. with its associated grouping. you can rename each one to give it a more descriptive name. When you delete the last subfolder.Chapter 1: The Working Environment If you want to import other configurations at the same time. The folder configuration is deleted. To delete a subfolder: • Right-click the subfolder to be deleted and select Delete from the context menu. you can compare the differences. How the objects are displayed on the map will change. on the map. select the name of the configuration from the list. Caution: When you delete a folder configuration. are displayed on the map. Under Configuration. select those check boxes as well. the data reappear under the initial folder. 1. right-click the folder you want to create a subfolder of. after deleting the last subfolder. depending on the different grouping. you can reduce the time and cost of calculations and make visualisation of data © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 71 . Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. see "Renaming an Object" on page 17. 2. In the Data tab of the Explorer window. 3. 6. Select the General tab in the Properties dialogue.

any folder whose content is affected by the filtering zone appears with a special icon ( folder contents have been filtered. groups of hexagons. By using the Location Finder. see "Using a Filtering Zone" on page 29. 72 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . you can search for a site.8.8 Tips and Tricks In this section. You can select a pre-existing computation or focus zone as a filter zone or you can draw a new filtering zone. or deleting a transmitter. measurement paths. to indicate that the For more information on creating and editing a filtering zone. ). For example. repeaters. When you have applied a polygon filter. This section explains: • • • "Searching for a Map Object by Its Name" on page 72 "Searching for a Map Object using Any Text Property" on page 73 "Searching for a Point on the Map" on page 73. 1. you can perform the following actions on the filtered data: • • • Grouping (see "Grouping Data Objects" on page 56) Sorting (see "Sorting Data" on page 60) Filtering (see "Filtering Data" on page 62). when you add data that is inconsistent with an applied filter. 1. The data objects filtered by the polygon are reflected on the map and in the data tables.8. To redo an action that you have undone: • Select Edit > Redo.Atoll User Manual objects on the map clearer. you can undo or redo: • • Most modifications in the workspace: such as creating.8. You can also use the Location Finder to search for a point on the map by its x and y coordinates. for example. transmitters. deleting. a station or a group of stations. a simulation. up to a maximum of 10 actions. the Undo and Redo histories are erased. Tasks performed in tables: such as adding or deleting records.1 Searching for a Map Object by Its Name You can use the Find toolbar to search for the following map objects by name: • • sites microwave links. using the Find toolbar. repeaters or remote antennas. modifying the antenna azimuth.2 Refreshing Maps and Folders Under certain circumstances. or a vector by any text field. Tasks performed in the Explorer: such as creating and deleting objects (sites. You can search for some objects (sites. or links) by their name. pasting in tables. transmitters. You can refresh the display to get Atoll to reload the data and reapply the current configurations to folders. To refresh the display of the Explorer window and the map: • Click the Refresh button ( ) on the toolbar or press F5. you will learn a few shortcuts and tricks to help you work more efficiently with Atoll: • • • • • • • "Undoing and Redoing" on page 72 "Refreshing Maps and Folders" on page 72 "Searching for Objects on the Map" on page 72 "Using the Status Bar to Get Information" on page 73 "Saving Information Displayed in the Event Viewer" on page 74 "Using Icons from the Toolbar" on page 74 "Using Shortcuts in Atoll" on page 75. On the Data tab of the Explorer window. maps. and moving a site. 1.3 Searching for Objects on the Map Atoll provides several tools for finding data objects on the map. • To undo an action: • Select Edit > Undo. 1. the data displayed on the map or in the Explorer window.3. moving a transmitter. antennas. coverage predictions.8. etc. links. for example. may not be actual. propagation models. a microwave link. If you perform an action that can not be undone.1 Undoing and Redoing You can undo or redo most actions in Atoll.). 1.

. including sites that are presently filtered out. Enter the x and y coordinates of the point.8. Atoll selects the site and centres it in the map window.8. 1. 2.Chapter 1: The Working Environment To search for a map object by name using the Find toolbar: 1. 3. Select View > Find Toolbar to display the Find toolbar. Atoll selects the object and centres it in the map window. If you wish to search all the sites in the search. non-numeric) property: • • • sites microwave links vectors.3 Searching for a Point on the Map You can search for a point by entering its x and y coordinates in the Location Finder. choose the map object you are searching for: Site Link Vector 3. Atoll marks the point ( ) and centres it in the map window. or in the clutter classes). Click the Location Finder button ( 2. From the Find list.e. Note: You can change the Find toolbar to a floating window by double-clicking it. choose Point. 4. The Location Finder dialogue appears. select the Include all the sites in the search (filtered or not) check box. Click the Location Finder button ( ) on the toolbar. Under Criteria.3. 4. about the current position of the mouse pointer in right side of the status bar (see Figure 1. Click OK. choose the map object you are searching for: Site Link 3. Note: To remove the point icon ( ). You can use an asterisk ("*")as a wild card in the following ways: *X* X* *X names which contain X names which start with X names which end with X 4. For information. To search on the map for a point using the Location Finder: 1. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 73 . To search for a map object by a text property using the Location Finder: 1. 1. The Location Finder dialogue appears.2 Searching for a Map Object using Any Text Property You can use the Location Finder to search for the following map object using any text (i.45): • • • • the current X-Y coordinates (according to the defined display coordinate system) the altitude (as defined in the DTM) the clutter class (as defined in the clutter classes properties) the clutter height (as defined in the clutter height file. Click OK. if available. 2.3. select it and then select Delete from the context menu. see "Searching for a Map Object using Any Text Property" on page 73. Press ENTER.8. You can use an asterisk as a wild card in the following ways: *X* X* text objects which contain X text objects which start with X 5. 1. ) on the toolbar.4 Using the Status Bar to Get Information Atoll displays the following information. From the Find list. select a Field to be searched and enter the value of the field. using the same units as defined under Display on the Coordinates tab of the Options dialogue (see "Projection and Display Coordinate Systems" on page 81). Enter the name of the object in the Named box. From the Find list. Note: You can also search for a map object by its name by using the Location Finder.

Click and drag to select several events. The context menu appears. The Save As dialogue appears. Click the event in the Event Viewer to select it. warning ( ).8.5 Saving Information Displayed in the Event Viewer Atoll displays information about the current document in the Event Viewer. Select Save As. For more information about these settings. 5. as well as the progress of calculations. and error ( ) messages. Some of them are also linked to shortcut keys (see "Using Shortcuts in Atoll" on page 75). enter a File name.8. select View > Event Viewer to display it. To save events in the Event Viewer in a log file: 1. The selected events are saved in the text file. If the Event Viewer is not displayed. You can also automatically generate log files for each Atoll session and select the level of information displayed in the Event viewer. select a destination folder. and select a file type from the Save as type list. The different icons located in the toolbar are listed below: • In the Standard toolbar Open the Project Templates dialogue (CTRL+N) Open the Open dialogue (CTRL+O) Save the current document (CTRL+S) Cut the selected data (CTRL+X) Copy the selected data (CTRL+C) Paste the content of the clipboard (CTRL+V) Undo the last modification (CTRL + Z) Redo the previous undone modification (CTRL + Y) Print the current window (table or map) (CTRL+P) Preview the current window before printing (table or map) (CTRL+P) Open the About Atoll dialogue • In the Map toolbar Select area Refresh display of map and folders (F5) Disable zooming and panning tools. Right-click the select event(s). The Event Viewer displays information ( ).6 Using Icons from the Toolbar You can access many commands in Atoll by clicking its icon on the toolbar.Atoll User Manual X-Y coordinates Altitude (from DTM) Clutter class Figure 1. In the Save As dialogue. 3. 6. Click OK.45: Information displayed in the status bar 1. You can save the information displayed in the Event Viewer in a log file. Move the map window (CTRL+D) 74 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 1. see the Administrator Manual. 2. 4.

1.8. giving a short description. Note: When you place the cursor over an icon. see "Using Icons from the Toolbar" on page 74): © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 75 . • In the Vector Edition toolbar Create a new vector layer (in either the Geo or the Data tab) Select the vector layer to edit Draw a new polygon Draw a new rectangle Draw a new line Draw points Merge several vector polygons Cut out areas in polygons Create new polygon from overlapping areas Split one polygon along the drawn lines. Create a new multipoint microwave link. Create a new multi-hop microwave link.7 Using Shortcuts in Atoll Atoll provides many shortcuts that enable you to access commonly used tools and commands more quickly. Currently selected microwave link model Activate the microwave link profile analysis window Show or hide victim and interferer links Show or hide site parities Stop the calculations in progress • In the Search toolbar Centre site in the map window.Chapter 1: The Working Environment Map scale currently used Previous/Next view (zoom and location) Zoom in on the map and centre on the cursor location (CTRL+A) and zoom out on the map and centre on the cursor location (CTRL+R) Define a zoom area on the map (CTRL+W) Turn on tool tips Measure distances on the map Location finder Display a point-to-point profile • In the Microwave link toolbar Create a new microwave link. a tool tip appears. The shortcuts available are listed below (some of the same commands can be accessed using a toolbar icon.

click CTRL+W: Define a zoom area on the map (in the toolbar.Atoll User Manual • Using the CTRL key: CTRL++: Zoom in on the map (in the toolbar. click CTRL+X: Cut the selected data (in the toolbar. or Point to Multipoint folder or subfolder to a text file. see "Exporting Tables to Text Files" on page 49. click CTRL+U: Copy the last cell of a selection up into all selected cells CTRL+V: Paste the content of the clipboard (in the toolbar. click ) ) and click the map) and right-click the map) CTRL+E: Export the table of the selected Sites. 76 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Links. For more information. click ) ) Using the ALT key: ALT+ ALT+ ←: Previous zoom and location on the map (in the toolbar. or Point to Multipoint folder or subfolder from a text file. Links. CTRL+F: Open the Find dialogue in a table CTRL+I: Import the table of the selected Sites. click ) ) ALT+F8: Open the Add-ins and Macros dialogue F3: Select the Find Site tool. click CTRL+SHIFT+N: Create a new document from an existing database CTRL+O: Open the Open dialogue (in the toolbar. CTRL+N: Open the Project Templates dialogue (in the toolbar. click CTRL+Z: Undo the last modification (in the toolbar. click CTRL+A: Select all records in a table CTRL+C: Copy the selected data (in the toolbar. Multi-Hops. click CTRL+D: In tables: Copy the first cell of a selection down into all selected cells In the map window: Move the map window (in the toolbar. For more information. F5: Refresh display of map and folders (toolbar: select ) • Using the Function Keys - Tip: Menus and commands can be also accessed by pressing the ALT key and typing the underlined letter in the menu or command name. click →: Next zoom and location on the map (in the toolbar. click ) ) ) ) ) • CTRL+S: Save the current active document (in the toolbar. click ) ) ) CTRL+Y: Redo the previous undone modification (in the toolbar. see "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 50. click CTRL+–: Zoom out on the map (in the toolbar. Multi-Hops. click CTRL+P: Print the current window (in the toolbar. click CTRL+Q: Select Zoom In/Out tool (in the toolbar.

Chapter 2 Starting an Atoll Project .

Atoll User Manual 78 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .

Geographic data: clutter classes. For more information on equipment. population maps. clutter heights. However. Once you have started your new Atoll project. you create an Atoll document in one of two ways: • From a document template: You can create a new Atoll document from a template. Atoll can work with several common databases. Atoll is delivered with a template for each technology you will be planning for.2 Creating an Atoll Document Whatever the radio technology you will be modelling. In this chapter. making the changes necessary to meet your own needs and then saving it as a new template. see the technology-specific chapters. For example. Because Atoll can work with linked geographic data files.1.2. Atoll enables you to find the file and repair the link. The exact procedure for creating a new Atoll document from a database differs. In this section. you can modify the network parameters to meet your particular needs. and other equipment. Each template provides data and a data structure suitable for the technology. certain geo data or antennas. from any technology template. For more information onmicrowave data. For information on creating a document from a template. When you open an existing project.1 Templates Available Depending on your configuration of Atoll. 2. Microwave data: frequency bands. Working with a database allows several users to share the same data while at the same time managing data consistency. For more information on geographic data. for example. see "Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template" on page 79. The actual templates supplied depend on the modules included with your Atoll installation. For information on starting a document from a database. etc. Several templates are supplied with Atoll: GPS GPRS EGPRS. see "Creating a New Atoll Document from a Database" on page 84. the following templates are available: • Microwave Radio Links: Atoll allows you to model microwave radio links. Once the necessary data have been assembled. UMTS HSPA. you can create the Atoll document.Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project 2 Starting an Atoll Project When you want to start a new project. you configure the basic parameters of the Atoll document (see "Defining a New Atoll Document" on page 81).1 Before Starting a Microwave-Planning Project For every microwave-planning project you must assemble the information necessary: • • • Microwave equipment: sites. as part of a complete mobile telecommunications network. the following are explained: • • "Before Starting a Microwave-Planning Project" on page 79 "Creating an Atoll Document" on page 79. For example. CDMA200 1xRTT 1xEV-DO. see the technology-specific chapters. • From an existing database: When you create a new Atoll document from a database. technology-specific parameters. the tabs in the transmitter Properties dialogue as well as the radio parameters available differ according to the project. WiMAX. coordinate systems. antennas. or you can open it from the Open dialogue. You can also create your own template by basing it on an existing document that you have already customised with. Once you have selected the appropriate template for your microwave-planning project. it may happen that one of the linked files was moved or renamed since the last time you worked on that project. DTM. Atoll has a template for each technology you will be planning for. You can also create your own templates by opening an existing template. etc. UMTS cells are only available in UMTS documents and TRX are only available in GSM-TDMA documents. 2. the database you connect to has been created with the technology and data you need. and LTE. you base it on a template that has the data and folder structure necessary for the technology you are using. this template is provided to enable you to create a project of only microwave radio links. depending on the database containing the data. you can select it from the File menu if it is one of the last projects you have worked on. TD-SCDMATD-SCDMATD-SCDMA • © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 79 . microwave radio links.1 Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template You can create a new Atoll document from a template. 2. As well. see "Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project". the following are explained: • • • "Templates Available" on page 79 "Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template" on page 80 "Defining a New Atoll Document" on page 81 2. the objects that are available are appropriate for the technology.2.

49 appears. The dialogue in Figure 2. These can be modified or replaced. with. Figure 2. Select the template on which you want to base your document and click OK. 2.48: New Atoll document — Modules tab When you create an Atoll document from a template.46 shows a new Atoll document based on the UMTS HSPA HSPA template. respectively. 80 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .Atoll User Manual 2. Figure 2. among other UMTSUMTS-specific elements.47: New Atoll document — Geo tab Figure 2.48 show the contents of the Geo and Modules tabs of the new document. The Data tab of the Explorer window now has a folder structure suitable for a UMTS HSPA HSPA radio-planning project. folders for UMTS HSPA HSPA parameters and UMTS HSPA HSPA simulations.2 Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template To create a new document from a template: 1. Atoll creates a new document based on the template selected.2. The Project Templates dialogue appears.47 and Figure 2.1. To verify whether the document is connected to a database: • Select File > Database > Connection Properties.46: New Atoll document based on a template Figure 2. Select File > New > From a Document Template. The Antennas folder is expanded to show the UMTSUMTS-compatible antennas suggested by Atoll. the document is not connected to a database. Figure 2.

The map shows the French Riviera projected using the cartographic NTF (Paris)/France II étendue system (coordinates in metres). 1. 1982. direction. In this section. 2nd Edition. You can accept the default values for some parameters. scale. but a representation of a location on the earth's surface from geographic coordinates (degree-minute-second or grade) giving the latitude and longitude in relation to the origin meridian (Paris for NTF system and Greenwich for ED50 system).Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project Figure 2. This projection cannot be done without distortion. By choosing a specific display system. This projection type is useful for mapping large areas that are oriented north-south. In Figure 2. On the other hand. United States Government Printing Office. you configure the basic parameters of the Atoll document..1. The Universal Transverse Mercator projection (UTM): a portion of the earth is mathematically projected on a cylinder tangent to a meridian (which is transverse or crosswise to the equator). 313 pages.2. you can see (using the rulers or status bars) the location of sites on the map in a coordinate system different from the projection coordinate system.50. the same coordinate system is used for both. P. • A geographic system is not a projection.3.49: An Atoll document based on a template is not connected to a database 2. The maps displayed in the workspace are referenced with the same projection system as the imported geographic data files. Two projection systems are widely used: • The Lambert Conformal-Conic projection: a portion of the earth is mathematically projected on a cone conceptually secant at one or two standard parallels. a database based on the European Petroleum Survey Group and another one regrouping only France's coordinate systems. etc. or he must compromise on several characteristics1. thus. By default. Atoll has databases including more than 980 international coordinate system references. John. the projection system depends on the imported geographic file. Washington. the French Riviera geographic data file has been imported. Atoll distinguishes the cartographic coordinate systems for projection and either cartographic or geographic coordinate systems for display. Snyder. You can also position on the map sites referenced in the display system: the coordinates are automatically converted from the projection system to the display system and the site is displayed on the map.2. Map Projections Used by the US Geological Survey. area or shape) which is to be shown appropriately at the expense of the other characteristics. This projection type is useful for representing countries or regions that lay primarily east to west. The locations in the geographic system can be converted into other projections..C. site coordinates are stated in the geographic WGS 72 system (coordinates in degrees-minutes-seconds). A projection is a method for producing all or part of a round body on a flat sheet. such as basic measurement units. D.1.3 Defining a New Atoll Document Once you have created a new Atoll document as explained in "Creating a New Atoll Document from a Template" on page 80.1 Projection and Display Coordinate Systems In Atoll. The projected zones are referenced using cartographic coordinates (meter. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 81 . thus the cartographer must choose the characteristic (distance. you define the two coordinate systems for each Atoll document: the projection coordinate system and the display coordinate system. the following are explained: • • • "Projection and Display Coordinate Systems" on page 81 "Setting a Coordinate System" on page 82 "Setting Measurement Units" on page 82 2. yard. but you must set projection and display coordinate systems.).

If not. by default. For example: • • • • 26°56’29. Select a coordinate system from the list. The selected coordinate system appears in the Projection field and. The Options dialogue appears.9’’N 26d56m29.9sN 26. both cartographic systems (identified by the symbol) and geographic systems (identified by the symbol) are available. Click OK.3. distance. in the Display field as well. projection and display coordinate systems are the same.93914 To change the degree display format: 1.1. click the Browse button ( ) to the right of the Display field and repeat step 3. 2.2.1. but you can choose a different display coordinate system if you wish. In the Coordinate Systems dialogue. ) to the right of the Projection field. Tip: If you frequently use a particular coordinate system you can add it to a catalogue of favourites by clicking Add to Favourites.3. To define the coordinate system: 1. only cartographic systems (identified by the symbol) are available. and offset to internal defaults. height. If you wish to set a different coordinate system for the display. 2.2 Setting a Coordinate System Because you are working with maps. you must set a coordinate system for your Atoll document. Select Tools > Options. For the display system.4 Setting Measurement Units When you create a new Atoll document. 2.3. Note: The degree format options apply only to the geographic coordinate systems. click the Browse button ( tems dialogue appears. 4.93914N +26. 3. Click OK. 6.50: NTF (Paris)/France II étendue system used with WGS 72 system Notes: All imported raster geographic files must be use the same cartographic system. 82 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .3 Selecting the Degree Display Format Atoll can display longitude and latitude in four different formats.1. select the format from the Degree Format list.2. transmission. For the projection system.Atoll User Manual Figure 2. 5. On the Coordinates tab. select a catalogue from the Find in list. On the Coordinates tab.2. you must convert them to a single cartographic system. or you can change them using the Options dialogue. By default. to step 5. Atoll sets certain measurement units for reception. 2. You can accept these default measurement units. 2. The Options dialogue appears. Select Tools > Options. The Coordinate Sys- 3.

users can modify their projects. 2.2. when you archive your changes to the database. Since geographic data files are usually large. modified. Different user groups may be working on regional or smaller sections of the network. large (may be nation-wide) network. work simultaneously on given parts of a single.2.2 Working in a Multi-User Environment A multi-user environment is one where a number of users.. modified. The Options dialogue appears. 2. When you create a new Atoll document from a database. Atoll loads the data to which you have rights from database into your new document and then disconnects it from the database. the Atoll administrator can manage all the data shared by all the individual Atoll users or groups of users. Shared geographic data: Shared geographic data files are usually stored on a common file server with a fast access connection. Once the database is in place. On the Units tab. they are usually linked to an Atoll file. can be detected and resolved. the changes you have made may occasionally interfere with changes other users have made and you will need to resolve this conflict. and updated by the Atoll administrator. for example). © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 83 . so as to minimise the size of the Atoll file. and is then subdivided into sections on which users or groups of users can work simultaneously.2. usually store these modifications locally. Shared data: Shared data are initially set up by the administrator using the central Atoll project and are then accessed. thus ensuring access to the database by other users. and have access to the shared path loss matrices folder. The use of a database means that potential data conflicts due to modifications from other users. It is initiated through the central Atoll project by the administrator. Users who modify geographic data locally.1 The Atoll Multi-User Environment An Atoll multi-user environment consists of the following elements.Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project To set the measurement units: 1. The shared data are mainly of the following three types: The central database: The central database stores all the radio data of all the Atoll user documents. For example. editing edit clutter or traffic in their respective projects. for example. since these modifications rarely have an impact on other users. 2. Consequently. they are stored externally.e. and updated by the Atoll users and the administrator. or groups of users. This section describes the different components of multi-user environments and outlines their purpose. you are working on data that you are sharing with other users. In this section. worked on. When you work on a document created from a database. there are issues related to sharing data that do not arise when you are working on a stand-alone document. load only the required part of the geographic data (as defined by the CFG file. User documents are Atoll files which are connected to the central database. Select Tools > Options. The connection to the reference database is reactivated only when necessary. and archive their modifications in the database. modified or deleted records. • - • User Documents: Individual user documents are initialised by the administrator but are later worked upon and managed by each user. for example. Through this central Atoll project. connected over a network: • A central Atoll project: The central Atoll project can only be accessed. Click OK. refresh their projects from the data stored in the database. the following are explained: • • • • • "The Atoll Multi-User Environment" on page 83 "Creating a New Atoll Document from a Database" on page 84 "Working With a Document on a Database" on page 85 "Refreshing an Atoll Document from the Database" on page 86 "Archiving the Modifications of an Atoll Document in the Database" on page 87. i. select the desired unit for the following measurements: Reception Transmission Distance Height and offset 3.

2 Creating a New Atoll Document from a Database When you create a new document from a database. Note: Additional dialogues may open asking you to choose which project in the database to load or which site list to load. 2. The Data to Load dialogue appears. A new connection with the database will be created only when necessary. 3. 84 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .51: Components of Multi-user Environments Note: For information on creating and maintaining the database. allowing you to select the data to load into Atoll as a new document (see "Selecting the Data to Load From the Database" on page 85). you must connect to the database.2.2. 2. Atoll can work with the following databases: • • • • • Microsoft Access Microsoft SQL Server Oracle Sybase Microsoft Data Link files The following sections give examples of connecting to two different databases and loading data: • • "Connecting to a Database" on page 84. Depending on the type of the database. The exact procedure of connecting with the database differs from one database to another. select the option corresponding to the type of your database. in order to allow other users access to the database.Atoll User Manual Figure 2. see the Administrator Manual.2. Click OK. In the Files of type list. Password. a dialogue may appear where you can enter your User Name. "Selecting the Data to Load From the Database" on page 85.2.2. Once connected. The Open from a Database dialogue appears. Then the connected is interrupted. Atoll loads the database into a new Atoll document. Select File > New > From an Existing Database. An example of a new Atoll document created from a database is shown in: • "Working With a Document on a Database" on page 85 2.1 Connecting to a Database To create a new document from a database: 1. and Server.

respectively. unlike a document created from a template.55 show the contents of the Geo and Modules tabs of the new document.2. These can be modified or replaced.53: New Atoll document opened from a database Note: The new document may open with no site displayed in the map window. and Neighbour to load. Figure 2.3 Working With a Document on a Database Figure 2. If you load the intra-technology or the inter-technology neighbour list.Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project 2.2.54 and Figure 2. This is because the north-west point of the project is by default the axis origin.2. and selecting Centre in the map window from the context menu. Figure 2.2.53 shows a new Atoll document based created from a database.52: Selecting the data to load 2. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 85 .2. Site List. Atoll will also load the associated exceptional pairs table. You can re-centre the document on the data displayed in the Data tab by expanding the Sites folder. The Data tab of the Explorer window now has a folder structure suitable for a UMTS radio-planning project. You can select which Project. you can select the data to be loaded from the database to create the document in the Data to load dialogue. Custom Fields Groups. rightclicking on any site. The Sites folder is expanded to show that a document created from a database can have additional data. Figure 2. such as sites.2 Selecting the Data to Load From the Database When you create a new document from a database.

you can view the characteristics of the database connection. Select File > Database > Refresh From the Database. You can ensure that you have the most recent data in your document by refreshing the information from the database. 2. you should refresh your document frequently as well. How frequently you refresh the document depends on how frequently the database is updated.56: The Database Connection dialogue 2. in order to continue working with the most up-to-date data. If you chose Archive your changes in the database. You can now: Disconnect your document from the database.55: New Atoll document — Modules tab When you create an Atoll document from a database. the Archive dialogue appears. - Modify your connection to the database. If the database is updated frequently. To view the characteristics of the database connection: 1. 86 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .2.4 Refreshing an Atoll Document from the Database As you are working on your document. Figure 2. Cancel your changes and reload database: This option allows you to cancel any changes you have made and start over from the point of the last archive to the database. Refresh unmodified data only: This option allows you to refresh from the database only those items that you have not modified in your document. The Database Connection dialogue appears (see Figure 2. For information on using the Archive dialogue. To refresh an Atoll document from the database: 1. Notes: • • If you chose Refresh unmodified data only or Cancel your changes and reload database. The Refresh dialogue appears. Select File > Database > Connection Properties. Atoll proceeds without asking for confirmation. other users who have access to the database may have modified some of the data. you can do one of the following if you have modified your document but have not yet saved those changes in the database: Archive your changes in the database: This option allows you to archive your changes to the server instead of refreshing your document from the server. see "Archiving the Modifications of an Atoll Document in the Database" on page 87. it will be become a stand-alone document and you will not be able to reconnect it to the database.56). 2.2. Caution: If you disconnect your document from the database.54: New Atoll document — Geo tab Figure 2. In the dialogue.Atoll User Manual Figure 2.

when you archive your changes. see "Resolving Data Conflicts" on page 88.2. the number of other users using the database who may benefit from your modifications.Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project 3.2. Occasionally. etc. you can do the following: Click Run All to archive all your changes to the database. you can archive only some of them or even undo modifications you have made locally. 2. the following are explained: • • • "Archiving All Modifications in the Database" on page 87 "Archiving Only Site-Related Data in the Database" on page 87 "Resolving Data Conflicts" on page 88. You can then rename the file and save it where you wish. The document is refreshed according to the selected options. Which data is archived depends on the radio technology you are working with. How frequently you should archive your document depends on several factors: the amount and size of changes you make.2 Archiving Only Site-Related Data in the Database Atoll allows you to archive only site-related data if you wish. other users might have modified some of the same data and. you can have read access to the antennas table. and updates) that were stored in the database since the last time you refreshed or opened your document. Select one item under Pending Changes and click Run to archive the selected modification to the database Select one item under Pending Changes and click Differences to view the differences between the local item and the item on the database. you will not be able to archive any changes you make to the antennas without write access to the table.5 Archiving the Modifications of an Atoll Document in the Database When you are working on an Atoll document that is attached to a database. you can generate a report for the refresh process. The report lists all the modifications (deletions. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 87 . and opens it. The Atoll archiving process is flexible.2. additions. you should from time to time archive the modifications you have made to the data on the database. allowing you to create a new Atoll document with the given antennas. In the Archive dialogue. Intra-technology Neighbours and Inter-technology Neighbours. in a UMTS HSPA radio planning project. you can select the neighbour lists. because only the administrator can modify the properties of the antennas. In this section. For example. Select File > Database > Archive to the Database. 4. For information on managing conflicts.2. Under Take into account.57: The Archive dialogue 3. If you selected to generate a report. transmitters. 2. Select one item under Pending Changes and click Undo to refresh the modification with the original data from the database. Atoll stops the archiving process and asks you to resolve the conflict. However. Figure 2. 2. As well. click Close. the site-related data are: sites.1 Archiving All Modifications in the Database To archive all your modifications in the database: 1. 5. to refresh. What you can archive depends on the user rights the database administrator has given to you. when you are archiving. Under Modifications Since the Last Refresh. 4. You can archive all your modifications or only the site-related modifications. Atoll creates a text file in CSV (Comma Separated Values) format in the temporary files system folder.2. The Archive dialogue appears (see Figure 2.57). and neighbours. if you wish.5.2. Click OK. cells.5. Atoll will inform you of the possible conflicts and help you resolve them. When you are finished archiving. For example. Atoll shows you all modifications that will be archived and. 2. If some of the data has been modified on the database since you last refreshed.

3. When Atoll finds a conflict. it displays the warning shown in Figure 2. Atoll warns him that the data have been changed since he last refreshed the data and that there is a conflict. You can resolve the conflicts after the archiving process has ended.5. Select one item under Pending Changes and click Undo to refresh the modification with the original data from the database. To resolve data conflicts one by one: 1.2. see "Resolving Data Conflicts" on page 88. When you are finished archiving. Abort: If you click Abort. 88 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . and archives all other modifications. In the Pending Changes pane of the Archive dialogue.58: Conflict warning You have three options: • Ignore: If you click Ignore. 4.Atoll User Manual To archive only the site-related data in the database: 1. this also creates the possibility of two users modifying the same data. Figure 2. and continues with the next table. Ignore All: If you click Ignore All. In the Conflict in Changes dialogue. the archiving process stops. archives all other modifications in the table. 2. 2. A conflict is caused only by differences in the same field of the same record between the database and the current Atoll document. with the fields in conflict highlighted (see Figure 2. you can do the following: Click Run All to archive all your changes to the database. Atoll ignores items causing conflicts in the table being archived. If some of the data has been modified on the database since you last refreshed. You can resolve the conflicts after the archiving process has ended. the procedure to resolve the conflict is the same. Select one item under Pending Changes and click Run to archive the selected modification to the database Select one item under Pending Changes and click Differences to view the differences between the local item and the item on the database. Atoll ignores all items causing conflicts in all tables being archived. There are two different types of data conflicts: On a modified record: You are in the process of archiving your modifications on the database and another user has modified the same data since you last archived or refreshed your data. The Conflict in Changes dialogue appears. select the conflict you want to resolve and click Resolve. Atoll allows you to resolve data conflicts. In the Archive dialogue.3 Resolving Data Conflicts Atoll enables several users to use the same database by allowing user to load the data and then freeing the database for other users. The Archive dialogue appears. Atoll stops the archiving process and asks you to resolve the conflict. However.59). You can attempt to resolve conflicts before restarting the archiving process. click Close. you can see the value of the field in the database in the Database values column.2. For information on managing conflicts. if conflicts are found in other tables. Atoll will warn you with the Database Transfer Error dialogue again. • • Whether you abort the archive process to resolve the conflict immediately.58. However. or wait until the end of the archive process. Select File > Database > Archive to the Database. as well as the value of the same field in your document in the Current values column. When the second user attempts to archive his changes.

Your modification will be written to the database. overwriting the value there. To resolve all the data conflicts: 1.59: The Conflict in Changes dialogue If you want to overwrite the database value with the value of the same field in your document.61). thereby recreating the deleted record. 2. Cancel: Select Cancel to cancel. select the check box next to the highlighted change and click Archive. Atoll displays a message explaining how Resolve All works (see Figure 2. Select one of the following: Figure 2. Cancel: Select Cancel to cancel. Your modification will be lost and the value in the database will remain unchanged. see "Resolving Data Conflicts" on page 88. Select one of the following: Figure 2.60).61: Resolving all the data conflicts simultaneously Yes: Select Yes to accept all the modifications made by other users in the database and update your document with values from the database. Atoll displays a message explaining that the record you are trying to update has been deleted from the database (see Figure 2. Important: You should only resolve all the data conflicts when you are certain about the modifications. clear the check box next to the highlighted change and click Archive. Click Close to close the Archive dialogue. Click Close to close the Archive dialogue. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 89 . No: Select No to abandon your modifications to this record and delete this record from your document.60: Conflict on a deleted record Yes: Select Yes to store your modifications in the database. No: Select No to overwrite the modifications made by other users in the database with the values from your document. For information. If you want to accept the value of the field in the database. - - On a deleted record: You are in the process of archiving your modifications on the database and another user has deleted a record since you last archived or refreshed your data. In the Pending Changes pane of the Archive dialogue. select any conflict and click Resolve All.Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project Figure 2. 2.

Atoll displays a message in the Event Viewer every time a backup file is updated. If you open two large documents in the same Atoll session. Therefore. if you have a lot of documents open. You can define the update interval each time you start Atoll. 4 GB under 64-bit operating systems) memory allocation. Atoll proceeds to back up all open documents.e. The timer starts again once the calculations are over. If you open them in two different Atoll sessions. Click OK. 4. each document will have its own 2 GB allocated memory.ini file. the automatic backup is delayed until the calculations have ended." Atoll will create a backup file called "filename.. Consequently. For example.62). for a document named "filename. between consecutive backups in the Automatically save backups every text box. Atoll creates a backup of the original document and updates it at a defined interval. If you click OK. these documents will use the same 2 GB memory pool.3 Making a Backup of Your Document Atoll can create and automatically update backups of documents you are working on. If you selected the Prompt before starting automatic backup check box. If you click Cancel. To configure automatic backup: 1.atl. the timer is reset to 0. If you are performing calculations. Figure 2. Note: It can take a long time to back up large documents.Atoll User Manual 2. This also improves memory management because each instance of Atoll has its own 2 GB (under 32-bit operating systems. Atoll skips the backup once. 5.63). the following are explained: • • "Configuring Automatic Backup" on page 90 "Recovering a Backup" on page 91. this operation can take a long time. When you have activated automatic backup. In this section. If you save the original document manually. i. 2. see the Administrator Manual. You can also configure Atoll to create automatic backups of external path loss matrices (LOS files) by setting an option in the atoll. Select the Prompt before starting automatic backup check box if you want Atoll to ask you before saving the back up of your file every time (see Figure 2.atl. instead of in the same Atoll session. Enter a time interval. Atoll prompts you each time before backing up the document.3. Select File > Configure Automatic Backup.1 Configuring Automatic Backup You can set up automatic backup for each Atoll session. For more information. Atoll automatically creates a backup for every document open. coverage predictions or simulations.bak" in the same folder as the original document. you should set a correspondingly larger interval between backups when working with large documents in order to optimise the process. However. 3.62: Automatic backup configuration dialogue 2. Select the Activate automatic backup check box. The Automatic Backup Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 2. in minutes. you can optimise the process by opening large documents in separate Atoll sessions. Once you have saved the document. 90 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .63: Automatic backup prompt The automatic backup timer is stopped while the prompt is displayed. Figure 2.

such as a file server over a network.bak". Open the renamed backup document in Atoll. Often these geographic data files are quite large.zip)" from the Save as type list. If the geographic data files linked to the document are located on a remote computer. your backup file will have the same file name as the original file and Windows will not allow you to rename the file. it is safer to give a new name to the backup file and keep the original file until you are sure which version is most recent. Therefore." the backup document will be in the same folder and will be called "filename. coverage predictions.atl.atl.dbf files are stored in the archive because they are needed when reopening the archive in Atoll. A ". Click OK. 5. geographic data files are stored on a common file server and are linked to the ATL documents of different users over a network. more useful to make a project portable by creating an archive that contains the ATL and all geographic data files. measurement data. In most working environments. This folder contains subfolders with the same names as the folders on the Geo tab. 2. and performance reasons. you could change the name to "filename-backup. The Browse For Folder dialogue appears. For example. Once the portable archive is created. Atoll lets you make an archive containing the ATL file and all geographic data directly from the File menu. Select the folder where the created archive is to be stored. 2. The ATL file added to the archive contains all the data that might be embedded in it (path loss matrices. they are first copied to the local computer in the Windows’ temporary files folder and then added to the archive. A "Geo" folder with all the linked geographic data available on the Geo tab of the Explorer window for the Atoll document. and data present within folders on the Geo tab are stored inside their respective folders. etc.dbf file corresponding to the extended path loss matrices. Rename the document and remove the BAK extension. 2. and select "Zip Files (*.4 Making and Sharing Portable Atoll Projects You can create portable Atoll documents in two ways: • • by embedding all the geographic data in the ATL file. Select the folder where you want to extract the contents of the ZIP file. The pathloss. The Open dialogue appears. Externally stored path loss matrices are not added to the archive because they are not necessary for making a portable document because they can be recalculated based on the network and geographic data in the ATL file. and it is not feasible to embed these files in an ATL file due to file size.2 Recovering a Backup You can easily recover your backup document and open it in Atoll just like any other Atoll document. 3. you can open it directly from Atoll without first having to extract it using another tool. You will be able to recover all the work up to the last time the backup was saved.dbf file and a LowRes subfolder which contains the pathloss. 4. If the original document was named "filename. Select the ZIP file that contains the ATL file and linked geographic data files. It is. Once Atoll has finished extracting files from the archive.atl. Select File > Save to Zip. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 91 . Geographic data extracted from the archive are linked to the ATL file. memory consumption. 3. The Save As dialogue appears. therefore. navigate to the folder containing your original Atoll document and its backup. 2. Click Open. To make an archive containing the ATL file and all linked geographic data files: 1. Select File > Open from Zip.losses" folder containing a pathloss. enter a File name for the archive to be created. or by creating a compressed archive (ZIP file) containing the ATL file and all geographic data linked to the Atoll document. Using Windows Explorer. Geographic data that are found outside folders on the Geo tab are stored in files under the Geo folder. it opens the extracted ATL file. Atoll extracts all the files from the archive to the selected folder. To recover your backup document: 1. To open an archive containing an ATL file and all linked geographic data files: 1." Important: If you just remove the BAK extension. Atoll creates a ZIP file containing: A copy of the ATL file with the same name as the name of the archive (ZIP file). it creates the subfolders required for extracting the contents of the Geo folder. geographic data. If necessary.3.).Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project 2. simulation results.

The highest compression level is used when creating the archive. installed on the computer for this feature. such as WinZip or WinRAR.Atoll User Manual Notes: • • You do not need to have a compression utility. 92 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .

Chapter 3 Managing Geographic Data .

Atoll User Manual 94 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .

either by transferring them to the Data tab. deciding the priority of data files with different information or different resolutions. You can export most geo data objects (for example. and Points" on page 106 "Scanned Images" on page 107 "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 108 "Setting the Priority of Geo Data" on page 109 "Editing Geographic Data" on page 113 "Saving Geographic Data" on page 116. or regions.1 Geographic Data Types An Atoll document can contain several different geographic data types. lines. 3. DTM. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 95 . clutter classes. clutter heights. recompact the file. Atoll supports a wide range of file formats for geographic data files. create new geographic data. Atoll also allows you to save changes you make to geo data objects back to the original files. such as clutter classes. are used to create a more realistic display of the region under study. discrete values. You can also create your own data type by importing a file and defining what data is to be used. Other types such as scanned images. for example. Geographic data used for display purposes: In this section. or points. Clutter Classes The clutter class geo data file describes land cover or land use. choosing a folder is choosing what the file will be used for. through the process of saving them. For example: the Digital Terrain Model (DTM).Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data 3 Managing Geographic Data Several different geographic data types are used in an Atoll document. raster polygons. you can decide in which folder it goes. you can edit the data. You can display the DTM in different ways: by single value. You can also display geo data over items on the Data tab. and points representing. The different geographic data types play different roles in the Atoll document: • Geographic data used in propagation calculation: • Digital terrain model Clutter classes Clutter heights Scanned maps Images from web map services (WMS) Contours. and traffic data maps are types of the geographic data that you can import or create. The Geo tab of the Atoll Explorer window has folders for the commonly used data types. You can also create raster-based geographic data such as traffic maps or clutter classes. This chapter explains the following topics: • • • • • • • • • • • • "Geographic Data Types" on page 95 "Supported Geographic Data Formats" on page 96 "Importing Geo Data Files" on page 96 "Clutter Classes" on page 103 "Clutter Heights" on page 106 "Digital Terrain Models" on page 103 "Contours. scanned images. define how the geo data will be displayed. and Points" on page 96 "Scanned Images" on page 96 "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 96 Digital Terrain Model The DTM describes the elevation of the ground over sea level. You can add a vector layer to certain data types to which you can add contours. Therefore. or vector layers) for use in other Atoll documents or in other applications. Some data types. Lines. You can import a wide variety of both vector and raster-format geo data files. the following data types are described: • • • • • • "Digital Terrain Model" on page 95 "Clutter Classes" on page 95 "Clutter Heights" on page 96 "Contours. or by value intervals (see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21). clutter heights. railways. Lines. lines. Clutter classes are taken into account by the propagation model during computations. or modify existing data. Atoll also allows you to manage multiple files for a single data type. clutter classes. This enables you to update the original files and. The DTM is automatically taken into account by the propagation model during computations. can be used to give more realistic calculations. or by importing them directly to the Data tab. roads. Once you have imported a file into the Atoll document. You can also create and edit geographic data. When you import a geo data file into Atoll.

in a clutter height file. JPEG 2000 (8 to 16-bit). or by value intervals (see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21). Clutter height maps can offer more precise information than defining an altitude per clutter class because. Caution: All raster maps imported must have the same projection coordinate system. DXF. discrete values. GRD/GRC Vertical Mapper (8 or 16-bit). lines. the height will be defined as an average height for each clutter class. BIL (8 or 16-bit). Planet. A clutter height map can represent height much more accurately because it allows a different height to be assigned for each pixel of the map. IST (8-bit).2 Supported Geographic Data Formats Atoll supports the following geographic data formats: • • • • • • DTM files in the following formats: TIF (8 or 16-bit). Planet. GRC Vertical Mapper (8 or 16-bit). SHP. and Erdas Imagine (8 or 16-bit) Clutter class and traffic files in the following formats: TIF (8-bit). MIF. BIL (16-bit). and TAB. and TAB. or in other words to a certain type of ground use or cover. JPEG 2000 (8 to 16-bit). DFX. BMP (8-bit).. DXF. clutter altitude is taken from the clutter height map. Vector traffic files in the following formats: AGD. Contours can also be used to create filtering polygons or computation or focus zones. DFX. Planet. JPEG 2000 (8-bit). for example. Scanned Images Scanned images are geographic data files which represent the actual physical surroundings. You can display the clutter height map in different ways: by single value. BIL (8 or 16-bit). 3. and points to represent polygons such as regions. Geoclimatic files in the following formats: AGD. MIF. it is possible to have different heights within a single clutter class. Erdas Imagine (1 to 24-bit). Geoclimatic maps are used in microwave link documents to calculate radio wave attenuation. Atoll recognises the file format and suggests the appropriate folder on the Geo tab of the Explorer window. however. and Erdas Imagine (8-bit) Vector data files in the following formats: AGD. they have no effect on calculations. BMP (16-bit). • • 3. GRD/GRC Vertical Mapper (16-bit).Atoll User Manual Each pixel in a clutter class file contains a code (from a maximum of 256 possible classes) which corresponds to a clutter class. SHP. Planet. IST (16-bit). AGD. Scanned image files in the following formats: TIF (1 to 24-bit). Planet. SHP. BIL (1 to 24-bit). and TAB. or lines such as roads or coastlines. You can 96 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Traffic Data Maps Traffic data maps contain information on capacity and service use per geographic area. IST (8 or 16-bit). BMP (8-bit). GRC Vertical Mapper (1 to 24-bit). JPEG 2000 (1 to 24-bit). Clutter heights can also be defined by a separate clutter heights file (see "Clutter Heights" on page 96). or points. GRC Vertical Mapper (8-bit). BMP (8-bit). Traffic data maps are used for network capacity analyses. and ECW (8 or 24-bit) JPEG 2000 (16-bit). IST (8 or 16-bit). The height per class can be defined as part of the clutter class. Contours. BMP (1 to 24-bit). JPEG 2000 (16-bit). SHP. Planet. MIF.3 Importing Geo Data Files You can import the geographic data you need into the current Atoll document. and TAB. see "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 104. When you import a new geo data file. and Erdas Imagine (8 or 16-bit) Clutter height files in the following formats: TIF (8 or 16-bit). vapour density. Lines. For information on defining the height per clutter class. When clutter altitude is defined both in clutter classes and in a clutter height map. They are used to provide a precise background for other objects or for less precise maps and are used only for display. Planet. As explained in "Supported Geographic Data Formats" on page 96. road maps or satellite images. Note: The only propagation models that can take clutter heights into account in calculations are the Standard Propagation Model and WLL model. and Points Atoll supports contours. BIL (8-bit). Geoclimatic Maps Geoclimatic maps are vector files containing information on climatic conditions such as rain density. and refractivity. Other data in the following formats: TIF (16-bit). MIF. temperature. Atoll supports a variety of both raster and vector file formats. They are used for display only and have no effect on computations. IST (1 to 24-bit). Clutter Heights Clutter height maps describe the altitude of clutter over the DTM with one altitude defined per pixel. Erdas Imagine (16-bit).

When you import a traffic data map.64). Tip: You can use the drag-and-drop feature to import geo data files into a document. Click Open. the traffic map’s Properties dialogue appears: a. Depending on the type of geo data file you are importing. enter the percentage of each mobility type used in the map. For information on exporting the paths of your document’s files or to import the path from another document using user configuration files. To embed the data file in the Atoll document. For UMTS and CDMA. select whether the users are active in the Uplink/Downlink. You can select contiguous files by clicking the first file. b. or only in the Uplink. 2. e. select the Embed in Document check box. f. The format is automatically recognized and Atoll presents you with the appropriate dialogue. enter the percentage of each type of terminal used in the map. Under Clutter Distribution. c. enter the percentage of each service type used in the map. Note: If the Vector Import dialogue appears. Click Import. The total percentages must equal 100. Click OK. choose one of the following options: DTM: Select Altitudes (DTM) from the Data Type list. Clutter Heights: Select Clutter Heights from the Data Type list. 3. enter for each clutter class the percentage of indoor users. Scanned Images: Select Image or Scan from the Data Type list. the imported file is linked to the Atoll document. You can select non-contiguous files by pressing CTRL and clicking each file. Under Services (%). go to "Importing a Vector-format Geo Data File" on page 98. For information on embedding files. Clutter Classes: Select Clutter Classes from the Data Type list. You can share the paths of imported maps and display settings with other users by using Atoll’s user configuration files. The geo data file is imported and listed in the Geo tab of the Explorer window. Select the geo data file you want to import. 4. By default. providing that the geo data files are of the same type. An additional loss will be counted for indoor users during the Monte-Carlo simulations. only in the Downlink. pressing SHIFT and clicking the last file you want to import. 5. The File Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3. d. You do not have to define a clutter weighting for traffic density maps because the traffic is provided in terms of user density per pixel. You can import more than one geo data file at the same time. see "Geographic Data Sets" on page 112. The total percentages must equal 100. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 97 . Under Mobilities (%).1 Importing a Raster-format Geo Data File All raster geo data files must be represented in the same projection coordinate system as the Atoll document itself.3. 3. see "Embedding Geographic Data" on page 102.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data embed geo data files in the Atoll document while you are importing them or afterwards (see "Embedding Geographic Data" on page 102). Select File > Import. This section explains the following: • • • • • • "Importing a Raster-format Geo Data File" on page 97 "Importing a Vector-format Geo Data File" on page 98 "Importing MSI Planet® Geo Data" on page 99 "Importing a WMS Raster-format Geo Data File" on page 101 "Grouping Geo Data Files in Folders" on page 102 "Embedding Geographic Data" on page 102. The total percentages must equal 100. Under Terminals (%). The Open dialogue appears. To import a geographic data file in a raster format: 1.

Under Fields to be imported. Select the geo data file you want to import. their geographic system can be converted to the system used by the Atoll document. Select from the first list which field is to be imported and from the second list whether the imported field is a Density (number of inhabitants per square kilometre for polygons. Select Population from the Import to list. Figure 3.2 Importing a Vector-format Geo Data File When you import geo data files in vector format.64: Importing a clutter class file 3. Click Open. and the second list lets you select whether the attribute corresponds to population density or to a number of inhabitants.66). pressing SHIFT and clicking the last file you want to import. choose one of the following options: Vector Data: i. Depending on the type of geo data file you are importing. 2. Select File > Import. You can import more than one geo data file at the same time. providing that the geo data files are of the same type.Atoll User Manual Figure 3. Select Geo from the Import to list. the first list contains the attributes of the population vector data file that you are importing. You can select non-contiguous files by pressing CTRL and clicking each file. 3.65: Population density (number of inhabitants/km²) Figure 3.65 and Figure 3. or number of inhabitants per kilometre for lines) or a Value (number of inhabitants) (see Figure 3. go to "Importing a Raster-format Geo Data File" on page 97. iii. Population: ii. Note: If the File Import dialogue appears. The Open dialogue appears.67).66: Population values (number of inhabitants per item – polygon/road/point) 98 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . To import a vector-format geographic data file: 1.3. The Vector Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3. You can select contiguous files by clicking the first file.

or you can import several MSI Planet® geo data files at the same time.3. you can import each type of geo data separately.68). by importing the corresponding index file. Select File > Import. Figure 3. The Data Type dialogue appears (see Figure 3.3. select the Embed in Document check box. when you import a vector file. The geo data file is imported and listed in the Geo tab of the Explorer window. For information on embedding files. 3. The Open dialogue appears. Select Geoclimatic Parameters from the Import to list. ii. For more information about defining the mapping between coordinate systems. Select the index file you want to import and click Open. 5. Atoll can detect the correct coordinate system automatically. see "Embedding Geographic Data" on page 102.1 Importing One MSI Planet® Geo Data Type When you want to import a certain type of MSI Planet® geo data. By default. select from the first list which field is to be imported and select Value from the second list. When you import MSI Planet® geo data. defined in the corresponding MIF/PRJ files. Click Import. 2.67: Vector Import dialogue Notes: • • You can import ellipses and arcs from MapInfo files (MIF and TAB). To import one type of MSI Planet® geo data: 1. Rectangles are interpreted as polygons. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 99 . such as a DTM or clutter heights. please refer to the Administrator Manual. and Atoll.3 Importing MSI Planet® Geo Data MSI Planet® geo data are contained in a series of files described in index files. To embed the data file in the Atoll document. the imported file is linked to the Atoll document.3. you import the index file containing the information necessary to import the set of files containing the geo data. This section explains the following: • • "Importing One MSI Planet® Geo Data Type" on page 99 "Importing a MSI Planet® Geo Database" on page 100. 3. This way. You can define mappings between the coordinate system used for the MapInfo/ESRI vector files. The index file is in ASCII text format and contains the information necessary to identify and properly interpret each geo data file.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data Geoclimatic File: i. Under Fields to be imported. 4. by importing several index files.

d. Select the MSI Planet® index file and click Open. 4. Figure 3. Select the type of geo data you are importing and select the Embed check box if you want to embed the data in the current Atoll document. The Open dialogue appears. 100 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . The Open dialogue appears.68: Importing an MSI Planet® index file 3. Click OK to import the geo data into the current Atoll document. For each type of data that you want to import: a.3. Select File > Import. select the Embed check box.69: Importing an MSI Planet® database 3. click OK. If you want to embed the data. To locate the MSI Planet® index file. Select the corresponding check box b. 2. The Planet Data to Be Imported dialogue appears (see Figure 3. The data is imported into the current Atoll document. Select "Planet® database" from the Files of Type list.2 Importing a MSI Planet® Geo Database You can import all available MSI Planet® geo data at the same time by importing all index files. c. The path and name of the file appears in the corresponding field of the Planet Data to Be Imported dialogue.Atoll User Manual Figure 3. 4. When you have selected all the types of data you want to import. 3.69). click . To import the MSI Planet® geo database: 1.3.

The Web Map Import dialogue appears.e. you can modify this name.ini file. such as roads.3. The files you want to import appear in the right pane of the Web Map Services Data Import dialogue. If desired. Arrange the order in which you want the images to appear by selecting each image in the right pane and clicking to move it towards the top or to move it toward the bottom. 3. i. 2. Click Import. The image will be referenced in the document. Geographic Coordinates: The geographic coordinates are the WMS data are given. The following information is given about the imported WMS data: Data Types: "Image or Scan" is selected. All raster geo data files must be represented in the same projection coordinate system as that used by the Atoll document itself. In the left pane of the Web Map Services Data Import dialogue. Click the Connect button. you must ensure that the coordinate system used in your document is the same projection system supported by the server. Select the URL of the WMS server from the Server URL list or enter it directly. 10.4 Importing a WMS Raster-format Geo Data File You can import raster images from a Web Map Service (WMS) server into your Atoll document. For information on defining these entries. Click for each image you want to import. select Connection to a Web Map Services server. see the Administrator Manual. Before importing an image from a WMS server. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 101 . Figure 3. The image is imported by reference into the Atoll document.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data 3. The Name suggested is the name of the lowest layer to be imported. Select File > Import. you can place the least transparent image towards the bottom so that the other images imported at the same time remain visible. 6. it can not be embedded. a group preceded by an Expand button ( ).. Before you import them. Select either the image you want to import. All images imported at the same time are imported as a single image. 11. The Open dialogue appears. To import a geographic data file from a web map service: 1. the Lambert Conformal-Conic or the Universal Transverse Mercator projection) can be imported. 9. The Web Map Services Data Import dialogue appears. or the image group. Only WMS data mapped with a projection system (for example. 7. The image must be in TIF format.70: The Web Map Services Data Import dialogue 5. From the Files of Type list. Or. 8. You can not embed a WMS image in your document.70 on page 101). Atoll connects to the URL of the WMS server and displays the information available along with a description of the service (Figure 3. navigate to the item you want to import by clicking the Expand button ( ) to open each level. you can arrange them by placing on top the image that is the most important. Note: The list of WMS servers that appears in the Server URL list are defined by entries in the atoll. The images will be imported as a single object and their appearance will depend on the order you define here. 4. Note: You can remove an image or group of images from the images to be imported by selecting it in the right pane and clicking .

either raster or vector. Right-click the file you want to embed in the current document. Enter a name for the folder in Folder Name box and click OK. 4. You can not modify this object.67). 102 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . such as clutter classes. they appear directly on the Geo tab. however. When you import the next geo data file. Click Embed. Click OK. when you import a geo data file. you must link your geo data files. They retain. Your file is imported into the newly created folder. the geo data file remains separate and modifying or saving the Atoll document has no effect on the geo data file. 3. however. Atoll creates a link to the file. You can. 5. Once grouped. the display settings cannot be managed at the folder level. however. the geo data file remains separate and modifying or saving the Atoll document has no effect on the geo data file. are listed together in a single Clutter Classes folder. the Vector Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3. Note: If you want to import your file to the Data tab. 5. You create the folder when you import the first geo data file that will be imported into it. you can import it directly into the new folder. or vice versa. 3.64). Both linking and embedding present advantages and disadvantages. Select File > Import. 2. Important: If you are using distributed calculations. see the Administrator Manual. Note: You can transfer geo data that has been imported from the Geo tab to the Data tab. Select the geo data file and click Open. Atoll cannot find the file and displays the error message shown in Figure 3. it is saved as part of the document. 6. If the file to be imported is a vector file. either when you import it or later. you can select New folder in Data. these geo data files can be displayed or hidden and moved more easily. group scanned images and contours. You can. and points.71. however. Right-click the data in the Explorer window and select Transfer to Data or Transfer to Geo. see the Administrator Manual. The geo data file is now embedded in the current Atoll document. 3.Atoll User Manual If you had selected more than one image or an image group. Click Import.3. When the geo data file is embedded in the Atoll document. The next time you open an Atoll document with the linked geo data file. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Atoll imports the group as a single object. 3. the geo data file is moved. For information. select New folder in Geo. Distributed calculations can not work with embedded geo data files.7 Repairing a Broken Link to a Geo Data File By default. and points into folders as well. when you import a geo data file. their own individual display settings. the File Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3. 4. lines. Atoll creates a link to the file. From the Data Type list (on the File Import dialogue) or the Import To list (on the Vector Import dialogue). To embed a geo data file in the current Atoll document while you are importing: • Select the Embed in Document check box on the File Import or Vector Import dialogue box. To create a new geo data folder when importing: 1. lines. Select Properties from the context menu. To embed a geo data file that is already linked to the current Atoll document: 1. Other data files.3. 2. If you want to remove one of the images or add another one you will go through the import process again. Click the General tab of the Properties dialogue. You can now import other geo data files into this folder by selecting it from the Data Type list (on the File Import dialogue) or the Import To list (on the Vector Import dialogue) when you import. The New Folder dialogue appears. the link will be broken. 3.6 Embedding Geographic Data By default. When Atoll is linked to a geo data file. If the file to be imported is a raster file. choose to embed the geo data file in your Atoll document. when you import scanned images and contours.3. The Open dialogue appears. For more information. If.5 Grouping Geo Data Files in Folders By default.

For information on Display tab settings. 5. If the geo data file is in a folder. based on size. Each pixel of a clutter class file contains a code (from a maximum of 256 possible classes) which corresponds to a clutter class. select it and click OK. 5. if you want to display very few little relief or towards x6 if you want to emphasise the differences in altitude. 3. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 103 .5 Clutter Classes The clutter class geo data file describes land cover or land use. 6. Traffic. and type. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. To manage the properties of the DTM: 1. date. or DTM folder. 3. Right-click on the geo data file whose link you want to repair. For information on clutter height maps. A clutter height map can represent height much more accurately because it allows a different height to be assigned for each bin of the map. Move the Relief slider towards Flat. The Properties dialogue appears. The height per class can be defined as part of the clutter class. it informs you with a message (see Figure 3. or in other words to a certain type of ground use or cover. click folder. Atoll automatically searches for the missing file as well.71: Missing shortcut To find the file yourself: • When the Missing Shortcut dialogue (see Figure 3. Select Properties from the context menu. On the General tab of the Properties dialogue. to expand the 2. Right-click the Digital Terrain Model folder. Browse to the geo data file. however this height is only an average per class. It searches for the nearest match. The context menu appears. see "Clutter Heights" on page 106. Click the Display tab to define the display properties for the DTM. When it finds a possible match. Click OK to close the Properties dialogue. To repair a broken link from within the Atoll document: 1. The link will be corrected to point to the indicated file.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data Figure 3.72).71) appears. 4. click the Browse button to locate the geo data file. 4.72: Problem with shortcut You can also repair the link to the geo data file from within the Atoll document. Figure 3.4 Digital Terrain Models The Digital Terrain Model (DTM) is a geographic data file representing the elevation of the ground over sea level. 3. click the Find button. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 2. If the file corresponds to the source file: • Click Yes. Select Properties from the context menu. such as the Clutter Classes. see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. 3.

The MNU file contains a list with the clutter class codes and their corresponding names. CDMA2000 1xRTT 1xEV-DO. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. The values entered on the Default Values tab are used if no clutter map is available. For more information on the MNU file format and on creating an MNU file. Enter a Name and average Height (m) for each code. When you import a clutter class file in BIL. For information about each field. Atoll can automatically assign names to clutter classes if the clutter class file has a corresponding MNU file. 3. Enter default values for each field.Atoll User Manual This section explains the following: • • • • • "Assigning Names to Clutter Classes" on page 104 "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 104 "Adding a Clutter Class" on page 105 "Refreshing the List of Clutter Classes" on page 105 "Displaying Total Surface Area per Clutter Class" on page 105. 3.5. Even if there is a clutter classes map. you can select the Use default values only check box on the Default Values tab to make Atoll use the values specified in this tab instead of the values defined per clutter class. JPEG 2000. Select Properties from the context menu. If desired. To make it easier to work with clutter classes. You can define an additional indoor loss per frequency band used in the Frequency bands table in GSM GPRS EGPRS. you can display or hide clutter class display types individually. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. When a clutter class has a descriptive name. Indoor Loss (dB): to be applied to the path loss and used in coverage predictions. These parameters can be set on the Properties dialogue: To define clutter class properties: 1. By selecting or clearing the visibility check box. 3. and Monte Carlo simulations. point analysis. as related to a userdefined cell edge coverage probability. UMTS HSPA. 3. you can enter a value for each of the following fields applicable to the current document: For all Atoll documents: Model Standard Deviation (dB): to calculate shadowing losses on the path loss. you can assign a descriptive name to each clutter class name. it is the name that appears in tool tips and reports. contact support. 8.1 Assigning Names to Clutter Classes The clutter class file identifies each clutter class with a code. 5. and TD-SCDMA documents. In the Name column. 104 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . TIF. 4. Click the Description tab of the Properties dialogue. 2. Important: If the Height field is left blank. or IMP format. 5. Select Properties from the context menu. each clutter class display type has a visibility check box. This is an optional feature that must first be activated. see the Technical Reference Guide. 6. To assign names to clutter classes: 1.2 Defining Clutter Class Properties The parameters are applied in relation to the location of the receiver being studied and the clutter class of the receiver location. TD-SCDMA Note: - 7. see the descriptions in the previous step.5. For more information. In addition to the Display tab options described in "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. Indoor penetration losses depend on the clutter types as well as the operating frequency. propagation models which use the height information of clutter classes will assume a clutter height of "0" if there is no clutter height map. Click the Display tab to define the display properties for clutter classes. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 4. 2. enter descriptive text for each class identified in the Code column. Click the Default Values tab. Click the Description tab of the Properties dialogue.

select the entire table by clicking the cell in the upper-left corner of the table and press CTRL+C. To add a new clutter class to the your document: 1. of "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 104.5. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Click OK. For example. To refresh the list of the clutter classes: 1.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data Note: Selecting white as the colour for a clutter class value or value interval will cause that clutter class value or value interval to be displayed as transparent. Click OK. you can refresh the list. if one exists.5. This information is also available in prediction reports. 4. see "Creating a Clutter Polygon" on page 114. it can happen that the list of clutter classes on the Description tab of the clutter classes Properties dialogue contains unused clutter classes. Atoll displays the surface area covered by each clutter class in the focus zone if there is one. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window.3 Adding a Clutter Class You can add a new clutter class to your document. if you have imported two clutter class files and then deleted one of them. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. 3. in the computation zone if there is no focus zone and. 7. 2. For information on modifying the clutter class map. even if they are not used in the remaining file. 100 Sk  k © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 105 . enter an unused number from 1 to 255 in the Code 6. Fill in the remainder of the fields as described in step 5.5 Displaying Total Surface Area per Clutter Class You can display the total surface area covered by each clutter class in the document. Si % of I = ------------. Atoll displays the total surface area covered by each clutter class in the entire document. 5. the list of clutter classes will still contain the clutter classes of the deleted file. The Statistics dialogue appears.4 Refreshing the List of Clutter Classes Under certain circumstances. 3. 2. Whenever you want to ensure that the list of clutter classes is accurate and current. Tip: You can copy the description table into a new Atoll document after importing the clutter classes file. Atoll removes the unused clutter classes from the list. Select Properties from the context menu. Click OK. press CTRL+V to paste the values in the table. To copy the description table. Click Refresh. at the bottom of the table. if there is no focus or computation zone. In the blank row marked with column. Select the Description tab from the Properties dialogue.5. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. On the Description tab of the clutter classes Properties dialogue in the new Atoll document. Select Properties from the context menu. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. Select the Description tab from the Properties dialogue. 3. 3. displaying the surface area (Si in km²) of each clutter class (i) and its percentage (% of i) in the computation zone or focus zone. 4. 5. Select Statistics from the context menu. 9. To display the surface area covered by each clutter class: 1. 2. 6. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. 3. and step 6. 3. You can now use the new clutter class when modifying the clutter class map.

The Properties dialogue appears. The Properties dialogue appears. 3. for example.7 Contours. Vector Layer Table All the vector objects of a vector layer and their attributes are listed in the vector table. Atoll uses the average clutter height per clutter class as defined in the clutter classes properties (see "Defining Clutter Class Properties" on page 104). 2. 4. Right-click the Clutter Heights folder. but polygons can be used as filters. In addition. and points. 106 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 3. For information on using the display tab. right-click the vector layer folder.2 Managing the Properties of the Vector Layer The properties of the objects on the vector layer can be managed in two ways: either from a table containing all vectors and their attributes or from the Properties dialogue. Atoll can read three-dimensional vector data. The context menu appears. Select Properties from the context menu. 3.1 Managing the Display of a Vector Layer Imported geographic vector files can have different attributes depending on their file formats. 3. Click the Data or Geo tab in the Explorer window on which the vector layer is located. To open the vector layer table: 1. see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. or computation or focus zones.6 Clutter Heights Clutter height maps describe the altitude of clutter over the DTM. roads. Atoll adds the file as a new vector layer containing all the vector objects in the file. vector objects such as contours. for display (in tool tips and in the status line). The clutter height of the current pointer position as given in the clutter height file or in the clutter classes is displayed in the status bar. and points are arranged in vector layers. and for CW measurements and test mobile data paths. Lines. If no clutter height file exists. you can import or create vector objects such as contours.Atoll User Manual 3. the height is given as an average per clutter class.7. When a clutter height file is available. On the Explorer window tab containing the vector layer. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Click the Display tab to define the display properties for clutter heights. 5. In a clutter height file. For information on working with data tables. To manage the properties of clutter heights: 1. The vector table appears. Click OK to close the Properties dialogue. If you define clutter height as a property of clutter classes. lines. The context menu appears. In this section. 2. the following are explained: • • • "Managing the Display of a Vector Layer" on page 106 "Managing the Properties of the Vector Layer" on page 106 "Moving a Vector Layer to the Data Tab" on page 107. Atoll can use additional information related to vectors as display parameters. Note: You can manage the display of an individual vector object by right-clicking the vector object in the vector layer folder and selecting Properties from the context menu. Select Open Table from the context menu. 2. a height is given for each point on the map. The vector object data can be managed in the vector layer table. The imported or created vectors are used primarily for display purposes. Right-click the vector layer. 4. see "Working with Data Tables" on page 41. When you import a vector file. Select Properties from the context menu. 3.7. Select the Display tab of the Properties dialogue. and Points In Atoll. To manage the display of a vector layer: 1. lines. Atoll uses its clutter height information for calculations using certain propagation models (the Standard Propagation Model and WLL model). For information on Display tab settings. In an Atoll document. Clutter height files allow for a higher degree of accuracy because they allow more than one height per clutter class. with.

or you can import a group of images by importing an index file listing the individual image files. Embed: Click the Embed button to embed a linked vector layer file in the Atoll document.3 Moving a Vector Layer to the Data Tab In Atoll. For information on filtering. road maps or satellite images. The context menu appears. see "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 63. Vector Layer Properties Dialogue The vector layer Properties dialogue has three tabs: a General tab. Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 107 . You can transfer the vector layer back to the Geo tab by right-clicking it in the Data tab and selecting Transfer to the Geo tab from the context menu. right-click the vector layer folder. with its path relative to the current location of the index file. see "Working with Data Tables" on page 41. a Table tab. Click the Table tab.7. Click the Display tab. 2. 3. antennas. - 4. to ensure that certain geo data. Right-click the vector layer you want to transfer.They have no effect on calculations. Sort: Click the Sort button to sort the data contained in the vector layer. 3.8 Scanned Images Scanned images are geographic data files which represent the actual physical surroundings. On the Explorer window tab containing the vector layer. You can rename the vector layer using this field. You can use the Table tab to manage the vector layer table content. Filter: Click the Filter button to filter the data contained in the vector layer. Click the General tab. Coordinate System: When a vector layer is linked. as specified when the file was imported.8. see "Adding. You can do this by transferring the geo data from the Geo tab to the Data tab and placing it above data such as predictions. etc. In this section. For more information on editing tables in Atoll. and Records menus.. all objects on the Data tab. 2. They are used to provide a precise background for other objects or for less precise maps. Deleting. see "Advanced Sorting" on page 61. major geographical features. The context menu appears. For information on sorting. see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. calculated as XMIN + (number of horizontal bins x bin width). as explained in "Importing Geo Data Files" on page 96. For information on the Table tab.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data You can edit the contents of this table using the commands from the context menu or from the Edit. To open the Properties dialogue of a vector layer: 1. You may wish. and predictions. For more information about display priority in Atoll. The following options are available: Name: The name of the vector layer. Select Properties from the context menu. for example. Format. and Editing Data Table Fields" on page 42. however. with the information separated by a space: • • • • File name: The name of the file. Change: Click the Change button to change the coordinate system of the vector layer. the coordinate system used is the file’s. 3. To transfer a vector layer to the Data tab of the Explorer window: 1. Select Transfer to Data tab from the context menu. When the a vector layer is embedded. the following are explained: • • "Importing Several Scanned Images" on page 107 "Defining the Display Properties of Scanned Images" on page 108. as specified when the file was embedded. are displayed over all objects on the Geo tab. remain visible in the map window. You can use the Display tab to manage the vector layer display. The vector layer is transferred to the Data tab. XMAX: The end X coordinate. 3. roads. Source File: The complete path of the vector layer file if the file is linked to the Atoll document. the coordinate system used is document’s. YMIN: The beginning Y coordinate of the file. see "Setting the Priority of Geo Data" on page 109. 5. Each line contains the following information. XMIN: The beginning X coordinate of the file.1 Importing Several Scanned Images You can import scanned images into the current Atoll document one at a time. For information on the Table tab. such as transmitters. The index file is a text file with the information for each image file on a separate line. Find: Click the Find button to redefine the path when the file’s location has changed. for example. and a Display tab. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. otherwise the file is described as embedded. 3.

Contrast: Move the slider to adjust the contrast. Right-click the scanned image. 4. nice1. 3. 0: The zero character ends the sequence. When the displayed or printed scale is outside this range. Figure 3. they have fewer display parameters than other object types.2 Defining the Display Properties of Scanned Images Because imported images cannot be modified. 4. Visibility Scale: Enter a visibility scale minimum in the between 1: text box and maximum in the and 1: text box. 108 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Click Import. Click OK. 2. Select Image or Scan from the Data Type list.9 Geoclimatic Maps Geoclimatic maps are vector files containing information on climatic conditions such as rain density.64). or Watermark from the list.8. 5. Transparent Colour: Select White from the list if you wish parts of the scanned image that are coloured white to be transparent. Select the index file and click Open.Atoll User Manual • • YMAX: The end Y coordinate. To define the display properties of a scanned image: 1.73). XMIN XMAX YMIN YMAX 0 3. The image files imported and listed in the Geo tab of the Explorer window. the following are explained: • • "Managing Geoclimatic Map Properties" on page 109 "Displaying Geoclimatic Statistics" on page 109.tif 984660 995380 1860900 1872280 0 nice2. The Properties dialogue appears (see Figure 3. Select the Display tab and set the following options: Colour: Select either Automatic. Shades of gray. In this section. the scanned image is not displayed.73: Scanned image Properties dialogue 3.tif 996240 1004900 1860980 1870700 0 File name To import an index 1. Geoclimatic maps are used in microwave link documents to calculate radio wave attenuation. Select Properties from the context menu. vapour density. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window 2. allowing objects in lower layers to be visible. and refractivity. Select File > Import. The File Import dialogue appears (see Figure 3. Lightness: Move the slider to lighten or darken the scanned image. temperature. 3. The context menu appears. calculated as YMIN + (number of horizontal bins x bin width).

For more information. Atoll displays the statistics for the entire document. Click the Table tab. there are as many layers as imported objects. The layers are arranged from top to bottom in the map window as they appear on the Geo tab of the Explorer window. antennas. The following tabs are available: Data Mapping: The Data Mapping tab enables you to select which value from each imported vector file is part of the geoclimatic map. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. You can select the parameter it corresponds to from the Parameters column. If the check box. - 5. 3.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data 3.9. Each object is placed on a separate layer.2 Displaying Geoclimatic Statistics You can display the relative and absolute distribution of each value interval according to the defined value intervals in the display properties (for information on defining value intervals. Thus. 3.1 Managing Geoclimatic Map Properties To manage the properties of a geoclimatic map: 1. For information on using the display tab. If the check box is selected ( ). • © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 109 . Select Properties from the context menu. 6. 2. and Editing Data Table Fields" on page 42. The imported vector files are listed in the Name column. Note: Statistics are displayed only for visible data. To display the statistics of the geoclimatic data: 1. and predictions. The Statistics window appears with the distributions of each value interval. Right-click any geoclimatic file in the Geoclimatic Parameters folder. 3. are displayed over all objects on the Geo tab. is selected but shaded ( ). Atoll displays the statistics for the focus zone if there is one. the object is displayed. such as transmitters. It is important to remember that all objects on the Data tab. Deleting. for the computation zone if there is no focus zone and.10 Setting the Priority of Geo Data Atoll lists the imported DTM. see "Defining the Display Type" on page 22) of a geoclimatic map. Select Properties from the context menu. The order of the layers: The layer at the top of the Geo tab is on top of all other layers in the map window. 2. Right-click the Geoclimatic Parameters folder.1 Setting the Display Priority of Geo Data There are several factors that influence the visibility of geo data: • The display check box: The check box immediately to the left of the object name in the Geo tab controls whether or not the object is displayed on the map. not all objects in the folder are displayed.9. Click to expand the Geoclimatic Parameters folder. Select Statistics from the context menu. Data on layers below is only visible where there is no data on the top layer or if you adjust the transparency of the objects on the top layer. Right-click the Geoclimatic Parameters folder on the Geo tab of the Explorer window. The Table tab enables you to manage the contents of the class table. see "Adding.10. Value interval is the only available display type. 7. For information on working with the Table tab. if there is no focus or computation zone. You can use drag and drop to change the order of layers by dragging a layer on the Geo tab of the Explorer window towards the top or the bottom of the tab. see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. 4. 3. clutter class or traffic objects in their respective folders and creates a separate folder for each imported vector data file and scanned image. the object is not displayed. Display: The Display tab enables you to define how the geoclimatic map appears in the map window. if the check box is cleared ( ). See "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 16. 3. with the relevant data selected in the Field column. see "Displaying or Hiding Objects on the Map Using the Explorer" on page 16.

In this case. to allow objects on lower layers to be visible on the map.10. Even if the display check box of an object is cleared ( ).) are visible both inside and outside the computation zone. DTM and scanned image have been imported and a UMTS environment traffic map has been edited inside the computation zone. and predictions. where the density of users is higher. In other words. 110 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . by placing the clutter class file for the downtown core over the file with the lower resolution. the DTM. for example. For more information. are displayed over all objects on the Geo tab. as displayed on the zoom toolbar. MAJORSTREETS.. vector data (including the linear vectors HIGHWAYS. clutter classes. • • The transparency of objects: You can change the transparency of some objects. roads. see "Defining the Transparency of Objects and Object Types" on page 23. clutter heights. MAJORROADS. you can ensure that certain vector geo data. DTM. COASTLINE. These are normally the objects which cover the least area but have the highest resolution.2 Setting the Priority of Geo Data in Calculations The priority of geo data in calculations is determined in much the same way as it is for display. major geographical features. what is used is what is seen. see "Moving a Vector Layer to the Data Tab" on page 107.) is the data from the top down. remain visible in the map window For more information.74. the data taken into account in each folder (Clutter Classes. etc. RIVERLAKE. For more information. and for custom geo data maps. The visibility range of objects: You can define a visibility range for object types. can be transferred to the Data tab. Atoll takes the object on top and objects below only where there is no data in higher levels. In this way. the DTM layer which is beneath the clutter class layer and the scanned map which is beneath the DTM layer. it will still be taken into consideration for calculations. such as predictions. so that the object is not displayed on the map.74: Displaying Geo data layers 3. antennas. Atoll can base its calculations for the downtown core on the clutter class file with the higher resolution. In Figure 3. For example. On the other hand. the linear objects (ROADS. is within this range. when calculating coverage in an urban area.Atoll User Manual Note: All objects on the Data tab. where they can be placed over data such as predictions. RIVERLAKE. both of which can be used in prediction reports follow the same rules of calculation priority. Therefore for each folder. such as transmitters. using the second file for all other calculations. Object folders. An object is visible only in the map window if the scale. and one with a lower resolution but covering the entire area. These objects can represent different areas of the map or the same parts of the map with the same or different resolutions. however. etc. can contain more than one data object. clutter classes. are not visible. you should place the objects with the best data at the top. The clutter class layer is visible in the area where there is no traffic data (outside the computation zone). Note: The visibility in the context of calculations must not be confused with the display check box ( ). you might have two clutter class files: one with a higher resolution for the downtown core. The only cases where clearing the display check box means that the data will not be used are for population data in reports. Figure 3. When you make calculations in Atoll. and some object types. etc. and traffic density folders. Vector geo data. RAILWAYS and AIRPORT). such as clutter classes. see "Defining the Visibility Scale" on page 23. Population maps and custom geo data maps. for example. In the map window.

10. Atoll will therefore use the data in "Clutter 2" where it is available. Atoll will use both the clutter and DTM data in calculations. there are two imported clutter classes maps: • • "Clutter 1" represents a large area with a resolution of 50 m. the DTM map is on top of the clutter class map.10. there are two imported maps: • • A clutter class map called “Clutter.2.2 Example 2: Clutter Classes and DTM Maps Representing the Same Area In this example.76: Multi-layer management in calculations – Clutter and DTM maps representing the same area 3.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data The following sections give several examples to better illustrate how data are used in Atoll: • • • "Example 1: Two DTM Maps Representing Different Areas" on page 111 "Example 2: Clutter Classes and DTM Maps Representing the Same Area" on page 111 "Example 3: Two Clutter Class Maps Representing a Common Area" on page 111. there are two imported DTM files: • • "DTM 1” represents a given area and has a resolution of 50 m. Atoll uses the order of the maps in the Clutter Classes folder on the Geo tab of the Explorer window to decide which data to use. In Case 1. the clutter class map is on top of the DTM map. Atoll uses both the clutter and DTM data in calculations. “DTM 2” represents a different area and has a resolution of 20 m.3 Example 3: Two Clutter Class Maps Representing a Common Area In this example.” A DTM map called “DTM”. Atoll will take all the data from both "DTM 1” and "DTM 2” into account. In Case 1.75: Multi-layer management in calculations – two DTM maps representing different areas 3. and the data from "Clutter 1" everywhere that is covered by "Clutter 1" but not by © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 111 .10.1 Example 1: Two DTM Maps Representing Different Areas In this example. In both Case 1 and Case 2. In Case 2. in both Case 1 and Case 2. Explorer window Case 1 Clutter classes • Clutter DTM • DTM Case 2 DTM • DTM Clutter classes • Clutter Work space Figure 3. "Clutter 2" represents a smaller area with a resolution of 20 m. "Clutter 2" is on top of "Clutter 1".2. Independently of the order of the two maps in the Explorer window. This area is also covered by "Clutter 1" In the case of two clutter class maps. Explorer window Case 1 DTM • • Work space DTM 2 (20m) DTM 1 (50m) Case 2 DTM • • DTM 1 (50m) DTM 2 (20m) Figure 3. In this example. the file order of the DTM files in the Explorer window does not matter because they do not overlap.2. 3.

etc. When you export the geographic data set. Important: Vectors must be in the same coordinate system as the raster maps. once you have imported geographic data and defined their parameters. you export: • • • • the paths of imported geographic maps map display settings (visibility scale. Note: Tool tips only appear when the Display Tips button ( selected. Atoll will only use the data from "Clutter 1. 3." Explorer window Work space Case 1 Clutter classes • Clutter 2 (20m) • Clutter 1 (50m) Case 2 Clutter classes • Clutter 2 (50m) • Clutter 1 (20m) Figure 3. indoor loss. and indoor loss) raster or user profile traffic map description.12. can import the configuration file containing the paths to the imported geographic data and many of the defined parameters. percentage pilot finger of each clutter class. another user. transparency. ) on the toolbar has been 3. 112 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . the information listed in "Geographic Data Sets" on page 112 is saved into an external file. default standard deviations.12 Geographic Data Sets In Atoll.11 Displaying Information About Geo Data You can display information about a geo data map by using tooltips. "Clutter 1" is on top and completely covers "Clutter 2. standard deviations. To display information about the geo data in a tool tip: • Hold the pointer over the geo data until the tool tip appears. For information. Note: You can export and import other types of information with user configuration files as well. see "Defining the Object Type Tip Text" on page 24. name. you can save much of this information in a user configuration file. the following are explained: • • "Exporting a Geo Data Set" on page 112 "Importing a Geo Data Set" on page 113.Atoll User Manual "Clutter 2.77: Multi-layer management in calculations – two clutter maps representing the same area 3. working on a similar Atoll document." In Case 2. Then.1 Exporting a Geo Data Set When you export a geo data set in a user configuration file. see the Administrator Manual. For information on how to display information in tooltips. tips text. The surface area is only given for closed polygons. orthogonality factor.) clutter description (code. In this section. height." Therefore.

clear the Delete existing geo data check box. DXF. select the Delete existing geo data check box. Erdas Imagine (16-bit). The Save As dialogue appears. lines. adding a vector layer to the Population folder and then adding polygons. and points (for more information. select it and click Open. In the Save As dialogue. In the User Configuration dialogue. Select Tools > User Configuration > Export.2 Importing a Geo Data Set When you import a user configuration file containing a geo data set. You can also edit the Windows shortcut to Atoll and add "-cfg <. select the Geographic Data Set check box. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 113 . Lines. "Editing Geoclimatic Maps" on page 115). 5. 3. select the check boxes of the items you want to import. 6. Atoll checks if there are already geographic data in the current Atoll document. 2. 3. When you import a user configuration file including a geographic data set. or TAB format) (for more information. Note: You can automatically start Atoll with a user configuration file by naming the file "atoll.78).. the information listed in "Geographic Data Sets" on page 112 is imported into your current Atoll document. 4.78: The User Configuration dialogue 3. AGD. Figure 3.e. 4. the option Delete existing geo data appears with other options in the User Configuration dialogue. The User Configuration dialogue appears (see Figure 3. i.13 Editing Geographic Data In Atoll.cfg_file>" where is the complete path to the user configuration file. you can edit geo data that you have imported or you can create geo data by.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data To export a geo data set in a user configuration file: 1. "Editing Clutter Class Maps" on page 114) Contours. The Open dialogue appears. SHP. Click OK. Click OK. and Points" on page 34) Population maps (if they are in vector format.cfg" and placing it in the same folder as the Atoll executable. "Editing Polygons. for example. In the User Configuration dialogue. browse to the folder where you want to save the file and enter a File name. "Editing Geoclimatic Maps" on page 115) Traffic data maps Custom data maps (for more information. MIF. 3. Browse to the user configuration file. "Editing Geoclimatic Maps" on page 115) Geoclimatic maps (for more information. If so. 2. If you already have geographic data in your current Atoll document and would like to replace it with any imported data. To import a user configuration file containing a geo data set: 1. Click OK.12. The following types of geographic data can be edited: • • • • • • Clutter classes (for more information. Select Tools > User Configuration > Import. The User Configuration dialogue appears. 5. If you do not want to replace existing geo data with imported data.

3. 2. The pointer changes to a pencil ( ).79). 3. Deleting a point: i.79: Editor toolbar 4. Position the pointer over the point you want to move. The Editor toolbar appears with a clutter or traffic list. Note: Clutter classes are defined on the Descriptions tab of the clutter classes Properties dialogue. 2. Position the pointer over the polygon border where you want to add a point. 5. The context menu appears. ii. You can later edit and export the polygons you have created. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder.13. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. "Deleting Clutter Polygons" on page 115 3.2 Editing Clutter Polygons You can edit clutter polygons by moving existing points of the polygon or by adding or deleting points. 114 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the polygon. The context menu appears. Note: You can copy the exact coordinates of a closed polygon by right-clicking it on the map and selecting Properties from the context menu. and a Close button (see Figure 3.13. A point is added to the border at the position of the pointer. You can now edit the clutter polygon by: Moving a point: i. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. You can edit these maps by creating or modifying polygons.1 Editing Clutter Class Maps Clutter class maps and certain traffic maps are raster maps. Double-click to close the polygon. Select Edit from the context menu. 8. The pointer changes ( ). Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the polygon. Right-click and select Insert Point from the context menu. All modifications you make to clutter class maps are taken into account by propagation model calculations. Adding a point: i. Right-click and select Delete Point from the context menu.1. you can modify imported clutter class maps or create your own maps by adding data in the form of polygons. The pointer changes ( ). ii. a polygon deletion tool . To create a polygon: 1.1 Creating a Clutter Polygon In Atoll. 7. select the clutter class for the polygon you want to create.1. The pointer changes ( ).13. 3. To edit clutter polygons: 1. Select the polygon. 4. ii. The point is deleted. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. the following are explained: • • • • "Creating a Clutter Polygon" on page 114 "Editing Clutter Polygons" on page 114 "Displaying the Coordinates of Clutter Polygons" on page 115. From the list. Drag the point to its new position. a polygon drawing tool .79). The Editor toolbar appears (see Figure 3. Position the pointer over the point you want to delete. Click the polygon drawing button ( ). Figure 3. 6. Select Edit from the context menu.Atoll User Manual 3. In this section.

Right-click the geo data object. Select Edit from the context menu. 4. The pointer changes ( ). By renaming each vectors folder. Enter a value: Geoclimatic Parameters: Enter a value in the Rain Intensity field to indicate the intensity of rainfall for the polygon. Select Add Vector Layer from the context menu. 2. ) or the New Rectangle ( ) button on the Vector Edition toolbar. 3. To create a vector layer and vector objects on a geo data map: 1. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 115 . 9. folder. Because Atoll names all new vector layers "Vectors" by default. Press ESC to deselect the New Polygon ( 11. and points) to this layer. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. 4. folder. 7. you can ensure that you select the correct folder. Right-click the new vector layer. Note: You can select and copy the coordinates displayed in the Properties dialogue of the polygon. c. to which you want to add a vector layer. 8.13. c. lines. For information on renaming objects. Double-click to close the contour. Drag to the opposite corner of the rectangle. The polygon is deleted. Tip: You can also activate the vector tools by selecting the vector layer to edit from the Vector Edition toolbar list. To draw a polygon.79). 3. Select Edit from the context menu. Right-click the the Geoclimatic Parameters. Click the point on the map that will be one corner of the rectangle. click the New Rectangle button ( ) on the Vector Edition toolbar: a.13. The context menu appears. Right-click the polygon and select Properties from the context menu. b. 2. The Editor toolbar appears (see Figure 3. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window.1. you must map the vector layer. The vector tools on the Vector Edition toolbar are activated. 4.3 Displaying the Coordinates of Clutter Polygons To display the coordinates of the points defining the polygon area: 1. Click the polygon you want to delete. The context menu appears. the Geoclimatic Parameters. 3. The Properties dialogue appears with the coordinates of the points defining the polygon and the total area. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. see "Renaming an Object" on page 17. 5. Right-click the new polygon or rectangle and select Properties from the context menu.2 Editing Geoclimatic Maps Some geographic data maps. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. 3. The Editor toolbar appears (see Figure 3. are made up of individual vector objects.79). it might be difficult to know which Vectors folder you are selecting. 2. 5. click the New Polygon button ( a. For Atoll to consider the new vector layer as part of the data map.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data 3. The context menu appears. Click each time you change angles on the border defining the outside of the contour.13. ) on the Vector Edition toolbar: 6. Select Edit from the context menu. To draw a rectangle.1. You can modify and create these geo data maps by adding a vector layer and then adding vector objects (contours. A new data object called "Vectors" is created in the selected geo data object folder. 10. 3. Click the polygon deletion tool ( ). Click once on the map where you want to begin drawing the contour. geoclimatic maps. The context menu appears. b. Release the mouse to create the rectangle defined by the two corners. To delete a clutter polygon: 1. for example.4 Deleting Clutter Polygons You can delete clutter polygons.

Atoll automatically creates the corresponding HDR file containing the georeference information. 3. Atoll allows you to export files larger than 2 Gb. you can save your modifications to an external file. Right-click the Clutter Classes folder. Atoll supports a variety of both raster and vector file formats (for more information. 5. 3. TIF: When you select tagged image file format. Create a new file from part of a larger one: You can select part of certain geo data types and then save the selected part as a new file. either in the same format as used in the current Atoll document. The Save As dialogue appears. Combine several files into one file: If you have several smaller files in one folder of the Geo tab. Lines. no corresponding geo-reference file is created. Atoll allows you to export files larger than 2 Gb.14. This section explains the following: • • • • • "Saving Modifications to an External File" on page 116 "Updating the Source File" on page 117 "Combining Several Files into One File" on page 118 "Exporting an Embedded File" on page 118 "Creating a New File from a Larger File" on page 119 3. JPEG 2000: When you select the JPEG 2000 format. To export clutter class modifications in a raster-format file: 1. When exporting in BIL format. BIL: When you select the BIL format. This section explains the following: • • "Exporting an Edited Clutter Class Map in a Raster-Format File" on page 116 "Exporting an Edited Vector Layer in Vector-Format File" on page 117.1 Saving Modifications to an External File In Atoll. Update the source file with modifications you have made: If you have made modifications to a geo data type in Atoll. Export an embedded file to be used in another Atoll document or in another application: You can save a file to an external file. The Export dialogue appears (see Figure 3. You can also choose to export the entire clutter class geo data. "Rain" is selected by default. and select the file format from the Save as type list.14 Saving Geographic Data Atoll allows you to save your geographic data files separately from saving the Atoll document. GRC or GRD: Files with the extension GRC or GRD are Vertical Mapper files. For the following geo data: Geoclimatic Parameters: In the Field column. You can select from one of the following file formats: BMP: When you select bitmap format. Click Save. enter a name for the file. 13.Atoll User Manual 12. TXT: The ArcView text format is intended only for export. 3.80). Atoll automatically creates the corresponding BPW file containing the georeference information. Atoll automatically creates the corresponding TFW file containing the georeference information.14. When exporting in GRD or GRC formats. You can edit the vector objects as explained in "Editing Polygons. you can save them as one file. in the same format or in another one. you can save these changes to the source file. or in a different raster format. Saving a geographic file separately from saving the Atoll document enables you to: • • • • • Save modifications you have made to an external file: If you have made modifications to geo data. 116 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . the part containing the computation zone. 2. When you have made modifications to a raster-format geo data file. 4. Select Save As from the context menu. you can export them to a new external file. The Properties dialogue appears. exporting either the entire geo data or just your modifications allows you to save those modifications to an external file. Select Properties from the context menu. In the Save As dialogue. no corresponding geo-reference file is created. see "Supported Geographic Data Formats" on page 96). or just your modifications to the geo data.1 Exporting an Edited Clutter Class Map in a Raster-Format File You can export clutter class modifications in a raster-format file. and Points" on page 34. browse to the folder where you want to save the file.1. Click the Data Mapping tab. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window.

and select the file format from the Save as type list. displaying the current coordinate system and allowing you to change the coordinate system by clicking Change. 3. In the Save As dialogue. including any modifications you have made to the geo data. 3. The exported geo data file will be added as a new object to the selected geo data folder. the suggested resolution is the resolution of the modified object. the following maps can be exported as vector format files: • • • Vector-format population maps Vector-format geoclimatic maps Vector-format custom maps.14. Click OK. MIF and TAB: MapInfo formats. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 117 .2 Exporting an Edited Vector Layer in Vector-Format File You can export an edited vector layer as a vector format file. 8. If there is no initial clutter class object. 5. browse to the folder where you want to save the file. select one of the following: The Entire Project Area: This option allows you to export the entire clutter class geo data file. use either the AGD.14. SHP: The ArcView vector format should be used for vector layers containing only polygons. whether or not the computation zone is visible. A vector layer can contain contours. right-click the vector layer folder. On the Explorer window tab containing the vector layer. no other clutter class geo data file. Click Save in the Save As dialogue.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data Figure 3. Atoll can read AGD files faster than the other supported vector formats. Define a Resolution in Metres. the MIF or the TAB format. enter a name for the file. 2. - - 7. If several objects have been modified. or traffic objects. Atoll prompts you to save the changes when you close the document. The suggested resolution value is defined by the following criteria: If one object has been modified. If the geo data file is linked. If the Atoll document in which you created the clutter class file has no DTM. As a format created for Atoll. Under Region. The selected data is saved in an external file. lines. Atoll saves the changes automatically when you save the document. The resolution must be an integer and the minimum resolution allowed is 1. the exported file replaces the vector layer as a linked file. the suggested resolution is the highest resolution of the modified objects. The exported geo data file will be added as a new object to the Clutter Classes geo data folder. You can embed the file afterwards (see "Embedding Geographic Data" on page 102). it cannot save vectors made of lines or points. Once you save a vector layer. Only Pending Changes: This option allows you to export a rectangle containing any modifications you have made to the clutter classes. The Vector Export dialogue appears. The vector layer is saved in the format and with the name you specified and the exported file replaces the vector layer in the current document as a linked file. If you have a vector layer with vector lines or points. Along with vector layers you have added to the Geo tab. 3.1. - 4. The Save As dialogue appears.80: Export dialogue 6. The exported geo data file will replace the geo data file in the current Atoll document. You can select from one of the following file formats: AGD: The Atoll Geographic Data format is an Atoll-specific format. the suggested resolution is 100 m. the resolution will equal the highest resolution of the DTM maps. To export a vector layer: 1. If the geo data file is embedded in the Atoll document. Select Save As from the context menu.2 Updating the Source File While working on an Atoll document. you may make changes to geo data. The context menu appears. The Computation Zone: This option allows you to export the clutter class geo data contained by a rectangle encompassing the computation zone. Click Export. and points.

Right-click the folder containing geo data file whose source file you want to update. Select Save As from the context menu. including any modifications you have made to the geo data. 5. Click OK.14. The context menu appears.3 Combining Several Files into One File In certain circumstances. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. 6. you can save your changes to an external file ("Exporting an Edited Vector Layer in Vector-Format File" on page 117). Right-click the folder of the geo data files you want to combine into one file. Under Region. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. The Save As dialogue appears. 118 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .Atoll User Manual To update the source file of a linked geo data file: 1. The suggested resolution value is the highest resolution of all objects. Select Save As from the context menu. When you export an embedded file.4 Exporting an Embedded File You can export an embedded geo data file to be used in a different Atoll document. Enter a File name and select a file type from the Save as type list. 3. 4. Atoll replaces the embedded file in the current Atoll document with the newly exported file. or in a different application. 2. 3. Select Save from the context menu. Enter a File name and select a file type from the Save as type list. The context menu appears.81). To export an embedded geo data file: 1. This option allows you to save the entire area covered by the geo data files. If the geo data file is a vector file. Click OK. the combined file will show the file on the top. 2. after importing an MSI Planet® index file. 8.14. You can create a one file from a section of the following geo data types: • • • • Digital terrain model Clutter classes Clutter heights Scanned maps To combine individual files into a new file: 1. Define a Resolution in Metres. Right-click the folder of the embedded geo data file you want to export. Caution: You will not be warned that you are replacing the current file. select The Entire Project Area. The Export dialogue appears (see Figure 3. 3. 3. 2. The Save As dialogue appears. The resolution must be an integer and the minimum resolution allowed is 1. The files will be combined according to their order from the top down in the folder on the Geo tab of the Explorer window. Therefore. you may have several geo data files of the same type. You can combine these separate files to create one single file.81). ensure that you want to replace the current file before proceeding to the following step. 4. The linked file is updated. If the files overlap on the map. 7. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. the Vector Export dialogue appears (see Figure 3. Click OK. The context menu appears. 5. for example. If you do not want to replace the current file. 3. The selected data is saved as a new file.

Click Export. including any modifications you have made to the geo data. The Coordinate Systems dialogue appears. Click OK. b.82: Export dialogue a. 3. The exported file will replace the embedded file in the Geo data tab. To create a new file. The context menu appears. you must first define the area by creating a computation zone. click Change. whether or not the computation zone is visible. 2. Right-click the folder of the embedded geo data file you want to export. Click the Geo tab in the Explorer window. Figure 3. Click OK.81: The Vector Export dialogue a. The resolution must be an integer and the minimum resolution allowed is 1. c. The exported file will be added as an object in the geo data folder. select one of the following: The Entire Project Area: This option allows you to export the entire raster-format geo data file. The Export dialogue appears (see Figure 3. Select Save As from the context menu. - b. The Computation Zone: This option allows you to export the geo data contained by a rectangle encompassing the computation zone. 3. Define a Resolution in Metres.81). see "Setting a Coordinate System" on page 82.82). or in a new Atoll document. For information on the Coordinate Systems dialogue. the Export dialogue appears (see Figure 3. The Save As dialogue appears. The Vector Export dialogue displays the coordinate system of the file. The geo data file is exported with the selected coordinate system. Under Region. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 119 . 4. The exported file will be added as an object in the geo data folder. The selected data is saved in an external file. Only Pending Changes: This option allows you to export a rectangle containing any modifications you have made to the geo data. To change the coordinate system used for the exported file. If the geo data file is a raster file.Chapter 3: Managing Geographic Data Figure 3. You can use this new file in the same Atoll document. You can create a new file from a section of the following geo data types: • • • • • • Digital terrain model Clutter classes Clutter heights Scanned maps Population Geoclimatic maps To create a new file from a section of a larger file: 1. Enter a File name and select a file type from the Save as type list. 5.5 Creating a New File from a Larger File You can create a new file from a section of a larger file.14.

120 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Define a Resolution in Metres. 7.Atoll User Manual 6. select The Computation Zone. 8. Click OK. whether or not the computation zone is visible. The resolution must be an integer and the minimum resolution allowed is 1. Under Region. The selected data is saved as a new file. The exported geo data file will be added as a new object to the selected geo data folder. This option allows you to export the geo data contained by a rectangle encompassing the computation zone.

Chapter 4 Antennas and Equipment .

.

To modify an entry in the Manufacturers table. and antenna diameter. To create an entry in the Manufacturers table. 6. The operating frequency band and manufacturer-related information are used as filtering criteria when defining compatible antenna/equipment sets. 2. 1. In this section the following are described: • • • • "Creating an Antenna" on page 123 "Importing Microwave Antennas" on page 125 "Editing Microwave Antenna Patterns" on page 125 "Printing Microwave Antenna Patterns" on page 126. horizontal and vertical plane diagrams for horizontal and vertical polarization. manufacturer. 3. and antennas are listed in the Manufacturers table. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder.e. you can copy the horizontal and vertical antenna patterns from a spreadsheet or word processor. Comments: Any comments. 2. 3. horizontal pattern. Because an antenna can be horizontally and vertically polarized. manufacturer name. As well.1 Creating an Antenna The microwave antenna is used to radiate or receive electromagnetic energy in the form of high-frequency radio waves. Each of these patterns can have both co-polar and cross-polar patterns defined. gain. This chapter explains working with antennas as well as equipment such as waveguides and cables: • • • • • "Defining the List of Manufacturers" on page 123 "Defining Antennas" on page 123 "Microwave Equipment" on page 127 "Microwave Waveguides and Cables" on page 137 "Microwave Antenna/Equipment/Waveguide Compatibility" on page 138.. Four different antenna pattern diagrams are used in microwave antennas. name. 4. Right-click the Links folder. gain. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. along with the characteristics which have a bearing on network performance. modify any of the entries in the corresponding row. 4. You can enter information in the following fields: © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 123 . Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. To create or modify an entry in the Manufacturers table: 1. horizontal and vertical antenna patterns.1 Defining the List of Manufacturers In Atoll.2. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. waveguides. the manufacturers of microwave radio equipment. 5.2 Defining Antennas In Atoll. each microwave antenna is identified by a name. Atoll uses the relevant antenna pattern diagrams when determining propagation. Tip: To create an antenna: When you create a new antenna. Atoll enables you to create new antennas and set the parameters of each (i. and defined by the operating frequency band. the equipment used to create a network is modelled. The Manufacturers table appears. Select Manufacturers > Open table from the context menu. The context menu appears. enter the following in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ): Name: The name of the manufacturer. 5. The MW Antennas New Element Properties dialogue appears.e. Right-click the Links folder. 4. and diameter). Atoll models microwave antennas and provides default microwave antennas.. vertical pattern. 4. 4. Click the General tab. i. The context menu appears. Select Antennas > New from the context menu.Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment 4 Antennas and Equipment In Atoll.

b. On each of the four tabs of the antenna properties dialogue. Horizontal: The ratio of power received in the cross-polar section to the power received in the co-polar section. g. Diameter: The diameter of the antenna. Cross-polar section: Vertical polarised port response to a horizontally polarised signal in the horizontal plane. for the vertical polarisation. Copy the selected data. 7. You can modify the name Atoll enters if you wish. f. c. you can define the co-polar and cross-polar sections for each plane of the antenna: Horizontal polarisation . Switch to the document containing the horizontal pattern.Vertical plane: - - Vertical polarisation . Frequency Band: The frequency band that this antenna will be used with.Vertical: The ratio of power received in the cross-polar section to the power received in the co-polar section. Gain: The antenna’s isotropic gain. When you paste the data into the MW Antennas New Element Properties dialogue. for the horizontal polarisation. Click OK. 124 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Atoll calculates a linear interpolation from the existing pattern values. Cross-polar section: Vertical polarised port response to a horizontally polarised signal in the vertical plane. Select the columns containing the angles and attenuation values of the horizontal pattern. If some values are missing in the data sheet. e. When you calculate along an angle for which no data is available. Under Cross Polar Discrimination (XPD). Cross-polar section: Horizontal polarised port response to a vertically polarised signal in the vertical plane. Atoll calculates a linear interpolation from existing pattern values. Click Apply to display the pattern. - - 6. Atoll interpolates the values in order to obtain a complete and realistic pattern around the antenna. Co-polar section: Horizontal polarised port response to a horizontally polarised signal in the vertical plane. A microwave antenna is defined by 8 radiation patterns. Co-polar section: Vertical polarised port response to a vertically polarised signal in the horizontal plane. Click the upper-left cell of the horizontal pattern.Horizontal plane: - - Vertical polarisation . Cross-polar section: Horizontal polarised port response to a vertically polarised signal in the horizontal plane. Atoll removes blank rows in the pattern table when you press the Apply button.83: Copying horizontal pattern values d. Horizontal polarisation . Switch to Atoll. displays the cross polar discriminations for horizontal and vertical polarisations. Comments: Any additional information on the antenna.Vertical plane: - a. Manufacturer: The name of the antenna manufacturer. Atoll will interpolate the values in order to obtain a complete and realistic pattern. When performing a calculation along an angle for which no data is available. If there are some blank rows in the data sheet. . Paste the data in the table. Define the co-polar and cross-polar sections for each plane of the antenna. Figure 4.Horizontal plane: Co-polar section: Horizontal polarised port response to a horizontally polarised signal in the horizontal plane. Co-polar section: Vertical polarised port response to a vertically polarised signal in the vertical plane.Atoll User Manual Name: Atoll automatically enters a default name for each new antenna.

5. To edit the horizontal or vertical patterns of an antenna: 1. To import antenna files: 1. see the following web site: http://www. The context menu appears. Right-click the Links folder.0501. Right-click the Links folder. 8. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. The antenna diameter is calculated using the following equation for a radiation efficiency of 55 %: Gain  dBi  = 20  Log  Diametre  m   + 20   Frequency  MHz   – 42. The MW Antennas table appears. The Data Import dialogue appears. 5.11 – Log  Max Frequency – Min Frequency  ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------- ---------------------------  2 20 Diametre  m  = 10 For more information on antenna file formats.gov/oet/info/software/nsma/nsma-intrp. You can define the display by right-clicking the pattern window and choosing the either Linear display or Logarithmic display from the context menu.2. 6. Select the file or folder to be imported and click Open. which gives:  Gain  dBi  + 2. Entire folder: Choose this option if you want to import all the files in a folder. 2. Right-click the antenna in the Antennas table whose horizontal or vertical pattern you want to edit. 6. Select Record Properties from the context menu.Minimum Frequency)/2. Atoll automatically calculates the antenna diameter from the antenna gain and average operating frequency. see the Technical Reference Guide. Click the Browse button ( 7. 4. For further information about the standard NSMA format (recommendation WG16. In the Data Import dialogue.050). © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 125 . Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. you can modify antenna patterns by editing them individually or you can copy the antenna patterns of one antenna and replace the antenna patterns of another antenna: • • "Editing a Single Radiation Pattern" on page 125 "Copying an Antenna Pattern to One or More Antennas" on page 126.html.99. The context menu appears. Click Import. 4. 1.fcc. 3. The file or folders are imported. 4. Editing a Single Radiation Pattern You can edit the horizontal or vertical patterns of an antenna. Select Antennas > Open Table from the context menu. see "Creating an Antenna" on page 123).99. Select Antennas > Import from the context menu.2 . Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 8. choose one of the following options: One file only: Choose this option if you only want to import one file. 7.3 Editing Microwave Antenna Patterns In Atoll. Note: You can display antenna patterns with either linear or logarithmic axes.003 and WG16. Edit the antenna pattern by entering new values in the table.2 Importing Microwave Antennas Atoll enables you to import antenna files in the Planet microwave antenna format or in standard NSMA (National Spectrum Managers Association) formats defined by recommendations WG16.89. Atoll continues until all files are imported and then displays how many files have been successfully and unsuccessfully imported in the Events viewer. The antenna’s Properties dialogue appears. Select the tab of the pattern you want to edit (for information on the tabs of the antenna’s Properties dialogue. The context menu appears.Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment 4. The average operating frequency is calculated as (Maximum Frequency . Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder.2. Atoll does not stop the import process if an error occurs. ) to navigate to the file or the folder to be imported. 3.

2. 2. Notes: • You can also copy an antenna pattern by right-clicking the pattern on the tab of the antenna’s Properties dialogue and selecting Copy from the context menu. The MW Antennas table appears. Atoll replaces the old pattern with the new one in the MW Antennas table.84: MW Antennas table 5. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 6. 8. 126 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Select Edit > Copy to copy the cell. Select Edit > Paste to paste the antenna pattern.84). 3. Right-click the Links folder.Atoll User Manual Copying an Antenna Pattern to One or More Antennas Atoll enables you to copy antenna patterns in the MW Antennas table. . Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. • Patterns are displayed in the MW Antennas table with either linear or logarithmic axes as defined in the Properties dialogue of an individual antenna. In the row of the antenna you want to copy the pattern to. 4. you can view all antenna patterns in order to be able to compare them (see Figure 4. 4. The Properties dialogue appears. Select the tab with the antenna pattern you want to print: H Polar.vertical plane 8. 4. . 6. 7. The context menu appears. select the cell with the pattern. Figure 4.horizontal plane H Polar. In the row of the antenna with the pattern you want to copy.H Plane: Horizontal polarization . The context menu appears. . You can define the display by right-clicking the pattern of an antenna and choosing either Linear display or Logarithmic display from the context menu.H Plane: Vertical polarization . By resizing row height and column width. Select Antennas > Open Table from the context menu. Right-click the antenna whose pattern you want to print.4 Printing Microwave Antenna Patterns To print the pattern of a microwave antenna: 1. Right-click the antenna pattern and select Linear or Logarithmic from the context menu.V Plane: Vertical polarization . select the cell with the pattern. The MW Antennas table appears.V Plane: Horizontal polarization . To open the MW Antennas table: 1. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. . 2. 5. Right-click the Links folder. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder.horizontal plane V Polar. Select Antennas > Open Table from the context menu. By copying and pasting patterns in the MW Antennas table you can assign the antenna patterns of one antenna to another. 7.vertical plane V Polar. 3. Select Record Properties from the context menu.

Front-to-Back Ratio (FBR): The FBR is the ratio of the power radiated in the desired direction to the power radiated in the opposite direction. directivity is defined as: • • The ability to send the transmitted power in only the desired direction The ability to reject undesired signals coming from other directions. The antenna can be in one of many different shapes (for example. typically between 35 and 50 dB. Antenna The antenna is the part of the microwave link that transmits electromagnetic energy from transmission lines into the air and receives transmitted electromagnetic energy from the air to be then sent on transmission lines. yagi. Radiation pattern: The radiation pattern is a diagram showing the direction of the radiated power. is composed of three main sub-systems: • • • Indoor unit (IDU) Outdoor unit (ODU) Antenna Figure 4. Using polarisation enables the same radio frequency to be used by different radio systems in physical proximity to one another. the higher the FBR. flat or planar. Right-click the antenna pattern and select Print from the context menu.Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment 9. lens. The main characteristics of the microwave antenna are the following: • Directivity: In practical terms. In general. horn.85: Radio system components Indoor Unit (IDU) The IDU is the termination point of the end-user equipment that generates the data to be carried by the microwave link. or array) to achieve its specific objectives. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 127 . The microwave radio system. It consists of the following components: • • The radio modem that converts the digital signal into a form suitable for modulation on the radio carrier signal The power supply for the Outdoor Unit (ODU) Outdoor Unit (ODU) The ODU converts the modulated signal from its low frequency form to a high frequency radio signal in the appropriate radio band and channel for radio transmission. The portion of the pattern where the maximum gain occurs is often referred to as the main lobe of the pattern Polarisation: Polarisation is the ability to transmit only one of the two electromagnetic vector components of the wave (either the horizontal component or the vertical component). • • Gain: The gain is the amount of power radiated in a given direction using only the RF power at the input terminals of the antenna. 4.3 Microwave Equipment Microwave radio equipment are the elements used to convert the initial data to microwave frequency signals that can then be transmitted over a given microwave link and to the elements used to convert microwave frequency signals received to data. the higher the gain of the antenna. parabolic. as well as the equipment that constitute it.

3. To create a piece of microwave equipment: 1. the system is called a "cold" standby system. In this section. For cold standby systems. set the following parameters: Enter the Model or descriptive name of the equipment. For a hot standby system. For more information on antennas. Enter the Number of States and select the modulation from the Modulation list. and then define its parameters using its Properties dialogue. the following are explained: • • • "Modelling the IDU and ODU in Atoll" on page 128 "Importing Microwave Equipment" on page 132 "Advanced Configuration" on page 132. The maximum improvement factor reserved for cross-polarisation reduction (XPIF) is used only when an XPIC (cross-polarized interference canceller) is present. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 4. On the General tab of Properties dialogue. The defining parameters of each piece of microwave equipment are stored in the MW Equipment table. to describe the system configuration in terms of channels and to define supported bit rates using trunk types with defined digital hierarchy. 2.Atoll User Manual Vertical polarisation Horizontal polarisation Figure 4. the standby channel frequency must be the same as one of the active channels. It is used to reduce the scattering of interference from the undesired polarisation into the desired polarisation due to rain fading by increasing the cross-polarisation discrimination factor (XPD). the equipment protection configuration). modulation and demodulation of signals to be transmitted and signals received at the antenna. 5. Switching to the standby channel in case of failure can be automatic and is then referred to a "hot" standby system. If the system must be manually switched to the standby channel. Standby channels are inactive and used only when active channels fail. The context menu appears. The system configuration is defined in the form of "n + m" where "n" is the number of active channels and "m" is the number of standby channels. - Specify the System Configuration (i..3. power control. Enter the Frequency Band that this equipment will use. The Max ATPC can be optionally taken into consideration during calculations. 4. You can create a new piece of microwave equipment using the MW Equipment table. The Max ATPC is used by the transmitter to adjust power by increasing or reducing it in order to maintain signal quality in case of multipath or rain fading that temporarily attenuates the received signal. Enter the power range reserved for Adaptive Transmission Power Control (Max ATPC) and the maximum improvement factor reserved for cross-polarisation reduction (XPIF).1 Modelling the IDU and ODU in Atoll In Atoll. Select Equipment > New from the context menu. XPD is a design parameter that is maximized in the main lobe of the antenna pattern. If a hot standby system is available. see "Defining Antennas" on page 123. the IDU and ODU are combined and modelled as microwave equipment. Right-click the Links folder. The MW Equipment New Element Properties dialogue appears. Microwave transceiver equipment is used to manage output power. 128 QAM modulation is modelled as shown below: 4 PSK (QPSK) modulation is modelled as shown below: - Enter the maximum power (Max Power) and the Noise Figure. XPIF is generally within the range of 15-20 dB. the 128 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .e.86: Polarisation • Cross Polarisation Discrimination (XPD): The XPD is the ratio of power received in the desired polarisation to the power received in undesired polarisation. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. you must select the Hot Standby Available check box. Max ATPC also enables the transmitter to respond to increased interference levels resulting from ATPC on other links.

The Kn parameter is mostly dependant on the modulation used. which will serve as a back-up in case the main equipment fails. Modulation 64-QAM 16-QAM 8-PSK 4-PSK Kn 15. select the Capacity (i. "Characterizing the effects of multipath dispersion on digital radios. "Digital radio outage due to selective fading. but only the main equipment is active.5 7 1 Kn values (without adaptive equalization) Rummler Model: If you want to use the Rummler model to predict outage times. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 129 . 1 + 1 redundancy mode with monitored hot standby (Hot Standby Available) is modelled as shown below: In this system configuration. The other equipment. Rummler. both the main and standby equipment are on. set the following parameters: Under Digital Hierarchy. pp. Lundgren and W. - Under Rate. pp.D. see studies by C.530 recommendation.observation vs. On the Hierarchy and Rate tab of Properties dialogue." Bell System Technical Journal.." IEEE Globecom Proceedings.e. 1 + 1 redundancy mode is modelled as shown below: In this system configuration. select Rummler model. Rummler. and define the frequency shift (Width) and Depth for both minimum and non-minimum phases. 1073-1100.87: Defining the method to be used to predict outage times Normalised: For a normalised signature.e. prediction from laboratory simulations.. only the main equipment is active and on. Frequencies allocated to active and standby channels are defined in the microwave link properties dialogue.D.Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment standby channel frequency can be different from active channels. 2. select Normalised and enter a value for the Kn Parameter. is not turned on. 1988. produce acceptable errors rates) in the presence of frequency-selective fading. For more information. Rummler2 and the ITU P. 6.W. Under Radio Signature. select the digital hierarchy type (SDH/SONET or PDH). the number of trunks) and the trunk type from the list. Figure 4. W. 1727-1732. C. May-June 1979. This method will characterise the ability of a receiving equipment to perform successfully (i. choose the method to be used to predict outage times (dispersive fade margin) due to multipath fading. Lundgren and W. The standby equipment will be automatically put into service immediately if the main equipment fails. This information is available from the manufacturer.D.W.4 5. Note: The radio signature parameters are not used by all types of receiver equipment.

and define an interference margin in the For a Margin Against Interference Of text box. and define an interference margin in the For a Margin Against Interference Of text box. 7. On the Sensitivity tab of Properties dialogue. set the following parameters: Under Calculation of the Thermal Fade Margin (TFM).: If you want to define a minimum C⁄I. select User-defined C/I min. You can enter the channel bandwidth defined by the manufacturer in the From manufacturer text box. 8. set the Port it is attached to. 9. The MTBF is available from the equipment manufacturer.Atoll User Manual The rate is calculated by the capacity per trunk multiplied by the number of trunks: The minimal and standardised channel bandwidth resulting from the parameters defined on the Hierarchy and Rate tab is displayed under Channel Bandwidth. and define the losses on Transmission and Reception. define the (BER-Sensitivity) pairs... The overflow threshold is the maximum receiver sensitivity before saturation.: If you want to use a calculated minimum C⁄I. It is used to calculate the margin against enhancements. Atoll will calculates the required quality based on the user-defined interference margin. you can define how the MXPD is calculated: Calculated C/I min. On the Losses tab of Properties dialogue. On the Outages tab of Properties dialogue. define the Overflow Threshold. The MTBF is used to define the reliability of the equipment and corresponds to the average length of time that the equipment functions without failing. The Hot Standby Commutation Delay is the maximum amount of time it would take to switch to backup equipment if the main equipment fails. set the following parameters: Enter the Mean Time Before Failure (MTBF). The Hot Standby - 130 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Under Signal Enhancements Margin Calculation (E). as well as the quality required for a BER of 10-3 and 10-6 in the For a BER of 1e-3 and the For a BER of 1e-3 text boxes. This will be used to calculate the thermal fade margin. select Calculated C/I min. set the following parameters: Enter the losses due to the use of filters on transmission (Transmission Filter) and reception (Reception Filter): - For each circulator present on this piece of equipment. Under Cross-polar Discrimination Reduction Calculation (MXPD). Enter the receiver signal level (threshold) at which the radio runs continuous errors at a specified rate (BER). - - - User-defined C/I min. Enter the Hot Standby Commutation Delay.

This is done instead of calculating C/I values and comparing them to the published objectives. The Equipment table appears. define a threshold-to-interference (T⁄I) graph either by clicking the Initialise from standard graphs button. Click OK to create the new piece of equipment. 12. 13. to let Atoll create the mask from standard values. On the Receiver Mask tab of Properties dialogue. To edit the properties of microwave transceiver equipment: 1. or by defining an attenuation in dB (Att. to let Atoll create the graph from standard values. when you define the properties for a link. You can edit the properties of microwave transceiver equipment through the properties dialogues. The threshold-to-interference (T/I) ratio is used to calculate the interference fade margin (IFM) which defines the vulnerability to co-channel and adjacent channel interference. 11. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 131 .) for each frequency shift in MHz (Delta F).) for each frequency shift in MHz (Delta F). Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. On the T⁄I Graph tab of Properties dialogue. The resulting receiver mask is displayed in the graph window on the right. define a receiver mask either by clicking the Initialise from standard graphs button. The context menu appears. The T/I graph defines the graph of maximum interfering power levels for different frequency separations between the transmitter and victim receivers. Select Equipment > Open Table from the context menu. Edit the properties as previously explained in this section. Right-click the Links folder. 5. or by defining an attenuation in dB (Att.Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment Commutation Delay is used only if Hot Standby Available is selected on the General tab of this Properties dialogue.) for each frequency shift in MHz (Delta F). you must indicate which channel will be used as a backup in case of main equipment failure. This information is provided by the equipment manufacturer. For more information on defining link properties. Right-click the record whose properties you want to edit. This information is provided by the equipment manufacturer. 10. 3. On the Transmitter Mask tab of Properties dialogue. The resulting transmitter mask is displayed in the graph window on the right. define the transmitter spectral mask either by clicking the Initialise from standard graphs button. The resulting T⁄I graph is displayed in the graph window on the right. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. 7. The context menu appears. This information is provided by the equipment manufacturer. 2. the received power level in dB is compared to the maximum power level to determine whether the interference is acceptable. to let Atoll create the mask from standard values. see "Definition of a Microwave Link" on page 185. It is provided by the manufacturer. or by defining an attenuation in dB (Att. Select Record Properties from the context menu. The microwave transceiver equipment’s Properties dialogue appears. Furthermore. For each interfering transmitter. 6. 4.

Each defined trunk type defines a supported bit rate and is a parameter of microwave equipment. the average frequency of all slave clocks in the system is the same. To import equipment files: 1. 3. 6. but you can create new trunk types and set their parameters. 8. 4. you can copy it from the spreadsheet or word processor and paste the data into the Trunk Type table.3 Advanced Configuration Atoll offers several advanced configuration options: • • • "Digital Hierarchies" on page 132 "Interference Reduction Factor" on page 133 "Theoretical Graphs" on page 136. Creating a Microwave Trunk Type Atoll has a set of default trunk type definitions available. In this case. Click Import. It continues until all the files have been imported and then displays in the Events viewer how many files have been successfully and unsuccessfully imported.2 Importing Microwave Equipment Atoll enables you to import equipment files that are in standard NSMA (National Spectrum Managers Association) format defined by the recommendation WG 21. Notes: Atoll does not stop the import process when an error occurs. NSMA-format equipment files are ASCII files with the extension NSM. see "Theoretical Graphs" on page 136. For example. The context menu appears. PDH networks have data streams with the same nominal frequency but are not synchronised with each other. The plesiochronous digital hierarchy (PDH) is a technology used to transport large quantities of data over digital transport equipment such as fibre optic and microwave radio.1 Digital Hierarchies Atoll models PDH as well as SDH digital hierarchies. in other words. see the Technical Reference Guide. 132 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Select the file or folder to be imported and click Open. For further information about the NSMA and Pathloss file formats. it can take a long time.3. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. Click the Browse button ( 7.3. 2. The Data Import dialogue appears. The European (SDH) and American (SONET) versions of SDH systems differ slightly. The European and American versions of PDH systems differ slightly in their data rates. The following section describes creating and modifying trunk types to model digital hierarchies. However. The file or folders are imported. digital hierarchies are modelled as trunk types. ) to navigate to the file or the folder to be imported. Note: If you are creating a large number of different trunk types from manufacturers data. the T/I graph defined for identical modulations is imported into the T/I Graph tab while the others are imported into the theoretical graphs table. Right-click the Links folder. In Atoll. 4. Each equipment file can contain several T/I graphs for different pairs of modulations.051 or in Pathloss format (version 4.Atoll User Manual 4. Select Equipment > Import Manufacturer Data from the context menu. In the Data Import dialogue.0). Pathloss-format equipment files are ASCII files with the extension RAF. 5. The synchronous digital hierarchy (SDH) refers to the group or layers of transmission rates or standards that can transport digital data of different capacities through high bandwidth mediums such as optical fibres or radio waves. if you have the data available in tabular format. The frame formats and thus the data rates of both systems are not the same but are compatible due to their synchronous nature. the rising and falling edges of the pulses in each data streams do not coincide.3.3. a microwave link that has a capacity of 2 with an assigned trunk type of E1 will be capable of transferring data at twice the E1 standard bit rate. 4. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. choose one of the following options: One file only: Choose this option if you only want to import one file. but the basic principles of multiplexing are the same. Due to the synchronous nature of the SDH.99. Entire folder: Choose this option if you want to import all the files in a folder. For more information on the theoretical graphs. A microwave link inherits the capacity of the trunk type through its assigned equipment.

© Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 133 . add the following data: Trunk Type: The name of the trunk type that will model the digital hierarchy.89: Trunk type Properties dialogue 4. the digital hierarchy being modelled is SDH or SONET. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder 3. Binary Rate Supported (Mbit/s): The binary rate supported is the payload rate (i. the digital hierarchy being modelled is PDH. The IRF is a function of the difference between the central frequencies of the interfered signal and the interfering signal. SDH/SONET: If the check box is selected ( ). You can also define the properties of a trunk type in its Properties dialogue.e. Bits/Block: The number of bits per block corresponds to the number of bits per frame (i. Binary Rate (Mbit/s): The binary rate is the gross data rate of the frame if all the bits are used for traffic.3. Figure 4. Right-click on the Links folder.3. Select Equipment > Digital Hierarchies from the context menu. Table 2) of the ITU-R P. the rate of the useful bits not including the overheads bits).. No.89). 2. If the check box is not selected ( ).530-8 recommendation.88: Trunk Types table 5. The context menu appears. the interference reduction factor (IRF) is a method of reducing interference on the received signal. The trunk type’s Properties dialogue appears (see Figure 4. For each trunk type you define. the useful bits plus the overheads bits).e. BERses: BERses corresponds to Bit Error Rate (BER) as documented in Annex 2. To open a trunk type’s Properties dialogue: • Double-click the trunk type in the left margin of the Trunk Types table. The Trunk Types table appears (see Figure 4. 4.Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment To create a microwave trunk type: 1.2 Interference Reduction Factor As the name indicates. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Figure 4. You can define a protection level for each victim–interferer microwave transceiver equipment pair by defining the protection levels (in dB) for each delta frequency (in MHz)..88).

capacity. Right-click on the Links folder. These IRF graphs will be used to reduce the interference between victim and interferer microwave equipment when calculating interference. Select the name of the Victim equipment from the list. or the theoretical graphs if not. Atoll determines the IRF graph during the process of calculating interference.91). Double-click in the left margin of the record to open its Properties dialogue (see Figure 4.90: IRF table 5. or modulation are not the same. Atoll merges the transmitter mask and the receiver mask of equipment in order to determine the IRF graph.Atoll User Manual The IRF graphs defined in the IRF table are used during the calculation of interference. or the theoretical "T⁄I" graphs if not (for more information on the theoretical graphs. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. see "Theoretical Graphs" on page 136). In this section. the following are explained: • • "Defining IRF Graphs Manually" on page 134 "Defining IRF Graphs with the Assistant" on page 135. Atoll proceeds as follows: 1. Note: If you are creating a new IRF graph.90). Figure 4. Figure 4. 4. The context menu appears. When studying the interference between transmission equipment and reception equipment. Defining IRF Graphs Manually You can define IRF graphs using the IRF table. capacity and modulation. Otherwise.91: IRF record Properties dialogue 134 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Atoll uses it. 2. Atoll uses T⁄I graphs to determine the IRF graph. Atoll first verifies whether an IRF graph is defined for the transmission equipment-reception equipment pair in the IRF table. Atoll verifies that the transmission equipment and the reception equipment have the same manufacturer. 2. Select the name of the Interferer equipment from the list. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder 3. The following sections describe the modelling of IRF in Atoll. Atoll uses either the graphs defined for the equipment if available. 6. Atoll uses either the graphs defined for the equipment if available. If the equipment manufacturer. use the row marked with the New Row icon ( ) 7. To create or modify an IRF graph: 1. The Trunk Types table appears (see Figure 4. If so. If so. Select Equipment > IRF > Open Table from the context menu.

9. enter a protection level (in dB) for each delta frequency (in MHz). Right-click on the Links folder. The context menu appears. Defining IRF Graphs with the Assistant Atoll provides an assistant to allow you to define IRFs between transmission and reception transceiver equipment. Click OK.92: IRF Setting dialogue 5. Only equipment manufactured by the selected manufacturer are displayed in the grid.90). Select the RX Equipment Manufacturer from the menu. Only equipment operating in the selected frequency band is displayed in the grid.Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment 8. Atoll presents the entries where the transmission and reception equipment present the possibility of interference. 8. 7. The resulting graph is displayed on the right of the Properties dialogue. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 6. Figure 4. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder 3. Under Protection values in the Properties dialogue. Select the Frequency Band from the menu. 2. Select Equipment > IRF > Edit Grid from the context menu. delete an IRF graph. The IRF Setting dialogue appears (see Figure 4. When you select a frequency band and the equipment manufacturers with equipment that operate in the same frequency band. You can now define an IRF graph. Only equipment manufactured by the selected manufacturer are displayed in the grid. Select the TX Equipment Manufacturer from the menu. 4. To use the assistant to define IRFs: 1. or create an IRF graph using equipment graphs or theoretical graphs: © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 135 .

select either "As Equipment" to use the receiver selectivity graph defined for the equipment. 4. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries.3 Theoretical Graphs Atoll allows you to define theoretical graphs that you can use when the equipment description is not complete (i. d. bandwidth. Manufacturer: The manufacturer for which the graph is valid. d. 136 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Under Transmitter Filter. select either "As Equipment" to use the transmission spectrum graph defined for the equipment. e. The context menu appears. 2.. Click Run to calculate the IRF graph. 5. rate. frequency band. b. the receiver mask.radio. Click OK to close the IRF Setting dialogue. or a receiver mask. Default theoretical graphs are available for different frequency bands and bandwidths. Right-click the Links folder. The theoretical graph’s Properties dialogue appears.ero. or the receiver mask. The context menu appears. b. The context menu appears. or T/I graph for a certain manufacturer. The context menu appears. or a T/I graph. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. when information about the transmitter mask.3. enter a protection level (in dB) for each delta frequency (in MHz). Type of Graph: The type of theoretical graph you define.3 Creating Theoretical Graphs A theoretical graph contains information on the behaviour of microwave transceiver equipment under different conditions of C/I. It can be either a transmitter mask. Define the calculation step stated in frequency spacing (MHz). T/I graphs have been found at the web address http://www. The context menu appears. Under Enter graph values. g. Click the General tab and define the following parameters: Name: The name of the theoretical graph. or select a theoretical "transmission spectrum" graph compatible with the operating frequency band of the transmission equipment.uk and transmitter and receiver masks have been found at http:\\www. These theoretical graphs can describe either the transmitter mask. Select Add Record from the context menu. The Theoretical Graphs table appears. Rate: The rate for which the graph is valid. 3. Select Calculate from Masks from the context menu. b.3. 4. c. 7. Click OK. Modulation: The modulation for which the graph is valid. c. A dialogue appears.Atoll User Manual To define an IRF graph between the transmission and reception equipment: a. Under Reception Filter. the T/I graph) and calculate IRF graphs when no IRF is defined in the IRF table. To create a theoretical graph: 1.dk. To create an IRF graph between the transmission and reception equipment using equipment graphs or theoretical graphs: a. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. The IRF Calculation dialogue appears. Select Delete from the context menu. Select Record Properties from the context menu. Channel Width: The bandwidth for which the graph is valid. To delete an IRF graph between the transmission and reception equipment: a. and modulation. 9. They can be used to initialise equipment properties (the transmitter mask. Click OK. or T/I graph is missing). the receiver mask. 3. Select Equipment > Theoretical Graphs from the context menu. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. The resulting graph is displayed on the right of the dialogue. or select a theoretical "receiver selectivity" graph compatible with the operating frequency band of the reception equipment. f. Frequency Band: The frequency band for which the graph is valid. Right-click the theoretical graph you want to modify. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.gov.e. It represents the changes in the Bit Error Rate as a function of the level of interference. 6. Note: You can create a new theoretical graph by entering a name in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ) and pressing ENTER.

3. and therefore there is no radiation loss. 4. The cable is covered with a plastic jacket for protection. 4.93). The MWGuides New Element Properties dialogue appears (see Figure 4. For information on the MWGuides table. the dielectric losses are also negligible. Right-click the Links folder. Hence. Cable loss is a function of cross-sectional area. These are quite robust and therefore easy to install.4. have a metallic inner core with a dielectric material separating the outer metallic conductor. 4. The electric and magnetic fields are contained within the guide. If the graph is a T/I graph. Note: If you are creating a large number of waveguides and cables based on manufacturers data. define the variation of the T/I (in dB) as a function of the frequency spacing (in MHz). Select Waveguides and Cables > New from the context menu. Cable loss is measured in terms of decibels per 100m. The context menu appears. on the other hand. you can copy it from the spreadsheet or word processor and paste the data into the MWGuides table. To create a microwave waveguide or cable: 1. Cables. However.Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment 8. see "Modifying a Microwave Waveguide or Cable" on page 138. ) opens the Prop- © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 137 .1 Defining Microwave Waveguides and Cables In Atoll. The waveguide is designed for a specific wavelength. called a waveguide. 2. the operating frequency is a very important characteristic for a waveguide. If the graph describes the receiver mask. For the new waveguide or cable. microwave waveguides and cables are characterised by the loss a signal undergoes per 100m of their length. it can take a long time. if you have the data available in tabular format. The following sections describe the modelling of waveguides and cables in Atoll: • • "Defining Microwave Waveguides and Cables" on page 137 "Modifying a Microwave Waveguide or Cable" on page 138. the lower the loss. 9. Click OK. define the attenuation of the main received signal (in dB) as a function of the frequency spacing (in MHz). Clicking the Browse button ( erties dialogue of the selected frequency band. A waveguide operates between two limiting frequencies. you can assign it to a microwave link for both transmission and reception. called the cut-off frequency. Frequency Band: Select the frequency band from the list. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. define the following parameters: Name: The name of the waveguide or cable.93: MWGuides New Element Properties dialogue 5. The dielectric material is usually air or foam. Click the Values tab and define the corresponding graph. define the attenuation of the main transmitted signal (in dB) as a function of the frequency spacing (in MHz). If the graph describes the transmitter mask. with very low attenuation. Microwave energy can be guided in a metallic tube. Since the dielectric is air. Once a microwave waveguide or cable has been defined. Figure 4. the thicker the cable. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.4 Microwave Waveguides and Cables Waveguides and cables are both used to transfer the RF signal from the transmission module of the microwave equipment to the microwave antenna.

7. ) opens the Prop- Manufacturer: Select the manufacturer from the list.1 Defining Compatibility Manually In Atoll. Elliptic. 4.1. Click OK. Right-click the Links folder. you can use the Antenna/Equipment Compatibility and Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility tables to define which microwave antennas are compatible with which waveguides and which microwave antennas are compatible with which equipment.5. Other. Select Record Properties from the context menu. 3. Right-click the record in the Waveguides and Cables table that you want to modify. and waveguides) of a microwave link.2 Modifying a Microwave Waveguide or Cable In Atoll. 4. Type: Select the type of waveguide or cable. Click OK.5 Microwave Antenna/Equipment/Waveguide Compatibility Atoll allows you to define compatibility between antennas. 2. or Rectangular. equipment.5. Frequency Band: Select the frequency band from the list. The context menu appears. In this section. The defined compatible antenna/ equipment/waveguide sets can be then selected when you define the properties of a microwave link.1 Using the Microwave Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility Table You can use the Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility table to list compatible microwave antennas and waveguides. You can select from Cable. equipment.4. Circular. and waveguides. antennas. and waveguides as options in lists. 5. the following are explained: • • "Defining Compatibility Manually" on page 138 "Using Assistants to Define Compatibility" on page 139. 138 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder.e. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected manufacturer. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. When you define the properties (i. Select Waveguides and Cables > Open Table from the context menu. Other.Atoll User Manual Manufacturer: Select the manufacturer from the list. you can access and modify any defined microwave waveguide or cable using the MWGuides table. Right-click the Links folder. equipment. 4. The context menu appears. these compatibility definitions can be used to display only compatible antennas. 6. Type: Select the type of waveguide or cable. the following are explained: • • "Using the Microwave Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility Table" on page 138 "Using the Microwave Antenna/Equipment Compatibility Table" on page 139 4. For the waveguide or cable. To define antenna/equipment compatibility using the Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility table: 1. Elliptic. The record’s Properties dialogue appears. Circular. You can select from Cable. 2. Signal Loss: Enter the signal loss in dB per 100 m. You can define compatibility directly in the Antenna/Equipment Compatibility and Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility tables or you can use the assistants available in Atoll to define compatibility. 4. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. 3. 6. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected manufacturer. Signal Loss: Enter the signal loss in dB per 100 m. The context menu appears. or Rectangular. To modify a microwave waveguide or cable: 1. you can modify the following parameters: Name: The name of the waveguide or cable. In this section. 8. The Waveguides and Cables table appears. Clicking the Browse button ( erties dialogue of the selected frequency band..

You can also. The Antenna/Equipment Compatibility table appears.2. The values in the Antenna and Guide lists are taken from the MW Antennas table and the MWGuides table. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Right-click on the Links folder.1 Using the Assistant to Define Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility Atoll provides an assistant to allow you to define compatible pairs of antennas and waveguides. The context menu appears.5.. if desired. and waveguides as options in lists. Create a new antenna/waveguide compatibility pair by selecting an Antenna and a Guide from the lists in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ). these are taken into account and. Select Compatibility > Antenna/Equipment > Open Table from the context menu. Right-click the Links folder. Clicking the Browse button ( turer.5. Note: If you have a large number of antenna/equipment compatibility pairs to enter. Select the Guide Manufacturer from the list. Clicking the Browse button ( frequency band. 4. 5. respectively.Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment 4. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. The values in the Antenna and Equipment lists are taken from the MW Antennas table and the MW Equipment table. When you define the properties (i. 2. respectively. 4. 4. To define antenna/equipment compatibility using the Antenna/Equipment Compatibility table: 1. equipment. enter a Comment by doubleclicking the Comment field to open the record’s Properties dialogue. The Antenna/Guides Compatibility table appears. enter a Comment by double-clicking the Comment field to open the record’s Properties dialogue. You can also. ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected manufac- 7. Select Compatibility > Antenna/Waveguide > Open Table from the context menu. Note: If you have a large number of antenna/equipment compatibility pairs to enter. ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected manufac- © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 139 . and waveguides) of a microwave link. Select the Antenna Manufacturer from the list. by default.e. these compatibility definitions can be used in order to display only compatible antennas. or you can paste them into the Antenna/Guides Compatibility table. 3. To use the assistant to define compatible pairs of antennas and waveguides: 1. you can import them by right-clicking on the table and selecting Import from the context menu.1. The assistant gives you an overview of antennas and waveguides that operate in the same frequency band. a piece of equipment compatible with an antenna will be compatible with the waveguides compatible with this antenna.5. Select the Frequency Band from the list. 4. Only antennas manufactured by the selected manufacturer are displayed in the table. 2. Select Compatibility > Antenna/Waveguide > Edit Grid from the context menu. if desired. If you have previously defined compatible antenna/waveguide pairs. The context menu appears. 4. Only waveguides manufactured by the selected manufacturer is displayed in the table. ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected 6. antennas. Create a new antenna/equipment compatibility pair by selecting an Antenna and Equipment from the lists in the row marked with the New Row icon ( ).2 Using the Microwave Antenna/Equipment Compatibility Table You can use the Antenna/Equipment Compatibility table to list compatible microwave antennas and equipment. 5. 5. A dialogue appears. Only antennas and waveguides operating in the selected frequency band are displayed in the table. or you can paste them into the Antenna/Equipment Compatibility table. Clicking the Browse button ( turer. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. equipment.2 Using Assistants to Define Compatibility Atoll provides assistants to help you define which microwave antennas are compatible with which waveguides and which microwave antennas are compatible with which equipment. the following are explained: • • "Using the Assistant to Define Antenna/Waveguide Compatibility" on page 139 "Using the Assistant to Define Antenna/Equipment Compatibility" on page 140. you can import them by right-clicking on the table and selecting Import from the context menu. In this section. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder 3.

Select Add Record from the context menu. You can now define the compatibility between an antenna and a waveguide or delete a defined compatible antenna-waveguide pair: To define the compatibility between an antenna and a waveguide: a. Only equipment manufactured by the selected manufacturer is displayed in the table. The cell is no longer marked in green. You can use the Fill (Up.5. Right-click on the Links folder. Select the Antenna Manufacturer from the list. Only antennas and waveguides operating in the selected frequency band are displayed in the table. 2. The context menu appears. To delete a defined compatible antenna-waveguide pair: a. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder 3. Select the Equipment Manufacturer from the list. Clicking the Browse button ( turer. Select the Frequency Band from the list. Left) and the Copy and Paste commands to create or delete compatible antennawaveguide pairs. The cell is marked in green to indicate that the antenna and waveguide are compatible. b. The context menu appears. 5.Atoll User Manual 8. ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected 6. The context menu appears. 9. Select Compatibility > Antenna/Equipment > Edit Grid from the context menu. ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected manufac- 140 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Clicking the Browse button ( turer. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. 4. ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected manufac- 7. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Only antennas manufactured by the selected manufacturer are displayed in the table. Select Delete from the context menu. Clicking the Browse button ( frequency band. b. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. A dialogue appears. 4. The assistant gives you an overview of antennas and equipment that operate in the same frequency band. Down. Right. To use the assistant to define compatible pairs of antennas and equipment: 1.2.2 Using the Assistant to Define Antenna/Equipment Compatibility Atoll provides an assistant to allow you to define compatible pairs of antennas and equipment. Click OK.

Right. and waveguides: a. a piece of equipment. under List of the Compatible Guides. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. The cell is marked in green to indicate that the antenna and equipment are compatible. Select Add Record from the context menu. Click OK. The properties dialogue opens. Select Delete from the context menu. The cell is marked in green to indicate that the antenna and equipment are compatible. delete a defined compatible antennaequipment pair. To define compatibility with an antenna. You can use the Fill (Up. Down. b. You can now define the compatibility between an antenna and equipment. In the properties dialogue. Right-click on the square and select Record Properties from the context menu. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with the entries for the antenna and the equipment. To delete a defined compatible antenna-equipment pair: a. and waveguides: To define the compatibility between an antenna and equipment: a. b. by default. d. The context menu appears. b. a piece of equipment. Left) and the Copy and Paste commands to create or delete compatible antennaequipment pairs. The cell is no longer marked in green. or define compatibility with an antenna. these are taken into account and.Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment 8. The context menu appears. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 141 . Click OK to close the properties dialogue. e. c. select the waveguides that you want to make compatible with this antenna/equipment pair. Select Add Record from the context menu. 9. If you have previously defined compatible antenna/ waveguide pairs. the waveguides compatible with the corresponding antenna are selected. The context menu appears.

Atoll User Manual 142 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .

Chapter 5 Managing Frequency Bands and Sub-bands .

Atoll User Manual 144 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .

497-6 ITU-R F.386-6 ITU-R F. Frequency Band Maximum Path Attenuation Antenna Diameters and Gain Polarization Used 2 GHz 7 GHz 10 GHz 80 km 50 km 45 km Multipath fading Multipath fading Multipath fading Up to 370 cm for a 36 dB gain Up to 370 cm for a 46.747-0 ITU-R F. ITU-compliant divisions of a frequency band.1 Long-Haul Frequency Band A long-haul frequency band operates within a range of 2 to 10 GHz and can cover a distance from 45 to 80 km.Chapter 5: Managing Frequency Bands and Sub-bands 5 Managing Frequency Bands and Sub-bands When planning a microwave link network.1 Microwave Frequency Bands Microwave links operate within a high frequency range (2-58 GHz). The characteristics of microwave frequency bands are different depending on the frequency.1. Long-haul frequency bands suffer from attenuation due to multipath fading.637-3 ITU-R F. managing frequency bands and sub-bands is explained: • • • "Microwave Frequency Bands" on page 145 "Defining Microwave Link Frequency Bands" on page 146 "Defining Microwave Link Frequency Sub-bands" on page 147. The length of a microwave length is dependent upon the frequency: as the frequency increases.748-4 ITU-R F. The following table gives details of long-haul frequency bands. In this chapter. breaking it into channels. Frequency sub-bands are standardised.749-2 Usually the frequency bands can be divided into three types: • • • "Long-Haul Frequency Band" on page 145 "Medium-Haul Frequency Band" on page 146 "Short-Haul Frequency Band" on page 146. The default frequency bands supplied with Atoll are based on the F-series ITU-R recommendations: ITU-R Recommendation Frequency Band ITU-R F. Atoll enables you to define frequency bands and sub-bands. 7 GHz 8 GHz 10 GHz 15 GHz 13 GHz 18 GHz 23 GHz 28 GHz 38 GHz 5. 5. the length of the microwave link decreases. By defining frequency bands you can determine the operational limits of a microwave link network.636-3 ITU-R F.8 dB gain Horizontal and vertical Horizontal and vertical From 60 to 120 cm for a 34-40 dB gain Horizontal and vertical © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 145 .595-8 ITU-R F. Each frequency band is in turn divided into a number of frequency sub-bands.385-7 ITU-R F.

The following table gives details of medium-haul frequency bands. and 27 GHz. 2. and attenuation due to rain of approximately 3 dB per km. At 23 GHz. and attenuation due to rain of approximately 3 dB per km. 5. the frequency band experiences atmospheric attenuation of 0. there is atmospheric attenuation of 0.4-42.94). 3. d. To create or modify a frequency band: 1.5-47. and attenuation due to rain of approximately 1 dB per km. At 23 GHz.2 Defining Microwave Link Frequency Bands Microwave frequency bands are implemented in Atoll. By default. Right-click the Microwave Radio Links folder. for rain of 20 mm per hour. 18 km Rain and multipath fading Rain fading Rain fading Rain fading Rain fading From 30 to 120 cm for a gain of 35. Frequency Band Maximum Path Attenuation Antenna Diameters and Gain Polarization Used 23 GHza 26 GHz and 27 GHza 38 GHzb 55 GHzc 58 GHzd a. Frequency Band Maximum Path Attenuation Antenna Diameters and Gain Polarization Used 13 GHz 15 GHz 18 GHza a. and attenuation due to rain of approximately 7 dB per km. there is atmospheric attenuation of 12 dB per km.1 dB per km. for rain of 20 mm per hour. 40 km 35 km 20 km Multipath fading Multipath fading Rain and multipath fading From 60 to 120 cm for a gain of 36.3 Short-Haul Frequency Band A short-haul frequency band operates within a range of 23 to 58 GHz and can cover a distance up to 18 km.3 dB From 30 to 60 cm 30 cm for a gain of 39. Select Frequencies > Frequency Bands from the context menu. The following table gives details of short-haul frequency bands.1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. there is atmospheric attenuation of 5 dB per km. The Frequency Bands table appears (see Figure 5. there is atmospheric attenuation of 0. ITU-compliant frequency bands. Atoll includes several pre-defined.1 dB per km. At 58 GHz. There must be at least one frequency band that can be assigned to microwave links that are created.1. 26 GHz. 146 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . and attenuation due to rain of approximately 7 dB per km. At 55 GHz. for rain of 20 mm per hour. c. Short-haul frequency bands suffer from attenuation due to multipath fading as well as rain fading (for the lower frequencies in the band). Medium-haul frequency bands suffer from attenuation due to multipath fading. At 38 GHz. 5.4 dB Horizontal and vertical From 60-120 cm for a gain of 38-44 dB Horizontal and vertical From 60-180 cm for a gain of 39-49 dB Horizontal and vertical At 18 GHz.66 dB 15 cm 15 cm Horizontal and vertical 15 km 10 km A few kilometers A few kilometers Horizontal and vertical Vertical Vertical Vertical b.Atoll User Manual 5. for rain of 20 mm per hour as well as multipath fading.1 dB per km. there is multipath fading as well.2 Medium-Haul Frequency Band A medium-haul frequency band operates within a range of 11 to 20 GHz and can cover a distance from 20 to 40 km. The context menu appears. for rain of 20 mm per hour.

The context menu appears. Atoll automatically generates a channelisation plan or channel-to-frequency map using the information entered for the frequency sub-bands. To modify a frequency band. To create or modify a frequency sub-band: 1. Frequency sub-bands are standardised. A duplex link usually uses one of these half-bands in one direction and the other half-band in the other direction. A frequency sub-band has two half-bands. modify any of the entries in the corresponding row. Select Frequencies > Frequency Sub-Bands from the context menu. You can define a channelisation plan for the lower and upper half-band of each sub-band. Frequency (MHz): The maximum frequency of the frequency band (in MHz). Max. ): 5.95: The Frequency Sub-Bands table © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 147 . ITU-compliant divisions of a frequency band. ITU-compliant divisions can have more than one frequency sub-band defined for a single frequency band. Figure 5. To create a frequency band. Right-click the Microwave Radio Links folder.94: The Frequency Bands table 4.Chapter 5: Managing Frequency Bands and Sub-bands Figure 5. 5. These half-bands are referred to as upper and lower half-bands. Min. Note: The information necessary to define a frequency band can be found in the F-series ITU-R recommendations.3 Defining Microwave Link Frequency Sub-bands Frequency bands can be divided into a frequency sub-bands. enter the following in the row marked with the New Row icon ( Name: The name of the frequency band. Comments: Any comments. 3. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. breaking it into channels. 2. Frequency (MHz): The minimum frequency of the frequency band (in MHz).95). The Frequency Sub-Bands table appears (see Figure 5.

Atoll User Manual 4. To create a frequency sub-band, enter the following in the row marked with the New Row icon ( Name: The name of the frequency sub-band. Frequency band: The name of the frequency band to which the sub-band belongs. Reference Frequency (MHz): The reference frequency (in MHz). Lower Half-Band Shift (MHz): The lower half-band shift of the sub-band (in MHz). Upper Half-Band Shift (MHz): The upper half-band shift of the sub-band (in MHz). First Channel: The first channel of the sub-band. Last Channel: The last channel of the sub-band. Step: The step between channels. Note: The information necessary to define a frequency sub-band can be found in the F-series ITU-R recommendations. ):

5. To modify a frequency sub-band, modify any of the entries in the corresponding row.

5.3.1

Example of Creating a Frequency Sub-band
You can find the information necessary to create a frequency sub-band in the appropriate ITU-R recommendation. In this example, the recommendation R F.747-0 (for 10 GHz) is used. On the first page of ITU-R F.747-0 (see Figure 5.96), you see that the recommendation is for Frequency Band 10 GHz.

Figure 5.96: First page of Recommendation ITU-R F.747 On page 2, you see the information in Figure 5.97:

Figure 5.97: Second page of Recommendation ITU-R F.747 The information on page 2 of Recommendation ITU-R F.747 gives you the following values: • • • Reference Frequency (MHz): 11 701 MHz (the reference frequency is the central frequency of the sub-band). Lower Half-Band Shift (MHz): -1204 MHz Upper Half-Band Shift (MHz): -1113 MHz Important: Remember to include the negative sign ("-") when defining the lower and upper half-band shifts. • • • • Inter-Channel Space (MHz): 7 MHz (as indicated by "+ 7m") First Channel: 1 (as indicated by "from 1 to 12") Last Channel: 12 (as indicated by "from 1 to 12") Step: 1 (as indicated by "The 12 values of m from 1 to 12)

148

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

© Forsk 2010

Chapter 6
Managing Calculations in Atoll

Atoll User Manual

150

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

© Forsk 2010

Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll

6

Managing Calculations in Atoll
Once you have created microwave links, you can make predictions to study how well your network functions: • • • "Using Propagation Models in Microwave Projects" on page 151 "Defining Microwave Link Classes and Performance Objectives" on page 154 "Defining Calculation Parameters" on page 156.

6.1

Using Propagation Models in Microwave Projects
The following propagation models are available in Atoll for use in microwave projects: • Microwave Propagation Model: The Microwave Propagation Model is used to calculate the fade margin and to determine the link profile. For more information, see "Working with the Microwave Propagation Model" on page 151. Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model: The Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model is used to calculate interference. For more information, see "Working with the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model" on page 153.

6.1.1

Working with the Microwave Propagation Model
The Microwave Propagation Model is used to calculate the fade margin and to determine the link profile. When calculating attenuation, the Microwave Propagation Model takes free space path losses, atmospheric losses, attenuation due to diffraction, and tropospheric losses into account. If you want to analyse a microwave link, a propagation model must be assigned to it, as explained in "Link Parameters" on page 159. The parameters of the propagation model, including some of its coefficients, can be modified using the Microwave Propagation Model Properties dialogue. To define the parameters of the Microwave Propagation Model: 1. Click the Modules tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Propagation Models folder.

3. Right-click the Microwave Propagation Model. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Parameters tab (see Figure 6.102).

Figure 6.98: Microwave Propagation Model Properties - Parameters tab Under Heights, you can set the following parameter: Clutter Taken into Account in Diffraction: Select "1 - Yes" to have Atoll take clutter height information into account when calculating diffraction. Otherwise, select "0 - No". If you choose to take clutter height into account, Atoll uses the clutter height information in the clutter heights file if available. Otherwise, it uses average clutter height specified for each clutter class in the clutter classes.

Under LOS Attenuation, you can set the following parameters: K1, K2, and K3: Enter the K1, K2, and K3 values that will be used to calculate free space losses.

Under Diffraction, you can set the following parameters: Method: Select the method that will be used to calculate diffraction.

© Forsk 2010

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

151

Atoll User Manual Deygout Epstein-Peterson Deygout with correction Millington ITU 452-11 Full Deygout K4: Enter the K4 value that will be used to calculate diffraction. you can set the following parameters: Method: Select the method that will be used to calculate tropospheric scattering: No attenuation: No attenuation will be calculated. The maximum attenuation is taken into consideration to calculate the attenuation due to vegetation.. 90%. ITU-R P452: Attenuation will be calculated according to the ITU-R P452 recommendations. For information on clutter categories. or 99. 6. which is the surface refractivity of the centre of the path. Alpha: Enter the value of the Alpha coefficient. 7.833-4 recommendations. Under Tropospheric Scatter. Both ground altitude and clutter height are considered along the whole profile except over a specific distance around the transmitter and the receiver sites (i.833-4: Attenuation will be calculated according to ITU-R P. A1: Enter the value of the A1 coefficient.e. For more information on the parameters of the Microwave Propagation Model. Clutter categories are taken into consideration when studying reflections and must be defined in order to analyse reflections along the profile. Simplified Method: Attenuation will be estimated using an Atoll-specific equation.99% of the time. you can set the following parameters for each clutter class: Clearance per clutter class: Define a clearance (in metres) around each transmitter and each receiver site for each clutter class. Under Vegetation. the clearance). see the Technical Reference Guide. The attenuation due to vegetation is calculated and displayed in link budget and interference reports for information only. Clutter categories: Select a clutter category for each clutter class. see "Global Parameters" on page 156.Click OK. where Atoll bases its calculations only on the DTM. ITU-R P617-1: Attenuation will be calculated according to the ITU-R P617-1 recommendations for 50%. A1 and Alpha coefficients are used to calculate the maximum attenuation experienced by a transmitter or a receiver site located within a vegetation area. Ktropo: Enter the value for the weight factor. you can set the following parameters: Method: Select the method that will be used to calculate attenuation due to vegetation: No attenuation: No attenuation will be calculated. Click the Clutter tab (see Figure 6.99: Microwave Propagation Model Properties .Clutter tab Under Clutter Consideration.99). ITU-R P. 152 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . The clearance information is used when clutter is taken into account in diffraction. It is not taken into account when calculating the total attenuation. Figure 6. N0: Enter the value for N0. Atoll multiplies the loss given by the selected method to calculate the tropospheric scatter loss. Clutter categories are ITU-standardised clutter classes.

Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll

6.1.2

Working with the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model
The Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model is used to calculate interference. It is an empirical model, but it takes more physical characteristics into consideration than the Microwave Propagation Model, which is why it is recommended for calculating interference. Assigning the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model to a microwave link is explained in in "Link Parameters" on page 159. The parameters of the propagation model, including some of its coefficients, can be modified using the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model Properties dialogue. To define the parameters of the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model: 1. Click the Modules tab of the Explorer window. 2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Propagation Models folder.

3. Right-click the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model. The context menu appears. 4. Select Properties from the context menu. The Properties dialogue appears. 5. Click the Parameters tab (see Figure 6.102).

Figure 6.100: Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model Properties - Parameters tab Under Heights, you can set the following parameter: Clutter Taken into Account in Diffraction: Select "1 - Yes" to have Atoll take clutter height information into account when calculating diffraction. Otherwise, select "0 - No". If you choose to take clutter height into account, Atoll uses the clutter height information in the clutter heights file if available. Otherwise, it uses average clutter height specified for each clutter class in the clutter classes.

Under Reference attenuation not exceeded during the average year, you can set the following parameter: Required Time Percentage: Enter the percentage of time during which the global attenuation is not exceeded.

Under Rec. ITU-R P452 version, you can set the following parameter: Method: Select the method that will be used to calculate the global attenuation (dB) between an interfering transmitter and an interfered (victim) receiver: ITU-R P.452-12 Simplified ITU-R P.452-8

6. Click the Clutter tab (see Figure 6.101).

© Forsk 2010

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

153

Atoll User Manual

Figure 6.101: Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model Properties - Clutter tab Under Clutter Consideration, you can set the following parameters for each clutter class: Clearance per clutter class: Define a clearance (in metres) around each transmitter and each receiver site for each clutter class. The clearance information is used when clutter is taken into account in diffraction. Both ground altitude and clutter height are considered along the whole profile except over a specific distance around the transmitter and the receiver sites (i.e., the clearance), where Atoll bases its calculations only on the DTM.

7. Click OK. For more information on the parameters of the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model, see the Technical Reference Guide.

6.2

Defining Microwave Link Classes and Performance Objectives
In this section, the following are explained: • • "Microwave Link Classes" on page 154 "Defining Performance Objectives" on page 154.

6.2.1

Microwave Link Classes
Microwave link classes are used to differentiate microwave link types. Different link classes can use different performance objectives. By assigning microwave links to microwave link classes, you can assign the link classes targe parameters and usage limitations to the selected microwave links. To create or modify a microwave link class: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Microwave Radio Links folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Link Classes from the context menu. The Link Classes table appears. 4. Enter or modify the values in the table columns to create or modify a link class. Each link class has the following parameters: Name: The name of the link class Type: The type of link class (International or National) Sub-Class: The sub-class (Long Haul, Short Haul, Access, Intermediate country, etc.) Min and Max. L (M): The minimum and maximum length (in metres) for this link class.

The Atoll microwave module includes some pre-defined microwave links classes that are compliant with ITU G.821 and G.826 recommendations.

6.2.2

Defining Performance Objectives
The ITU G.821 recommendation defines microwave performance parameters as functions of microwave performance events. As outlined in the ITU recommendations, error events can occur in link paths or in connections; some error

154

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

© Forsk 2010

Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll performance events are applicable to both while others are specific to the path or connection. These microwave error performance parameters are fully modelled in Atoll and include: • • • ESR SESR BBER

These error performance parameters are based on measurements of microwave error performance events. Error performance events and error performance parameters are briefly described in the following sections: • • • "Microwave Error Performance Events" on page 155 "Microwave Error Performance Parameters" on page 155 "The Purpose of Microwave Error Performance Objectives" on page 155.

Microwave Error Performance Events
Microwave error performance parameters are based on the following events: • • • Errored Block (EB): The EB is a block of data with one or more erroneous bits. Errored Second (ES): The ES is a one-second period with one or more errored blocks or at least one defect. Severely Errored Second (SES): The SES is a one-second period with 30% errored blocks or at least one defect. SES is a subset of ES. Note: Consecutive Severely Errored Seconds can result in periods of unavailability, especially when there are no backup or standby procedures. Periods of consecutive Severely Errored Seconds persisting for T seconds, where 2 = T < 10 (sometimes referred to as "failures"), can have a severe impact on service, leading to the disconnection of switched services. The frequency of these events can be limited by limiting the SESR.

Background Block Error (BBE): The BBE is an errored block not occurring as part of an SES.

Microwave Error Performance Parameters
The total observation time (Stotal) is split into two parts, namely, the time for which the connection is deemed to be available (Savail) and the time when it is unavailable (Sunavail). Error performance should only be evaluated while the connection is in the available state. The parameters are: • • • Errored Second Ratio (ESR): The ESR is the ratio of ES to total seconds in available time during a fixed measurement interval. Severely Errored Second Ratio (SESR): The SESR is the ratio of SES to total seconds in available time during a fixed measurement interval. Background Block Error Ratio (BBER): The BBER is the ratio of Background Block Errors (BBE) to total blocks in available time during a fixed measurement interval. The count of total blocks excludes all blocks during SESs.

In Atoll, you can define microwave link classes and performance objectives based on these error performance parameters. Atoll also includes default lists of microwave link classes and performance objectives based on the ITU G.821 and G.826 recommendations.

The Purpose of Microwave Error Performance Objectives
The performance objectives serve two main goals: • Performance objectives give the user of national and international digital networks an indication of the expected error performance under real operating conditions, thereby facilitating service planning and terminal equipment design. Performance objectives form the basis upon which performance standards are based for transmission equipment and systems in an ISDN connection.

Performance objectives represent a compromise between meeting service requirements and designing a practically feasible network, taking economic and technical constraints into consideration. The performance objectives, although expressed to suit the needs of different services, are intended to represent a single level of transmission quality.

6.2.2.1

Defining Quality Objectives
Using different parameters (BBER, ESR, and SESR), you can define one or more quality objectives for each link class in Atoll. Each quality objective is characterised by a performance objective equation that defines the limitation of the relevant quality objective parameter (BBER, ESR, SESR). The performance objective equations define the behaviour of the quality parameter as a function of the length (L) of the microwave link. The length of a microwave link is, in turn, limited by the minimum and maximum lengths defined in the microwave link class. Each quality objective is also characterised by its minimum and maximum bit rates. Atoll includes by default the quality objectives defined in the ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 recommendations. You can also define customised quality objectives. To modify the pre-defined ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 quality objectives or to create a new quality objective: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Microwave Radio Links folder. The context menu appears.

© Forsk 2010

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

155

Atoll User Manual 3. Select Performance Targets > Quality from the context menu. The Quality Objectives dialogue appears. You can either edit a default ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 quality objective or create a new quality objective. To edit a ITU G.821 or ITU G.826 quality objective: Select the appropriate tab (ITU G.821 or ITU G.826) and modify the properties of the quality objective. To create a new customised quality objective: Select the Customised tab and enter the parameters in the row marked with the New Row icon ( 4. Click OK. ).

6.2.2.2

Defining Availability Objectives
Using different parameters (BBER, ESR, and SESR), you can define one or more quality objectives for each link class inAtoll. Each availability objective is characterised by a performance objective equation that defines the limitation of the relevant availability objective parameter (BBER, ESR, SESR). The availability objective equations define the behaviour of the availability parameter as a function of the length (L) of the microwave link. The length of a microwave link is, in turn, limited by the minimum and maximum lengths defined in the microwave link class. Each availability objective is also characterised by its minimum and maximum bit rates. Note: The availability objectives are global objectives. They consist of three partial objectives as microwave link unavailability can be either due to rain, due to equipment failure, or random.

Atoll includes by default the availability objectives defined in the ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 recommendations. You can also define customised availability objectives. To modify pre-defined ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 availability objectives or to create a new availability objective: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Microwave Radio Links folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Performance Targets > Availability from the context menu. The Availability Objectives dialogue appears. You can either edit a default ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 availability objective or create a new availability objective. To edit a ITU G.821 and ITU G.826 availability objective: Select the appropriate tab (ITU G.821 or ITU G.826) and modify the properties of the availability objective. To create a new customised quality objective: Select the Customised tab and enter the parameters in the row marked with the New Row icon ( 4. Click OK. ).

6.3

Defining Calculation Parameters
In a microwave project, parameters that affect calculations can be divided into: • • Global parameters: Global parameters are defined for all microwave links and affect all links. For information on setting global parameters, see "Global Parameters" on page 156. Link parameters: Link parameters are defined per link and affect individual links. For information on setting link parameters, see "Link Parameters" on page 159.

As well, any parameters set for the propagation model affect calculations: • • Microwave Propagation Model: For information on setting Microwave Propagation Model parameters, see "Working with the Microwave Propagation Model" on page 151. Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model: For information on setting Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model parameters, see "Working with the Microwave ITU-R P.452 Model" on page 153.

6.3.1

Global Parameters
The global properties of a microwave links project are defined for all microwave links in the Properties of the Microwave Radio Links folder. The global parameters are those used for: • • • Quality and availability analysis Objective selection Interference calculation.

To define the global parameters for microwave links: for quality and availability analysis, objective selection, and interference calculation: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Microwave Radio Links folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Properties from the context menu. The Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue appears.

156

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

© Forsk 2010

Under Result filtering. B >> A.. the channel with the lowest margin). No IRF graph is taken into account when the Co-channel Only option is selected. Under Interferer Filtering. Click the Models tab. Specific port engineering: If you select Specific port engineering. if you keep the default value of 250%. two links between the same two sites). Values defined for each link: If you select Values defined for each link. Results that do not meet the threshold will not be displayed. 6. and interference calculation. the parameters you define are valid for all types of analyses: quality and availability analysis. Power control on the useful signal: Select the Power control on the useful signal check box if power control on the transmitted signal is to be considered. you can define the following parameters: Max.. on the uplink or downlink. - Note: - Interference via repeaters: Select how interference caused by repeaters should be taken into consideration. or both. - Under BER. you can define the following parameters: K factor: Select the K factor (the earth curvature factor) to be used in link analyses: Median value for each link: If you select this option. This option is useful if you have links with 2+0 configuration (i. links with two channels). User-defined Percentage: If you select this option. Atoll performs the link analysis for each channel and displays the results for the worst channel in terms of margin (i. Threshold Degradation: Enter the minimum degradation threshold.g. Same value for all links: If you select this option. you can define the following parameters: Power Control: Define whether automatic transmission power control is to be considered always on. Atoll considers co-channel interference when the difference between the interfering and interfered frequencies does not exceed the interfered bandwidth. Interfered Bandwidth: Define which sites are to be considered as interferers. the parameters you define will be used for quality and availability analysis. you can define the following parameters: Min. or on both the uplink and downlink. Calculation Details: Select the interference to be displayed in the results: none. In this context. Under Results. you can define the following options: Calculate BER1: Select Calculate BER1 if you want Atoll to perform link analysis for the BER1 value.Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll 4..e. Under Calculation Parameters. Click the General tab. On the Interference tab. You can choose from the following options: Co-channel Only: Only co-channel sites are considered as interferer sites. 5.5 times the interfered bandwidth. Ignore decoupling reduction when cross polarisation is not defined at the receiver: Select this option if you want Atoll to ignore decoupling reduction when cross polarisation is not defined at the receiver. always off or is to be calculated according to geometric correlation. On the Models tab. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 157 . a median value for the K factor will be used for each link in link analyses. Distance: Enter the maximum distance in metres that Atoll will search around each site to find potentially interfering sites. No Filter: There is no filter and all sites within the maximum distance are considered as interferers. Atoll performs the link analysis and displays the results for all channels. you can enter the percentage of the interfered bandwidth that Atoll should consider when searching for interferers. It also applies to parallel links. Calculate BER2: Select Calculate BER2 if you want Atoll to perform link analysis for the BER2 value. Under Calculation Parameters. Click the Interference tab. Atoll performs the link analysis and displays the result for the channel specified individually for Site A and Site B. objective selection. On the General tab. a site will be considered as an interferer when the difference between the interfering and interfered frequencies does not exceed 2. Calculated Port: Under Calculated Port. Same value for all links: If you select Same value for all links. select which channel should be displayed the results of a link analysis: All: If you select All. the parameters you define will be used for interference calculation.e. Correlation Area: Enter the surface in km2 of the correlation area. the value you enter will be used as the K factor for all links in link analyses. Atoll performs the link analysis using the values for BER1 and BER2 defined in the properties of each link. Worst channel engineering: If you select Worst channel engineering. you can define the following parameters: The link direction to be analysed: Select the link direction to be analysed: either A >> B. Therefore. Ignore interference between channels of a same link: Select this option if you want Atoll to ignore interference generated by channels of the same link on each other. parallel links are referred to as links sharing the same link extremities (e. you can define a value for BER 1 and BER 2 that Atoll will use for all links.

530-12. method based under Method. 530-11 and 530-12) are available.Q factor. This tab lists all clutter categories defined in Rec. Multipath Occurence: If you select recommendation ITU-R P. you can use either a simplified method or a method taking roughness into account to calculate the geoclimatic factor (K).Q. Erroneous Blocks: Under Erroneous Blocks you can define athe network level consideration values for the Residual Bit Error Rate (RBER). Rain Model: Select the model to be used to calculate rain attentuation. Click the Objectives tab. On the Objectives tab.530. ITU-R P. ITU-R P. Two attenuation models for rain (ITU recommendations. the parameters you define will select objectives. you can define the ratio between the different objectives considered in the global availability objective. define the exponent of the frequency.1058-2 and their characteristics.530-8.821 or ITU-T G. The type of ground is used to determine permittivity and conductivity values taken into account in reflection analysis. 838-1 and 838-3) are available. number of errors per burst for Bit Error Rate between 10-3 and BERSES and for Bit Error Rate between BERSES and RBER. 527-3. These weights are taken into consideration when calculating the performance objectives to be considered when analysing the microwave link unavailability due to rain and the unavailability due to equipment failures. Microwave link unavailability can be due either to rain (with its impact on propagation).530-10. 530-8. you can set the following parameters: Frequency Exponent: Under K. 20°C B: wet ground C: fresh water. K. 530-5. you can define how quality and availability objectives are selected. 8. Under Availability Objectives Apportionment. you can set further parameters under ITU-R P. 20°C G: ice (fresh water) - 9. select the Ignore Signal Enhancements check box if you want to ignore signal enhancements and XPD reduction in multi-path propagation. Six availability analysis methods (Crane and those based on different implemented ITU recommendations. Therefore. you can set the following parameters: Multi-Path Propagation: Under Multi-Path Propagation. ITU-R P. Click the Clutter Categories tab.530-5.530 recommendations.Q. ITU-R P. Method.826 recommendations or a customised objective). 20°C D: medium dry ground E: very dry ground F: pure water. K. or ITU-R P. The objectives can be selected according to the microwave link rate and the type of the objective (from ITU-T G. you can define the following parameters: Method: Select the method to be used to calculate availability.530-12. Vegetation with leaves: Select the Vegetation with leaves check box if you want Atoll to consider all clutter classes with this clutter category as vegetation zones with foliage.530-11. ITU-R P. Soil type: Select the type of ground as defined in Rec. to equipment failure. you can define the following parameters: Method: Select the method to be used to calculate quality: Vigants-Barnett. or ITU-R P. Click OK. If you select a method based on one of the ITU-R P. On the Clutter Categories tab.530-11. Selective Fadings: Under Selective Fadings you can define reference delay values for the secondary signal t (tau) for minimum and non minimum phase conditions. For each clutter category.530-10. Vegetation without leaves: Select the Vegetation without leaves check box if you want Atoll to consider all clutter classes with this clutter category as vegetation zones without foliage. 7.530 recommendations under Method. Method. Clicking the Browse button ( ) beside the Quality or Availability field opens a dialogue where you can define a priority for each selection criterion. - Under Quality. Under Performance Objectives Selection. ITU-R P. the global availability objective consists of three partial objectives for which you can define a weight. ITU-R P. 158 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . ITU-R P. you can define the following parameters: Reflective: Select the Reflective check box if you want Atoll to consider all clutter classes with this clutter category as relection areas. 530-10. define the distance.Atoll User Manual Under Availability. Method: If you selected K.Q.530: If you selected a method based on one of the ITU-R P. The following are the available types of ground: A: sea water (average salinity). the parameters you define will be used to analyse reflection and calculate vegetation losses.Q. If you select Vigants-Barnett. or it can be random. Reduction of XPD is taken into consideration when calculating unavailability due to multi-path and unavailability due to rain whereas signal enhancements have an impact on unavailability due to multi-path only. you can either enter the geoclimatic factor (K) value or use a simplified method or use a method taking roughness into account to calculate the geoclimatic factor (K). Distance: Under K.

Connections. Reliability. By assigning the link class with the appropriate performance objectives. effective earth curvature factor (ke) and the geoclimatic factor K. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. the Reliability tab. Right-click the link for which you want to set the calculation parameters. Click the Expand button ( 3. Geoclimatic. this performance level is never achieved due to continuously changing propagation conditions and possible problems with the equipment.2 Link Parameters The link parameters which affect calculations are the following: • Geoclimatic parameters: The geoclimatic parameters define the environment and the climatic zone in which the link is operating. • • • The link parameters which affect calculations can be defined for a single microwave link and then applied to all microwave links or to a group of microwave links that share the same characteristics. Connections. water vapour density. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 159 . Select Properties from the context menu. The context menu appears. In practice. 2. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. Radio. including climatic factor. For information on creating a link class.3. and Propagation tabs and are described here.3. 6. 5. you assign the performance objectives to the link. Propagation. 6. Propagation parameters: A propagation can optionally be defined to calculate the useful signal and the interfering signal. Radio. Link class: Each link class can have different performance objectives. The margin calculated by the propagation model defined for the useful signal is also used to calculate the quality and availability of the microwave link. and Display. Note: You can also access a link’s Properties dialogue by right-clicking the transmitter on the map and selecting Properties from the context menu. To define the calculation parameters for a single microwave link: 1. Defining calculation parameters is explained in the following sections: • • • "Defining Calculation Parameters for a Single Microwave Link" on page 159 "Defining Calculation Parameters for All Microwave Links" on page 163 "Defining Calculation Parameters for a Group of Microwave Links" on page 165. temperature. Reliability. The Properties dialogue appears. ) to expand the Links folder.102).Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll 6. If no propagation model is defined for the useful link.1 Defining Calculation Parameters for a Single Microwave Link You set the calculation parameters for a microwave link on three tabs of the link’s Properties dialogue: the Geoclimatic tab. and the Propagation tab. The microwave link Properties dialogue has several tabs: General. Under ideal circumstances a microwave link should be completely reliable 100% of the time. the target values for quality and availability as defined in the link class are used. and Display tabs. The link settings that affect calculations are on the Geoclimatic. rain intensity (exceeding 0. PL percentage. For an explanation of the options available on the General. 4.01% of time). see "Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management". Click the Geoclimatic tab (see Figure 6.2. Reliability parameters: The reliability parameters define the quality and availability of the microwave link. see "Microwave Link Classes" on page 154. earth curvature factor (k).

you can choose between Warm and Humid. The methods displayed are those set on the Models tab of the Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue. When using Crane as the availability calculation method. The geoclimatic parameters available depend on the selected quality and availability methods. On the Geoclimatic tab.Atoll User Manual Figure 6. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Temperature text box opens a dialogue where you can select the temperature 160 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . you can see the calculation methods used to analyse the microwave link quality and availability. you can define climate-related settings affecting the microwave link: Current Methods: Under Current Methods.102: Microwave link Properties dialogue . Temperate and Dry. The climatic zones available depend on the calculation methods selected on the Models tab of the Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue. To access all geoclimatic parameters independently of the methods you have selected. you can define the conditions under which the microwave operates: Climatic Zone: Select the climatic zone that best describes the climate in which the microwave link operates. click the Display All button under Current Methods. you can select the following climatic zones: Climatic Zone Polar (Dry) Polar (Moderate) Cold (Dry) Temperate Continental (Dry) Subtropical Arid (Dry) Cold (Moderate) Temperate Continental (Moderate) Temperate Continental (Wet) Temperate Maritime Subtropical Wet Tropical Moderate Tropical Type Crane Global Rain Zone A B Dry B1 D1 F B2 D2 D3 C E G H Continental Continental humid Humid When using Vigants-Barnett as quality calculation method. Temperature: Set the average temperature of the zone in which the microwave link operates.Geoclimatic tab 7. Atmospheric and Climatic Conditions: Under Atmospheric and Climatic Conditions.

ITU-R P. the rainfall observed 99. ITU-R P. Refractivity: Under Refractivity. you can enter the C factor value. ITU-R P. you can define the PL factor.836-3.01% of the average year (or.530-5. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Refractivity gradient near the earth’s surface text box opens a dialogue where you can select the refractivity gradient based on Rec. 530-5 or Rec. ITU-R P. "Average Terrain" and "Montainous Terrain". K models geo-climatic and terrain effects on climate. ITU-R P. using a userdefined reference altitude. in other words. Atoll displays the C factor value corresponding to the defined climate zone.530-12: Under ITU-R P. "Mountain" for terrestrial microwave links where the height of the lowest antenna in the link is higher than 700 m. you can define the Refractivity gradient near the earth’s surface in N-units per km. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Rainfall exceeded 0.837-4 or the rainfall exceeded 0. is displayed. The terrain types available depend on the calculation methods selected on the Models tab of the Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue. or based on Rec.530: The parameters found under Rec.530-5 and ITU-R P.530-5 or 530-8 methods.530 are those recommended by ITU-R P. or the rain height set in the geoclimatic file. ITU-R P. if you select Terrain-based Method.530-5. or the refractivity gradient set in the geoclimatic file. If you select User-defined under Multipath Occurence. as well as the percentage of the year that N is not exceeded. -8: Under ITU-R P. Rec.530 to calculate the quality of the microwave link: Water Vapour Density: Set the water vapour density in grams per cubic metre. you can choose between "Flat Terrain". K. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Water Vapour Density text box opens a dialogue where you can select the water vapour density based on Rec. calculated using the set parameters.) is less than -100 N-units⁄km for the worst average month) or based on Rec. If you are using ITU-R P. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Rain Height text box opens a dialogue where you can select the rain height based on Rec. If you are using using the VigantsBarnett method. the propagation condition factor for the VigantsBarnett method. Vigants-Barnett: Factor C: Parameters available under Vigants-Barnett depend on the option selected on the Models tab of the Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue.01% of the average year set in the geoclimatic file.530-5.Q method. PL is the percent of time the relative refractivity gradient is less than -100 N⁄Km. The rain height is the height of the top of the rain column above mean sea level from the 0°C isotherm. ITU-R P.839-3 (and select a season). or the refractivity gradient for less than 65 m. ITU-R P. K models geo-climatic and terrain effects on climate while Q is the factor for variables other than those dependent on distance and frequency. ITU-R P.835-3 (and select a season). for the K. Atmospheric Pressure: Set the atmospheric pressure in grams per cubic metre.835-3 (and select a season).1510-0. you can set the following parameters: ITU-R P.Q.530-12. ITU-R P. Clicking the button ( ) beside the K text box opens a dialogue where you can select the K factor based on Rec. Rec. Rainfall exceeded 0. If you select Simplified Method. ITU-R P. ITU-R P. you can define the K factor. or "Overwater" for microwave links over an extended expanse of water. Under Refractivity.. you can choose between "Plain Zone" for terrestrial microwave links where the height of the lowest antenna in the link is lower than 700 m. 530-10 and above (and select the simplified method where you also define the refractivity gradient (< 65 m. Relative Humidity: The Relative Humidity displayed is calculated using the defined water vapour density. Under Geoclimatic Factor. - - - © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 161 . ITU-R P. ITU-R P. The dialogue also displays the water vapour pressure in hectopascals (hPa) calculated using your data and based on Rec. or the water vapour density set in the geoclimatic file.Q.836-3 (and select the percentage of the average year where the defined water vapour density is exceeded).530. Atoll displays the C factor value corresponding to the defined climate zone and lets you select whether you want to take the terrain roughness into account.530-5.Q. or the atmospheric pressure set in the geoclimatic file.99% of the average year).) not exceeded during 1% of the average year or select the method with terrain roughness taken into account where you define the refractivity gradient and the terrain roughness). The PL factor can be found on the ITU-R maps.530-8 calculation methods. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Atmospheric Pressure text box opens a dialogue where you can select the atmospheric pressure based on Rec. ITU-R P. ITU-R P. you can define K. Geoclimatic Factor: The parameters under Geoclimatic Factor are used to calculate the quality of the microwave link and are broken down by calculation method. 530-8 (and select a terrain type and enter a value for C0 and for the percentage of time the refractivity gradient (< 100 m. -8.530: Under ITU-R P. or the temperature set in the geoclimatic file. Method: Under K. the k factor median value. This parameter is taken into account when using ITU-R P. you can enter the Rain Height (0°C Isotherm) in metres. ITU-R P. Finally.01% of the average year text box opens a dialogue where you can select the rainfall exceeded 0.Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll based on Rec. Method.453-9. "Lake" for microwave links over an expanse of water.01% of the average year: Set the rainfall exceeded 0. -8 and Vigants-Barnett.01% of the average year based on Rec. -8 and Vigants-Barnett: Under ITU-R P. you can select the Terrain Type.835-3 (and select a season).

By assigning the link class with the appropriate performance objectives. Atoll will interpolate to determine the corresponding sensitivity.Reliability tab 9. Click the Propagation tab (see Figure 6. Click the Reliability tab (see Figure 6. Figure 6. Bit Error Rate: Under Bit Error Rate. For information on creating a link class. you can set the MTTR (mean time to repair). On the Reliability tab. 10. you can select the link class.103: Microwave link Properties dialogue . If the value for BER that you enter is not defined in the properties of the equipment. 162 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Availability: Under Availability. you assign the performance objectives to the link. you can define reliability-related parameters: Link Class: Under Link Class. Atolldisplays the resulting sensitivity for each BER. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected link class. Each link class can have different performance objectives.Atoll User Manual 8. Clicking the Objectives button opens a dialogue where you can view and modify the performance objectives of the selected link class. The MTTR is taken into account when calculating unavailability due to failures if the microwave link is not equipped with a hot standby channel system. see "Microwave Link Classes" on page 154.103). you can set the values for BER 1 and BER 2.104).

Click OK. Select Open Table from the context menu. 6. the column names corresponding to the calculation parameters on the tabs of the microwave link’s Properties dialogue are: Geoclimatic tab: © Forsk 2010 Environment Type R001 (mm/h) Geoclimatic Factor (K) Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 163 . If no propagation model is selected. Right-click the Links folder. the quality and availability of the link will be defined by the respective target values defined in the link class. you can select the propagation model that will be used to calculate the path loss as well as the margin required for quality and availability for the microwave link. 3. for example. You can set the same calculation parameters for all microwave links at the same time by first defining the calculation parameters for a single microwave link and then copying the calculation parameters to all microwave links.2 Defining Calculation Parameters for All Microwave Links Under certain circumstances. you can define propagation-related parameters: Model used for the useful signal: Under Model used for the useful signal. as described in "Defining Calculation Parameters for a Single Microwave Link" on page 159. 2. Copy the defined calculation parameters to all microwave links. Locate the row in the Links Table with the microwave link whose calculation parameters you just updated. On the Propagation tab. Define the calculation parameters for a single microwave link. 5. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window.3. Model used for the interfering signal: Under Model used for the interfering signal.Propagation tab 11. - 12. in a highly homogeneous network. To define the calculation parameters for all microwave links: 1. 2.2. The Links Table appears. In the Links Table. To copy the defined calculation parameters to all microwave links: 1.104: Microwave link Properties dialogue. 4. you can select the propagation model that will be used to calculate interference. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. you will want to set the same calculation parameters for all microwave links. The context menu appears.Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll Figure 6.

Q Rain Height (m) Atmospheric Pressure (hPa) Refractivity Factor C Climatic Zone Class (EPO) Hot Standby BER 2nd BER MTTR (h) Propagation Model Interference Model Reliability tab: Propagation tab: 6. c. Repeat the procedure to copy the modified values into the remaining cells above the modified microwave link. copy the values into all cells above the modified cell: a. For each cell with a calculation parameter that you have already modified.Atoll User Manual PL (%) Water Vapour (g/m3) Temperature (°C) Factor K. copy the values into the cells below the modified cell: 164 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Drag upwards to select the cells into which you want to copy the data. For each cell with a calculation parameter that you have already modified. Click the modified cell. b. 8. 7. The contents of the modified cell are copied into all cells selected. Select Edit > Fill > Up.

for example. b. 2. Define the calculation parameters for a single microwave link. Select Edit > Fill > Down. in a network that spans a great distance. From the Group By submenu. Select the microwave links to which you want to copy the calculation parameters by: Grouping the microwave links (see "Grouping Microwave Links" on page 165) Sorting the microwave links (see "Sorting Microwave Links" on page 166) Filtering the microwave links (see "Filtering Microwave Links" on page 168) 3. as described in "Defining Calculation Parameters for a Single Microwave Link" on page 159.3 Defining Calculation Parameters for a Group of Microwave Links Under certain circumstances. Copy the defined calculation parameters to the selected group of microwave links. 3. The context menu appears. 2. Repeat the procedure to copy the modified values into the remaining cells below the modified microwave link. select the property by which you want to group the microwave links. 4. you will want to set the same calculation parameters for defined groups of microwave links but not for all links. Right-click the Links folder. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. You can set the same calculation parameters for defined groups of microwave links by first defining the calculation parameters for a single microwave link.2. and then copying the calculation parameters to all microwave links in that group. Grouping Microwave Links To select the microwave links to which you want to copy the calculation parameters by grouping: 1. Click the modified cell. 6. The microwave links in the folder are grouped in separate folders by that property. Ensure that you chose a property that all the microwave links you want to modify and the link with the modified calculation parameters have in common.3. Drag downwards to select the cells into which you want to copy the data.Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll a. 9. sorting the microwave links according to their common attributes. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 165 . c. The contents of the modified cell are copied into all cells selected. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. To define the calculation parameters for a group of microwave links: 1.

b. The Links Table appears. the column names corresponding to the calculation parameters on the tabs of the microwave link’s Properties dialogue are: Geoclimatic tab: Environment Type R001 (mm/h) Geoclimatic Factor (K) PL (%) Water Vapour (g/m3) Temperature (°C) Factor K. 6. 4. you can select additional properties by selecting More Fields from the Group By submenu. 5. 6. Select either Sort Ascending or Sort Descending from the context menu. The Links Table appears. 166 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . The context menu appears. 7.Q Rain Height (m) Atmospheric Pressure (hPa) Refractivity Factor C Climatic Zone Class (EPO) Hot Standby BER 2nd BER MTTR (h) Propagation Model Interference Model Reliability tab: Propagation tab: 8. Important: Ensure that you only select the cells of the microwave links you want to modify. Select Open Table from the context menu. 3. Click the modified cell. Drag upwards to select the cells into which you want to copy the data.Atoll User Manual Note: If the range of properties available in the Group By submenu has been configured as explained in "Configuring the Group By Submenu" on page 57. For each cell with a calculation parameter that you have already modified. The context menu appears. Locate the row in the Links Table with the microwave link whose calculation parameters you just updated. Right-click the table column with the parameter you want to sort on. Right-click the folder with the grouped microwave links. Copy the calculation parameters from the modified microwave link to the other microwave links in the group as explained in "Defining Calculation Parameters for All Microwave Links" on page 163. Right-click the Links folder. Once you have finished copying the calculation parameters. 7. 2. Select Open Table from the context menu. For information on using the dialogue that appears. In the Links Table. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. 5. The context menu appears. Sorting Microwave Links To sort the microwave links to which you want to copy the calculation parameters: 1. copy the values into all cells in the group above the modified cell: a. you can ungroup the links by right-clicking the Links folder and selecting Group By > None from the context menu. see "Configuring the Group By Submenu" on page 57. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window.

Select Edit > Fill > Down. Select Edit > Fill > Up. Click the modified cell. b. Repeat the procedure to copy the modified values into the remaining cells in the group above the modified microwave link. 9. d. 10. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 167 .Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll c. For each cell with a calculation parameter that you have already modified. The contents of the modified cell are copied into all cells selected. Drag downwards to select the cells into which you want to copy the data. Important: Ensure that you only select the cells of the microwave links you want to modify. c. Drag downwards to select the cells into which you want to copy the data. copy the values into the cells in the group below the modified cell: a.

3. You can now filter on a value in the table. 4. 5. Right-click the Links folder. 2.106 on page 169). Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. Select Open Table from the context menu. or you can use a value these microwave links do not have. You can either use a value that all microwave links to which you want to copy calculation parameters have in common with the microwave link you previously modified. 220 MHz) 168 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . You can now modify these microwave links as you would normally do with the entire Links table (see Figure 6.105: Filtering by selection (Sub-Band A>> B: 18 GHz. Select the value to filter on. Filter Excluding Selection: All microwave links without the selected value or values are displayed.Atoll User Manual The contents of the modified cell are copied into all cells selected. Figure 6.105 on page 168). Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. The Links Table appears. You can now modify these records or make calculations on them as you would normally do with the entire Links table(see Figure 6. press CTRL as you click the other values. Filtering Microwave Links To filter the microwave links to which you want to copy the calculation parameters: 1. To select more than one value. Right-click the cell and select one of the following from the context menu: Filter by Selection: All microwave links with the selected value or values are displayed. 6. The context menu appears.

Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll Figure 6. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 169 .106: Filtering excluding selection (Sub-Band A>> B: 18 GHz. Copy the calculation parameters from the modified microwave link to the other microwave links in the group as explained in "Defining Calculation Parameters for All Microwave Links" on page 163. For more information on advanced filtering. 7. 220 MHz) Note: You can use advanced data filtering to combine several criteria in different fields to create complex filters. see "Advanced Data Filtering" on page 63.

Atoll User Manual 170 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .

Chapter 7 Microwave Link Project Management .

Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management

7

Microwave Link Project Management
The microwave links module enables you to plan, design, and analyse microwave link networks. Using Atoll's microwave links module, microwave link networks can be designed and analysed in separate Atoll projects as well as within 2G (GMS/GPRS/EGPRS) and 3G (CDMA2000/UMTS/WCDMA) mobile network projects. Using Atoll's microwave links module, you can define and model frequency bands and sub-bands, antennas, radio equipment, feeder equipment, passive repeaters, simple, multi-hop, and point-to-multipoint links. You can define and set target performance objectives in terms of link classes and performance objectives, defining the quality and availability targets. You can determine link budgets over a single link, over multiple connected links (multi-hop links), or over a hub with several links (point-to-multipoint links). You can also carry out end-to-end reliability analyses, interference analyses, and frequency planning. Atoll also enables you to design your microwave link networks while taking future growth and enhancements into consideration. Comprehensive analysis features in the Atoll microwave link module enable the study of simple, multi-hop, and point-tomultipoint microwave links in any network. Any microwave link is considered operational when it globally satisfies the required quality and availability criteria set by the operator. Any microwave link is assessed generally in terms of the link's robustness, i.e., the data transmission should undergo the least possible errors, the link should suffer the least number of failures (usually measured per year) and the duration of these failures should also be as short as possible. All these criteria are described in detail in the ITU standards and recommendations. Atoll follows these standards and enables the user to set in-depth quality and availability targets for the network being designed. Furthermore, it is fundamental to the correct performance of a microwave radio link that line-of-sight be available, i.e., that there be a clear transmission path between the two nodes of the link. The electromagnetic signal disperses as it moves away from source, and therefore the line-of-sight clearance must take this dispersion into account and attention should be paid to objects near the direct signal path to ensure the required signal levels reach the receiving antenna. This is referred to as "Fresnel Zone" clearance. Atoll's profile analysis feature permits allows you to view the line of sight, Fresnel zone clearance, and reflective surfaces along the link's profile. Real-life microwave links do not operate in ideal environments. As it is not always possible to have a direct line-of-sight connection between two extremities, repeaters are employed as a workaround in order to create a pseudo-direct link. Atoll fully models the design and use of microwave repeaters, and allows two repeaters to be inserted within a microwave link. Performance improvement techniques such as frequency and space diversity at reception are also modelled. Since several links can share their extremities (start or end), the description of a microwave links network in Atoll is divided into two folders on the Data tab of the Explorer window: • • The Sites folder, which contains the set of points that can be used as extremities for links. This folder can also contain sites for 2G and 3G mobile network projects in the case of incorporated mobile/microwave projects. The Microwave Radio Links folder, which contains the definitions of links, multi-hop links, point-to-multipoint links, the quality targets and performance objectives, etc. Each link refers to at least two separate sites in the Sites folder.

7.1

Designing a Microwave Link Network
Figure 7.107 depicts the process of creating and planning a microwave link network. The steps involved in planning a microwave link network are described below. The numbers refer to Figure 7.107. 1. Open an existing microwave link document or create a new one ( 1 ). You can open an existing Atoll document by selecting File > Open. You can create a new Atoll document as explained in "Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project".

2. Configure the microwave link network by defining network parameters ( 2 ). You can define the equipment such as antennas, waveguides, and cables used in the network (see "Chapter 4: Antennas and Equipment") You define and modify microwave frequency bands (see "Chapter 5: Managing Frequency Bands and Subbands").

3. Add sites and carry out basic evaluations of the candidate sites and locate more suitable locations for candidate sites ( 3 ). You can add sites or modify existing ones (see "Creating or Modifying a Site" on page 175). You can evaluate the location of existing sites (see "Site Survey Tools" on page 176) and search for new candidate sites (see "Search Tools for New Sites" on page 184).

4. Create microwave links between sites ( 4 ). You can create a microwave link (see "Creating or Modifying a Microwave Link" on page 188) based on a link template. If necessary , you can modify the template on which new links are based (see "Managing Microwave Link Templates" on page 190). If necessary, you can create repeaters along microwave links between sites. You can create multi-hop microwave links ("Creating Multi-hops" on page 208).

-

© Forsk 2010

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

173

Atoll User Manual 5. Analyse the microwave network. You can analyse the path profile (see "Analysing the Path Profile" on page 193), adding passive repeaters if necessary (see "Adding a Microwave Passive Repeater" on page 201) ( 5 ). You can analyse the quality and reliability of the network (see "Analysing Microwave Link Reliability" on page 203) ( 6 ). You can study reflection along the microwave link profile (see "Studying Reflection" on page 210) ( 7 ). You can interference along the microwave link profile (see "Analysing Interference" on page 221) ( 8 ).

6. Plan link channels ( 9 ) "Planning Microwave Link Channels" on page 216.

Optimisation and analysis are iterative steps. In some cases, the last four steps can be repeated in order to achieve the optimum solution for the network. 7. If necessary, modify network parameters to study the network with a different frequency plan ( 10 ). After modifying the network’s frequency plan, you must perform steps 7 and 8 again.

Figure 7.107: Planning a microwave link network - workflow

7.2

Planning and Optimising Microwave Sites
As described in "Chapter 2: Starting an Atoll Project", you can start an Atoll document from a template, with no sites, or from a database with a set of sites. As you work on your Atoll document, you will still need to create sites and modify existing ones. In Atoll, a site is defined as a geographical point supporting one or more microwave links. Atoll enables you to verify the characteristics of each candidate in order to chose the best site. Additionally, Atoll has tools that allow you to search for new locations for sites. In this section, the following are explained: • • • "Creating Sites" on page 174 "Site Survey Tools" on page 176 "Search Tools for New Sites" on page 184.

7.2.1

Creating Sites
When you create a microwave site, you create only the geographical point. The created site can then support one or more microwave links. In this section, the following are described: • • "Site Description" on page 175 "Creating or Modifying a Site" on page 175.

174

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

© Forsk 2010

Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management

7.2.1.1

Site Description
The parameters of a site can be found in the site’s Properties dialogue. The Properties dialogue has two tabs: • The General tab (see Figure 7.108):

Figure 7.108: New Site dialogue Name: Atoll enters a default name for each new site. You can modify the default name. If you want to change the default name that Atoll gives to new sites, see the Administrator Manual. Position: By default, Atoll places the new site at the centre of the map window. You can modify the location of the site. Altitude: The altitude, as defined by the DTM for the location specified under Position, is given here. You can specify the actual altitude under Real, if you want. If an altitude is specified here, Atoll will use this value for calculations. Comments: You can enter comments in this field if you want. Pylon Height: You can define the height of the structure on which you can install antennas. Atoll can use this height in several analyses (site analysis, antenna height optimisation, etc.). Support Type: You can describe the nature of site. This field is for information only.

-

The Pylon tab:

7.2.1.2

Creating or Modifying a Site
You can modify an existing site or you can create a new site. You can access the properties of a site, described in "Site Description" on page 175, through the site’s Properties dialogue. How you access the Properties dialogue depends on whether you are creating a new site or modifying an existing site. To create or modify a site: 1. If you are creating a new site: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Right-click the Sites folder. The context menu appears. c. Select New from the context menu. The Sites New Element Properties dialogue appears (see Figure 7.108 on page 175). 2. If you are modifying the properties of an existing site: a. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Sites folder.

c. Right-click the site you want to modify. The context menu appears. d. Select Properties from the context menu. The site’s Properties dialogue appears. 3. Modify the parameters described in "Site Description" on page 175. 4. Click OK.

Tip:

If you are creating several sites at the same time, or modifying several existing sites, you can do it quickly by editing or pasting the data directly in the Sites table. You can open the Sites table by right-clicking the Sites folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Open Table from the context menu. For information on copying and pasting data, see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 47.

© Forsk 2010

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

175

Atoll User Manual

7.2.2

Site Survey Tools
Atoll provides several tools to enable you to evaluate the line of sight around a site or between candidate sites. In this section, the following are explained. • • • • • "Displaying the Line of Sight Area Around One Site" on page 176 "Analysing the Line of Sight Between Candidate Sites" on page 176 "Finding the Best Route Between Two Sites" on page 179 "Displaying the Terrain Profile Between Candidate Sites" on page 180 "Displaying a 360° View Around One Site" on page 181

7.2.2.1

Displaying the Line of Sight Area Around One Site
Atoll allows you to display the line-of-sight area around a site in the map window. To display the line-of-sight area around a site: 1. Right-click the site either on the map, or in the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. The context menu appears. 2. Select Line of Sight Area from the context menu. The Line of Sight Area dialogue appears. 3. Under Calculation Parameters, define the following parameters: Max Distance: Enter the maximum distance around the selected site that should be taken into consideration. Site Height: Enter the transmitter site height, taking into consideration, for example, building height. Receiver Height: Enter the receiver site height, taking into consideration, for example, building height. Factor k: Enter a value for the earth curvature factor.

4. Select one of the following: Line of Sight Clearance: Select Line of Sight Clearance if you want to study the line of sight between the transmitter and receiver sites. Ellipsoid Clearance: Select Ellipsoid Clearance if you want to study the percentage of clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid and define the following: Frequency: Enter the operating frequency you want to study. Clearance: Enter the percentage of clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid.

5. Under View, define the display parameters of the line-of-sight area: To set the transparency of the displayed line-of-sight area, move the slider. To define a colour for the displayed line-of-sight area, click the Colour button and select a colour from the palette that appears.

6. Click OK. Atoll calculates and displays the line-of-sight area around the selected site. To delete the line-of-sight area around a site: 1. Right-click the site either on the map, or in the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. The context menu appears. 2. Select Delete Line of Sight Area from the context menu.

7.2.2.2

Analysing the Line of Sight Between Candidate Sites
In Atoll, you can analyse the line of sight (LOS) between candidate sites. The analysis can be done for one particular site if one extremity of the microwave link is already locked or for all sites. In the analysis, Atoll considers the selected site(s) and all sites located within the focus zone; if no focus zone is defined, Atoll will use the computation zone. For information on the focus zone, see "Using a Focus Zone" on page 31 and for information on the computation zone, see "Using a Computation Zone" on page 30. To calculate a LOS report for one particular site: 1. Right-click the site either on the map or in the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. The context menu appears. 2. Select Line of Sight Report from the context menu. The Line of Sight Parameters dialogue appears (see Figure 7.109).

176

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

© Forsk 2010

Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management

Figure 7.109: Setting the calculation parameters for a line of sight report 3. Click the Calculation Parameters tab. 4. Under Height - Transmitter Side and Height - Receiver Side you can select how pylon height will be defined on the transmitter and receiver side of the microwave link. Select one of the following to define the pylon height for the transmitter and the receiver: Use the pylon height defined by site: If you select Use the pylon height defined by site, Atoll will use the pylon height defined by site for each line of sight. Use the default height: If you select Use the default height, Atoll will use the pylon height you define in the Default Height box.

5. Define the Maximum Distance around the selected site to be considered in the line of sight analysis. 6. Under Earth Curvature Factors, define two k factor values. 7. Under Penetration Condition, define the following parameters: Take clutter into account in diffraction: Select the Take clutter into account in diffraction check box if you want to use clutter information when calculating diffraction in the line of sight. Frequency Band: Select the frequency band to be used when calculating the line of sight from the list. The average frequency of the selected frequency band is displayed in the Frequency box.

8. Click the Clutter tab. On the Clutter tab you can set clutter-related parameters that will be used to calculate the line of sight. The settings on the Clutter tab are independent from any clutter parameters you might have set for the propagation model. For each clutter class, you can set the following: Receiver Height: You can define a receiver height for each clutter class. It is not used when calculating the line of sight between existing sites. Clearance: If you want, you can define a clearance around each site for each clutter class. The clearance is used when calculating diffraction. Both ground altitude and clutter height are considered along the whole profile except over a specific distance around the sites (clearance), where Atoll bases its calculations only on the DTM.

9. Click the Table tab. On the Table tab you can define the content of the report. Atoll displays a default set of fields and lets you select other information to be included in the report. a. Click Add. The Field Selection dialogue appears. b. In the Field Selection dialogue, select the fields that you want to display in the report. You can select contiguous fields by clicking the first field, pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field. You can select non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRL and clicking each fields separately. To select a field to be included in the report, select the field in the Available Fields list and click to move it to the Selected Fields list. To remove a field from the list of Selected Fields, select the field in the Selected Fields list and click to remove it. To change the order of the fields, select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list. The objects will be displayed in the order of the fields in the Selected Fields list, from top to bottom.

c. Click OK to return to the Table tab. 10. Click OK. Atoll displays the selected results in the Line of Sight Report table for each site in the focus zone if available and computation zone if there is no focus zone. As well, Atoll displays a terrain section on the map between each pair of sites (see "Displaying the Terrain Profile Between Candidate Sites" on page 180).

© Forsk 2010

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

177

Atoll User Manual The Line of Sight Report table contains the following default information for each pair of sites. Site1 is the studied site and Site2 a candidate site within the focus zone if available and computation zone if there is no focus zone. Site1: Site1 is the transmitting site of the pair of sites. Site2: Site2 is the receiving site of the pair of sites. Distance (m): The distance between the sites. Line of Sight (k1) (%): The clearance or penetration of the Fresnel ellipsoid in percentage for the first k factor value. The result can be between -100 and 100%. A value from -100 to 0% corresponds to the percentage of penetration of the upper half of the Fresnel ellipsoid. A value from 0 to 100% corresponds to the percentage of clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid (see Figure 7.110). Line of Sight (k2) (%): The clearance or penetration of the Fresnel ellipsoid in percentage for the second k factor value. Antenna 1 Height (m): The height of the transmitting antenna. Antenna 2 Height (m):The height of the receiving antenna. Frequency (MHz): The mean frequency used to calculate the line of sight between the transmitting site and the receiving site. Direction (°): The angle from Site1 to Site2 in the horizontal plane.

-

Figure 7.110: Line of sight clearance

Tip:

If you double-click one terrain section in the Line of Sight Report table, Atoll will automatically center it in the map and will display its profile in the Terrain Section tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window.

You can remove the line-of-sight sections by selecting Delete Line of Sight Lines from the site’s context menu. To calculate a LOS report for all sites: 1. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 2. Right-click the Sites folder. The context menu appears. 3. Select Line of Sight Report from the context menu. The Line of Sight Parameters dialogue appears. 4. Click the Calculation Parameters tab. 5. Under Height - Transmitter Side and Height - Receiver Side you can select how pylon height will be defined on the transmitter and receiver side of the microwave link, respectively. Select one of the following to define the pylon height for the transmitter and the receiver: Use the pylon height defined by site: If you select Use the pylon height defined by site, Atoll will use the pylon height defined by site for each line of sight. Use the default height: If you select Use the default height, Atoll will use the pylon height you define in the Default Height box.

6. Define the Maximum Distance around the selected site to be considered in the line-of-sight analysis. 7. Under Earth Curvature Factors, define two k factor values. 8. Under Penetration Condition, define the following parameters: Take clutter into account in diffraction: Select the Take clutter into account in diffraction check box if you want to use clutter information when calculating diffraction in the line of sight. Frequency Band: Select the frequency band to be used when calculating the line of sight from the list. The average frequency of the selected frequency band is displayed in the Frequency box.

9. Click the Clutter tab. On the Clutter tab you can set clutter-related parameters that will be used to calculate the line of sight. The settings on the Clutter tab are independent from any clutter parameters you might have set for the propagation model. For each clutter class, you can set the following: Receiver Height: You can define a receiver height for each clutter class. It is not used when calculating the line of sight between sites. Clearance: If you want, you can define a clearance around each site for each clutter class. The clearance is used when calculating diffraction. Both ground altitude and clutter height are considered along the whole profile except over a specific distance around the sites (clearance), where Atoll bases its calculations only on the DTM.

178

Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited

© Forsk 2010

select the fields that you want to display in the report. Click OK. Right-click the target site either on the map. To change the order of the fields. 11. or in the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. A value from 0 to 100% corresponds to the percentage of clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid (see Figure 7. the shortest path. As well. To find the best route between two sites: 1. Select one of the following to define the pylon height for the transmitter and the receiver: Use the pylon height defined by site: If you select Use the pylon height defined by site. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 179 . from top to bottom. On the Table tab you can define the content of the report. A value from -100 to 0% corresponds to the percentage of penetration of the upper half of the Fresnel ellipsoid. Site2: Site2 is the receiving site of the pair of sites. see "Using a Focus Zone" on page 31 and for information on the computation zone. Frequency: The mean frequency used to calculate the line of sight between the transmitting site and the receiving site. Maximum Number of Hops: The maximum number of hops allowed between starting and target sites. If you want. Use the default height: If you select Use the default height. if no focus zone is defined.e. The context menu appears. Atoll will use the pylon height you define in the Default Height box. Atoll will use the computation zone. Atolllists all sites in the focus zone if available and computation zone if there is no focus zone (for information on the focus zone. 6. define the following parameters: Source Site: The starting site. In the Field Selection dialogue.Receiver Side you can select how pylon height will be defined on the transmitter and receiver side of the microwave link. 5. The Field Selection dialogue appears. Antenna 1 Height: The height of the transmitting antenna. Under Earth Curvature Factors. Antenna 2 Height: The height of the receiving antenna. To select a field to be included in the report. 2. define the first k factor value. In the analysis. Line of Sight (k1) (%): The clearance or penetration of the Fresnel ellipsoid in percentage for the first k factor value. - 4. a. Site1: Site1 is the transmitting site of the pair of sites.2. c. see "Using a Computation Zone" on page 30). select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list.e. the path containing the least of hops. 3. The result can be between -100 and 100%. see "Using a Focus Zone" on page 31 and for information on the computation zone.2. Select Routing from the context menu. Define the Maximum Distance around the selected site to be considered in the line-of-sight analysis. Atoll displays a terrain section on the map between each pair of sites (see "Displaying the Terrain Profile Between Candidate Sites" on page 180). select the field in the Available Fields list and click to move it to the Selected Fields list. Click Add. Distance: The distance between the sites. The Line of Sight Report table contains the following default information for each pair of sites. Click the Calculation Parameters tab. 7. The routes can consist of several hops and have different lengths. The objects will be displayed in the order of the fields in the Selected Fields list.3 Finding the Best Route Between Two Sites Atoll allows you to find all routes between two sites fulfilling line-of-sight criteria. Click OK to return to the Table tab. Minimise the total path length: Select this option if you want Atollto display the best solution in terms of distance. Atoll displays the results in the Line of Sight Report table for each site in the focus zone if available and computation zone if there is no focus zone. On the Routing Options tab. Atoll displays a default set of fields and lets you select other information to be included in the report.110). Atoll will use the pylon height defined by site for each line of sight. For information on the focus zone. pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field. i. Under Height . You can select contiguous fields by clicking the first field. Atoll considers the selected sites and all sites located within the focus zone. Click the Table tab. The Line of Sight Parameters dialogue appears. i. see "Using a Computation Zone" on page 30. Site1 is the studied site and Site2 a candidate site within the focus zone if available and computation zone if there is no focus zone.Transmitter Side and Height . To remove a field from the list of Selected Fields. Minimise the number of hops to reach the target: Select this option if you want Atollto display the best solution in terms of number of hops. Atoll can display the route with the least of hops or the shortest route. You can select non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRL and clicking each fields separately. 7. Line of Sight (k2) (%): The clearance or penetration of the Fresnel ellipsoid in percentage for the second k factor value. b. - You can remove the line-of-sight lines by selecting Delete Line of Sight Lines from the context menu of the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management 10. select the field in the Selected Fields list and click to remove it.

Click the Height Profile button ( ) on the toolbar. 3. you can clear the visibility check box of the Clutter Classes folder on the Geo tab. 9. Atoll displays the terrain height along the profile as well as clutter classes and clutter heights when the visibility box of the Clutter Classes folder on the Geo tab is selected. The number of columns named "Node#" displayed in the Routing to Site table depends on the maximum number of hops defined in the Routing Options tab. 2. 5. Atoll displays the results in the Routing to Site table. The context menu appears. Ellipsoid Clearance: Select Ellipsoid Clearance if you want to study the percentage of clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid. you can set the following: Receiver Height: You can define a receiver height for each clutter class. The profile between both sites appears on the Terrain Section tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. Then. b. indicating it is selected. indicating it is selected. Clearance: If you want. 6. Node1: The name of the source site selected in the Routing Options tab.Atoll User Manual 8. Right-click the Terrain Section tab. The Routing to Site table contains the following information for each route.2. A blue ellipsoid indicates the Fresnel zone between both sites. When the frame appears around the site. You can remove the line of sight lines by selecting Delete Line of Sight Lines from the context menu of the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. The clearance is used when calculating diffraction. Atoll will use the receiver height defined per clutter class on the Clutter tab of the Line of Sight Parameters dialogue. In addition. define the percentage of Clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid and select the Frequency band to be considered when calculating the line of sight (the average frequency of the selected frequency band is displayed in the Frequency box). you can define a clearance around each site for each clutter class. When the frame appears around the site. click to create the second analysis point. By default. Atoll displays terrain sections on the map between each site of routes (see "Displaying the Terrain Profile Between Candidate Sites" on page 180). see "Analysing the Line of Sight Between Candidate Sites" on page 176. Click OK.4 Displaying the Terrain Profile Between Candidate Sites In Atoll. Note: You can set further options using the Line of Sight Parameters dialogue. For a description of the options available in the Line of Sight Parameters dialogue. 4. click to create the first analysis point. Distance: The length of the route. Node#: The name of sites been through by the route and the name of the target site. define the following parameters: a. It is not used when calculating the line of sight between existing sites. you can check the terrain profile between two microwave sites. where Atoll bases its calculations only on the DTM. Select the Take clutter into account in diffraction check box if you want to use clutter information when calculating diffraction in the line of sight. 180 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 7. Click the Clutter tab. The settings on the Clutter tab are independent from any clutter parameters you might have set for the propagation model. For each clutter class. Atoll considers the pylon heights defined for the selected sites to determine the profile. Antenna Height Defined per Clutter Class: If you select Antenna Height Defined per Clutter Class. Both ground altitude and clutter height are considered along the whole profile except over a specific distance around the sites (clearance). Atoll will use the pylon height defined on each site. 10. You can open the Line of Sight Parameters dialogue by clicking the arrow next to the Height Profile button ( ) on the toolbar and selecting Properties. Move the pointer to another site on the map. If you do not want to display the clutter along the profile. You can modify them as well as the studied frequency in the Terrain Section Properties dialogue. Under Penetration Condition. Atoll will use the pylon height you define in the Default Height box of the Line of Sight Parameters dialogue. Select how pylon height will be defined on both sites of the microwave link by clicking the arrow next to the Height Profile button ( ) on the toolbar and selecting one of the following: - Antenna Height Defined by Site: If you select Antenna Height Defined by Site. To study the terrain profile between two microwave sites: 1.2. Select one of the following: Line of Sight Clearance: Select Line of Sight Clearance if you want to study the line of sight between the transmitter and receiver sites. Default Antenna Height: If you select Default Antenna Height. On the Clutter tab you can set clutter-related parameters that will be used to calculate the line of sight. Move the pointer to the site on the map.

Click OK to close the dialogue and apply the parameters. Select 360° View from the context menu. you can colour them according to the percentage of clearance/ penetration of the Fresnel zone. its properties are based on the selected link template. 7. If you have several terrain sections displayed on the map. The value can vary between -100 and 100%. Atoll uses the site heights. 4.2. Pylon 1 Height (m): The pylon height on Site1 to be considered.111): © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 181 . The context menu appears. - 9. To perform a 360° view at any site: 1. In order to calculate the Fresnel ellipsoid. On the map." Under Field. In the Terrain Section Properties dialogue. 2. Click the Height Profile button ( ) on the toolbar. the k factor value and the frequency used for the LOS report calculation. The Terrain Section Properties dialogue appears.5 Displaying a 360° View Around One Site You can display a 360° view around each site. Line of Sight (%): The percentage of clearance/penetration of the Fresnel zone. 1. For information on changing display properties. Distance (m): The distance between Site1 and Site2. see "Display Properties of Objects" on page 21. It displays a Fresnel ellipsoid between both sites.2. You can change the value intervals and their displayed colour. Select Properties. Right-click the Terrain Sections folder and select Properties from the context menu. click the terrain section you want to analyse. The Terrain Section Properties dialogue appears. 2. right-click the terrain section you want to use for the microwave link design. select "Value Intervals. Pylon 2 Height (m): The pylon height on Site2 to be considered. Click the Geo tab of the Explorer window. Atoll adds the new microwave link in the Links folder. and terrain height and clutter along the profile. Select the Display tab and define the following parameters: Under Display Type.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management 7. Site1: The Site1 name. Right-click the site either directly on the map or in the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. Frequency (MHz): The frequency to be considered. select "Visibility". Choose the Create Link command in the context menu. 1. 8. A value from -100 to 0% corresponds to the percentage of penetration of the upper half of the Fresnel ellipsoid. 3. If you have previously calculated a LOS report on a site or a group of sites (see "Analysing the Line of Sight Between Candidate Sites" on page 176). Atoll opens the Terrain Section tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. 2. you can use any terrain section to create a microwave link. On the map. 3. you have the following parameters: Id: The terrain section reference number. 2. Then. Displaying 360° view around a site helps you to determine if the site is a good candidate and if it is visible from the other sites. A value from 0 to 100% corresponds to the percentage of clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid. Site2: The Site2 name. Click OK. proceed as follows: 1. The 360° View tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window opens (see Figure 7.

Atoll displays the terrain height along the profile as well as clutter classes and clutter heights when the visibility box of the Clutter Classes folder on the Geo tab is selected. If it is entirely hidden by an obstable. the line is dotted. the visible part is represented by a solid line whereas the hidden part is indicated by a dotted line. - 182 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . The Terrain Section tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window opens. Note: The 360° View tab does not display any depth of field. The direction (in °). Atoll displays a tool tip with the following information: The site coordinates (in the display coordinate system). Each neighbour site is indicated by a vertical red line and its symbol. Finally. Its distance from the studied site (in m). Two purple markers on both sides of the 360° View tab show the pylon height (i. To get information about a receiver site: Place the mouse cursor on the site in the 360° View tab.e. The altitude (in metres) is reported on the vertical axis and the direction (in °) on the horizontal axis. the maximum height not to be exceeded if you install an antenna on the site) defined for the studied site. The distance from the studied site (in m). This representation helps you select a receiver site among neighbours and determine at which height you should install an antenna on the receiver site. The height of the studied site is indicated by a blue dotted line. the line is solid.Atoll User Manual Figure 7. A special pointer ( ) pinpoints the location of the current point in the map window. To view the exact location of a high elevation point in the map window: Click a point on the line indicating the highest elevation points in the 360° View tab. To get information about a high elevation point: Place the mouse cursor on a point on the line indicating the highest elevation points in the 360° View tab. The altitude (in m). The pylon height (in m). The site is automatically selected and centered in the map window. The 360° View tab provides you with the following options: To center the receiver site in the map window: Click the site in the 360° View tab.111: 360° View Tool The 360° View tab shows the points of highest elevations in every direction around the selected site. The line lengths and the symbol position on the line depend on the receiver height defined in the 360° View Properties dialogue. The line position on the vertical axis depends on the site altitude which includes the Earth curvature. if a site is partly visible from the studied site. Atoll displays a tool tip with the following information: The point coordinates (in the display coordinate system). The curvature of the Earth (in m). To return from the Terrain Section tab to the 360° View tab: Click the 360° View tab in the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. Neighbour sites around the studied one are displayed according to their directions. - To display the terrain profile between the studied site and the receiver site: Right-click the site in the 360° View tab and select See Terrain Section from the context menu. If the site is entirely visible from the studied site. The direction (in °).

The clutter height at the point (in m). 2.Receiver Side you can select how pylon height will be defined on the transmitter and receiver side of the microwave link.Transmitter Side and Height . Atoll displays two markers on both sides of the window to represent the pylon height defined for the studied site. you can define a clearance around each site for each clutter class. respectively. 7. Under Earth Curvature Factors. where Atoll bases its calculations only on the DTM. Under Penetration Condition. Right-click the 360° view tab. To change the angle of view and the azimuth of the studied site: Click the following buttons available on both sides of the 360° View tab. Click the Calculation Parameters tab. 3. define the percentage of Clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid and select the Frequency band to be considered when calculating the line of sight (the average frequency of the selected frequency band is displayed in the Frequency box). Both ground altitude and clutter height are considered along the whole profile except over a specific distance around the sites (clearance). Position of the Other Sites: When you select this option. Azimuth: Enter the azimuth of the selected site. 4. It is not used when calculating the line of sight between existing sites. Atoll will use the pylon height defined by site for each line of sight. For each clutter class. Select 360° View Properties from the context menu. - - Changing the Calculation and Display Parameters 1. Click OK. For information on parameters which can be changed. . To configure the 360° view calculation parameters and display options: Right-click the 360° View tab and select 360° View Properties from the context menu. The Line of Sight Parameters dialogue appears. Atoll will display the view between -45° and 45°. Beamwidth: Enter the angle of view to be considered. On the Display tab. The settings on the Clutter tab are independent from any clutter parameters you might have set for the propagation model. . : Increase the angle of view on the left. : Increase the angle of view on the right. Then. : Decrease the angle of view on the left.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management . 8. Atoll will use the pylon height you define in the Default Height box.The altitude (in m). Atoll displays the position of other sites within the view. 6. Atoll displays a horizontal line (a blue dotted line by default) to indicate the height of the selected site. Select one of the following: Line of Sight Clearance: Select Line of Sight Clearance if you want to study the line of sight between the transmitter and receiver sites. Define the Maximum Distance around the selected site. Click the Clutter tab. Each site is indicated by a vertical line (red by default). Select one of the following to define the pylon height for the transmitter and the receiver: Use the pylon height defined by site: If you select Use the pylon height defined by site. The clearance is used when calculating diffraction. 5. see “Changing the Calculation and Display Parameters” on page 183. If you enter a beamwidth of 90° and an azimuth of 0°. define the first k factor value. 10. 9. define the following parameters: a. : Rotate the angle of view on the left. : Decrease the angle of view on the right : Rotate the angle of view on the right. b. On the Clutter tab you can set clutter-related parameters that will be used to calculate the line of sight. Clearance: If you want. The context menu appears. Ellipsoid Clearance: Select Ellipsoid Clearance if you want to study the percentage of clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid. you can define the following parameters: Pylon Height: When you select this option. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 183 . Under Height . Use the default height: If you select Use the default height. Select the Take clutter into account in diffraction check box if you want to use clutter information when calculating diffraction in the line of sight. They are displayed in purple by default. you can set the following: Receiver Height: You can define a receiver height for each clutter class. Height of the Selected Site: When you select this option.The curvature of the Earth (in m).

see "Using a Computation Zone" on page 30). you can select how pylon height will be defined on the transmitter side of each microwave link: Use the pylon height defined by site: If you select Use the pylon height defined by site. You can also let Atoll display the mutually visible areas of multiple sites so as to find good places to create new sites. 8. The settings on the Clutter tab are independent from any clutter parameters you might have set for the propagation model. - 11. 6. The context menu appears. Clearance: If you want. Use the default height: If you select Use the default height. You can select one of the following display options: One Area per Site: Select One Area per Site to display a line-of-sight area for each site and then define the colour the line-of-sight areas will be displayed in: Automatic Colour: If you select Automatic Colour. 5. by moving the slider. On the Clutter tab you can set clutter-related parameters that will be used to calculate the line-of-sight area. 10.Receiver Side on the Calculation Parameters tab. Take clutter into account in diffraction: Select the Take clutter into account in diffraction check box if you want to use clutter information when calculating diffraction in the line of sight. Click the Clutter tab. where Atoll bases its calculations only on the DTM.Transmitter Side. Atoll will use the pylon height defined by site. selecting a colour from the palette. define the following parameters: a. Right-click the Sites folder. you can define a receiver height for each clutter class. Select Line of Sight Report from the context menu. Both ground altitude and clutter height are considered along the whole profile except over a specific distance around the sites (clearance). The Line of Sight Parameters dialogue appears. define the first k factor value. Overlapping: Select Overlapping to display the line-of-sight areas with coverage from the defined number of sites: 184 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . you can select how receiver height will be defined at the far edge of the LOS area: Use heights defined per clutter class: If you select Use heights defined per clutter class. For each clutter class. Under Height . Under Earth Curvature Factors. in terms of reception and transmission. This is the value that will be taken into consideration if you selected Use heights defined per clutter class under Height . To display the line-of-sight areas of several sites and display their intersection: 1. Under Height . Atoll will use the pylon height you define in the Default Height box. as explained in "Moving a Site to a Higher Location" on page 19. and you will be able to distinguish the line-of-sight areas for each site. Set the transparency of the displayed line-of-sight area. On the Display tab. Define the type of clearance that will be calculated by selecting one of the following: Line of Sight Clearance: Select Line of Sight Clearance if you want to study the line of sight between the transmitter and receiver sites. 4. Frequency Band: Select the frequency band to be used when calculating the line of sight from the list. Use the default height: If you select Use the default height. Atoll will use the receiver height you define in the Default Height box.Atoll User Manual 7. The average frequency of the selected frequency band is displayed in the Frequency box. you can set the following: Receiver Height: If you want. 3. b. and the resulting display will show the cumulative line-of-sight areas. Unique Colour: If you select Unique Colour. c. 7. Under Penetration Condition. Atoll will use the receiver height defined per clutter class on the Clutter tab of the Line of Sight Parameters dialogue. by letting Atoll find a higher location for it.Receiver Side. The clearance is used when calculating diffraction. Ellipsoid Clearance: Select Ellipsoid Clearance if you want to study the percentage of clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid and enter the percentage of clearance of the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid. Displaying the Mutually Visible Areas of Multiple Sites Atoll allows you to calculate the line-of-sight areas for several sites and display their intersection. Click the Calculation Parameters tab. Define the Maximum Distance around the selected site to be considered in the line-of-sight analysis. 2. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. 9. The intersection of lineof-sight areas will be calculated for sites in the computation zone (for information on the computation zone. Atoll will automatically assign a different colour to each line-of-sight area.2.3 Search Tools for New Sites Atoll provides different tools to find new microwave site locations. Click the Display tab. Atoll with display all line-of-sight areas in the same colour. You can improve the location of a site. you can define a clearance around each site for each clutter class. you can define how the line-of-sight areas will be displayed on the map.

Duplex operation means that each radio frequency channel consists of a pair of frequencies.3 Creating Microwave Links A microwave radio link.. "Placing a New Microwave Link Using the Microwave Link Template" on page 190. "Defining Port Parameters" on page 189. Dx and Dy. To delete the line-of-sight areas: 1. This baseband signal is modulated onto a radio frequency carrier at the transmission end. Atoll displays results on the map. respectively. Areas covered by all sites: Check the Areas covered by all sites check box if you want Atoll to display all areas covered by all sites in the colour selected from the palette. "Checking Data Consistency" on page 192. Click OK. • Frequency band: The working frequency band of the microwave link. in Atoll. Select the Add to Legend check box to add the options defined on the Display tab to the Legend. Select Delete Line of Sight Areas from the context menu. Under Site A: you can set the name of the site defining one extremity of the link. 7. Length: The calculated length. Coordinates: Select this option if you want to enter the coordinates of the antenna position. and is transmitted over the air as an electromagnetic wavefront. 13. and then enter the x-axis and y-axis offsets. 7. "Modifying Microwave Sites and Microwave Links Directly on the Map" on page 191. you can modify its position under Antenna Position: Relative to Site: Select this option if you want to enter the antenna position as offsets with respect to the site location. Activity: The microwave link activity status.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management Areas covered by at least 2 sites: Check the Areas covered by at least 2 sites check box if you want Atoll to display all areas covered by at least 2 sites in the colour selected from the palette. For information on the Legend window. and then enter the x-axis and y-axis coordinates. Right-click the Sites folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. Coordinates: Select this option if you want to enter the coordinates of the antenna positions. X and Y. Only active microwave links are considered in reliability and interference analysis. X and Y. respectively. 12. The Radio tab: © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 185 . respectively. "A" is the site of departure and "B" is the site of arrival. Comments: Any comment about the microwave link. occupies a limited bandwidth depending on the modulation scheme used. "Managing Microwave Link Templates" on page 190. one for transmission and one for reception. is a point-to-point fixed radio frequency link operating in either simplex or in duplex mode. In Atoll. The context menu appears. If the extremity of the link is not located exactly on the site. The baseband signal. A site can support one or more microwave links or passive repeaters. 2.3. transceiver equipment. If the extremity of the link is not located exactly on the site.1 Definition of a Microwave Link The parameters of a microwave link can be found in the microwave link’s Properties dialogue. "Setting the Working Area of an Atoll Document" on page 192. "Creating or Modifying a Microwave Link" on page 188. The Properties dialogue has seven tabs: • The General tab: Name: The name of the microwave link. Areas covered by at least 3 sites: Check the Areas covered by at least 3 sites check box if you want Atoll to display all areas covered by at least 3 sites in the colour selected from the palette. and then enter the x-axis and y-axis coordinates. respectively. Dx and Dy. the following are explained: • • • • • • • • • "Definition of a Microwave Link" on page 185. see "Displaying the Map Legend" on page 29. Repeater Q: The name of a second passive repeater on the link. and then enter the x-axis and y-axis offsets. containing the user data. Repeater P: The name of a passive repeater on the link. Microwave radio links are designed to operate between 300 MHz and 60 GHz. Under Site B: you can set the name of the site defining the other extremity of the link. etc. you can modify its position under Antenna Position: Relative to Site: Select this option if you want to enter the antenna positions as offsets with respect to the site location. installed at both. Atoll enables you to create new microwave links by basing them on templates or by setting all the parameters for each new link. In this section. Atoll enables you to manage the microwave link parameters and their activity status globally or individually. A microwave link comprises two transmission/reception ends with antennas. "Display Tips for Microwave Sites and Links" on page 192.

/Direct Ray: The azimuth with respect to the direct ray between the both extremities.. you can apply an additional filter by clicking the button ( ) beside the antenna model field. If you want. For further information on port settings. you can apply an additional filter by clicking the button ( ) beside the frequency sub-band field. Polarisation: The polarisation of the antenna to be used. For other configurations. Channels: The channel(s) allocated to the site. When the filter is active. Port Settings: Click the Port Settings button to configure channel(s) in detail. Atoll proposes in the list equipment compatible with the selected antenna as defined in the Antenna/Equipment Compatibility table. In this case. This parameter helps Atoll determine which antenna pattern diagrams to use for calculations. - Under Frequencies. you can apply an additional filter by clicking the button ( model field. you can define antennas and characteristics for the both sites of the link Model: The antenna model. you can apply an additional filter by clicking the button ( ) beside the - - antenna model field. to allow communication in both ways). values for transmission and reception attenuation. Coordinated Power: The output power taken into account in calculations when power control is on. Channel(s) can be selected only after choosing a frequency sub-band. Atoll provides in the list the sub-band. Atoll proposes in the list antennas compatible with the selected equipment as defined in the Antenna/ Equipment Compatibility table. The corresponding frequency is indicated in brackets. When the filter is active. In this case. Select both options to make the microwave link bidirectional (i. you can define either the frequency or the sub-band and channels. Sub-Band: The frequency sub-band. If you want. This parameter can be defined for biderectional links only. the appearance of the button changes Under Equipment. The value cannot exceed the Max ATPC value defined for the equipment. you can define the following parameters: - - • The Connections tab: Under Waveguides and Cables. When the filter is active. For each of them. Note: Ports have to be configured if you use dual polarized antennas. Atoll lists equipment that operates in the frequency band defined for the microwave link. If you want. If you want. Tuning: Define a value different from 0 dB if you do not want to transmit at maximum power. By default. By default. the appearance of the button changes ( ). ATPC value is considered in reliability and interference analysis only if power control is on. Atoll proposes 186 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Maximum Power: The maximum power that the equipment can transmit. Atoll lists antennas that operate in the frequency band defined for the microwave link. Separation: The distance between the main and the diversity antennas when space diversity is used on the site. This value is used when no sub-band is defined. XPIC System: Select this option if the microwave link uses XPIC (Cross Polarisation Interference Canceller). In this case. Half-band: Define which half-band (either the upper or the lower half-band) is assigned to the site./Direct Ray: The tilt with respect to the direct ray between the both extremities. port settings is not mandatory. see "Global Parameters" on page 156. The number of ports you can define depends on the system configuration of the selected equipment and cannot exceed n+m (where "n" is the number of channels in normal use and "m" is the number of channels available as standby channels). transmission and reception port numbers. you can define equipment related parameters for the both sites of the link: - ( ). Model: You can select a piece of equipment. Az. By default.Atoll User Manual A>>B and B>>A: The direction of the microwave link (A>>B: transmission from Site A to Site B. you can define if it is used either for transmission or reception only. For information on taking power control into consideration. or for both transmission and reception directions and select the waveguide model. the appearance of the button changes ( ) beside the antenna ). By default. the appearance of the button changes ( ). you can select up to two waveguides. or frequency diversity. You can configure the channels.e. ATPC: The power reserve used to increase the transmitted signal when it rains. Nominal power: The output power after tuning. Frequency: The frequency on which the signal is transmitted. Tilt. When the filter is active. Under Antennas. the polarisation and the channel port status. Diversity Ant: You can define if a diversity antenna is used at either site to improve reception. Height/Ground: The antenna height with respect to the ground (in metres). B>>A: transmission from Site B to Site A). Atoll lists waveguides that operate in the frequency band defined for the microwave link. see "Defining Port Parameters" on page 189. The Ports Definition dialogue appears. it equals the central frequency of the frequency band. whose frequency spacing corresponds to the standardised channel bandwidth calculated for the installed equipment. In this case. radio equipment with 1+1 configuration and hot standby. By default. Atoll lists all frequency sub-bands available for the microwave link frequency band. This parameter is taken from the equipment properties.

Rainfall exceeded 0. ITU-R P. ITU-R P. ITU-R P. The different geoclimatic parameters are described below: Atmospheric and Climatic Conditions: Under Atmospheric and Climatic Conditions. or on both transmission and reception. or the water vapour density set in the geoclimatic file. you can choose between Warm and Humid. see "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 108. The rain height is the height of the top of the rain column above mean sea level from the 0°C isotherm. The methods displayed are those set on the Models tab of the Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue. you can select the following climatic zones: • The Geoclimatic tab: - Climatic Zone Polar (Dry) Polar (Moderate) Cold (Dry) Temperate Continental (Dry) Subtropical Arid (Dry) Cold (Moderate) Temperate Continental (Moderate) Temperate Continental (Wet) Temperate Maritime Subtropical Wet Tropical Moderate Tropical Type Crane Global Rain Zone A B Dry B1 D1 F B2 D2 D3 C E G H Continental Continental humid Humid When using Vigants-Barnett as the quality calculation method. Relative Humidity: The Relative Humidity displayed is calculated using the defined water vapour density. The dialogue also displays the water vapour pressure in hectopascals (hPa) calculated using your data and based on Rec.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management in the list.1510-0. see "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 108. waveguides compatible with the selected antenna and equipment as defined in the Antenna/ Waveguide Compatibility and Antenna/Equipment Compatibility tables. Rec.530 are those recommended by ITU-R P.836-3.835-3 (and select a season). Rec. see "Global Parameters" on page 156. The climatic zones available depend on the calculation methods selected in the Models tab of the Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue. For more information on the geoclimatic file. or the atmospheric pressure set in the geoclimatic file. ITU-R P. ITU-R P. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Rainfall exceeded 0. reception. The geoclimatic parameters available depend on the selected quality and availability methods.530 to calculate the quality of the microwave link: Water Vapour Density: Set the water vapour density in grams per cubic metre.01% of the average year: Set the rainfall exceeded 0. ITU-R P. ITU-R P. Atoll displays the attenuation. Temperature: Set the average temperature of the zone in which the microwave link operates.530-12: Under ITU-R P. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Temperature text box opens a dialogue where you can select the temperature based on Rec. ITU-R P. To access all geoclimatic parameters whatever the methods you have selected.530-12. or the temperature set in the geoclimatic file. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Atmospheric Pressure text box opens a dialogue where you can select the atmospheric pressure based on Rec. you can enter the Rain Height (0°C Isotherm) in metres. Temperate and Dry.01% of the average year set in the geoclimatic file.837-4 or the rainfall exceeded 0.01% of the average year (or.835-3 (and select a season). For more information on the geoclimatic file. Under Connection Losses. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Water Vapour Density text box opens a dialogue where you can select the water vapour density based on Rec.530: The parameters found under Rec. For more information on the geoclimatic file.01% of the average year based on Rec. ITU-R P. You can also enter the length of each waveguide. you can define additional losses to be taken into account on transmission. the rainfall observed 99.835-3 (and select a season). you can see the calculation methods used to analyse the microwave link quality and availability.99% of the average year). For more information. You can also add a Shielding Factor.836-3 (and select the percentage of the average year where the defined water vapour density is exceeded). - © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 187 . see "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 108. you can define the conditions under which the microwave operates: Climatic Zone: Select the climatic zone that best describes the climate in which the microwave link operates. or based on Rec. Current Methods: Under Current Methods. ITU-R P. Atmospheric Pressure: Set the atmospheric pressure in grams per cubic metre. click the Display All button available under Current Methods.01% of the average year text box opens a dialogue where you can select the rainfall exceeded 0. For more information on the geoclimatic file. see "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 108. When using Crane as the availability calculation method. in other words.

Under Geoclimatic Factor. ITU-R P.Q. -8 and Vigants-Barnett. If no propagation model is selected. see "Microwave Link Classes" on page 154. or the refractivity gradient set in the geoclimatic file.Q.Model used for the interfering signal: Under Model used for the interfering signal. the quality and availability of the link will be defined by the respective target values defined in the link class. The Propagation tab. ITU-R P. or the refractivity gradient for less than 65 m.530-5. -8 and Vigants-Barnett: Under ITU-R P. 530-10 and above (and select the simplified method where you also define the refractivity gradient (< 65 m. PL is the percent of time the relative refractivity gradient is less than -100 N⁄Km.530. Method: Under K. "Average Terrain" and "Montainous Terrain". K models geo-climatic and terrain effects on climate while Q is the factor for variables other than those dependent on distance and frequency. -8. the k factor median value. you assign the performance objectives to the link. you can define the Refractivity gradient near the earth’s surface in N-units per km. K models geo-climatic and terrain effects on climate. Each link class can have different performance objectives. . the propagation condition factor for Vigants-Barnett method. described in "Definition of a Microwave Link" on page 185. Clicking the Objectives button opens a dialogue where you can view and modify the performance objectives of the selected link class.839-3 (and select a season).. - - • The Reliability tab: Link Class: Under Link Class. "Mountain" for terrestrial microwave links where the height of the lowest antenna in the link is higher than 700 m. calculated using the set parameters. or the rain height set in the geoclimatic file. If you are using using the VigantsBarnett method. Geoclimatic Factor: The parameters under Geoclimatic Factor are used to calculate the quality of the microwave link and are broken down by calculation method.Q.453-9. The PL factor can be found on the ITU-R maps. K. you can enter the C factor value. you can define the PL factor.2 Creating or Modifying a Microwave Link You can modify an existing microwave link or you can create a new microwave link.) not exceeded during 1% of the average year or select the method with terrain roughness taken into account where you define the refractivity gradient and the terrain roughness). see "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 108. Clicking the button ( ) beside the K text box opens a dialogue where you can select the K factor based on Rec.530-5 or 530-8 methods.Atoll User Manual Clicking the button ( ) beside the Rain Height text box opens a dialogue where you can select the rain height based on Rec. ITU-R P. Refractivity: Under Refractivity. ITU-R P. You can access the properties of a microwave link. you can choose between "Flat Terrain".530-5. for the K. 530-5 or Rec. you can define propagation-related parameters: . is displayed. ITU-R P. The Display tab. you can select the link class.) is less than -100 N-units⁄km for the worst average month) or based on Rec.Q method.530-5. ITU-R P. Under Refractivity. through the microwave link’s Properties 188 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . you can define the K factor. you can define the appearance of the microwave link and its extremities. you can select the propagation model that will be used to calculate the path loss as well as the margin required for quality and availability for the microwave link. If you select the Simplified Method option. 530-8 (and select a terrain type and enter a value for C0 and for the percentage of time the refractivity gradient (< 100 m. you can set the following parameters: ITU-R P. Clicking the Browse button ( ) opens the Properties dialogue of the selected link class. Vigants-Barnett: Parameters available under Vigants-Barnett depend on the option selected on the Models tab of the Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue. -8: Under ITU-R P. ITU-R P. you can choose between "Open Areas" for terrestrial microwave links where the height of the lowest antenna in the link is lower than 700 m. For information on creating a link class. "Lake" for microwave links over an expanse of water and "Overwater" for microwave links over an extended expanse of water. you can define K. Atolldisplays the C factor value corresponding to the defined climate zone. If you select the User-defined option under Multipath Occurence. using a userdefined reference altitude. For more information on the geoclimatic file. Atoll displays the resulting sensitivity for each BER.Model used for the useful signal: Under Model used for the useful signal. If you select the Terrain-based Method option.530: Under ITU-R P. • Bit Error Rate: Under Bit Error Rate. you can select the propagation model that will be used to calculate interference. For more information on the geoclimatic file. By assigning the link class with the appropriate performance objectives.530-5. If you are using ITU-R P. Clicking the button ( ) beside the Refractivity gradient near the earth’s surface text box opens a dialogue where you can select the refractivity gradient based on Rec. see "Geoclimatic Maps" on page 108. you can set the values for BER 1 and BER 2. Atoll displays the C factor value corresponding to the defined climate zone and lets you define whether you want to take the terrain roughness into account. you can select the Terrain Type. • 7. as well as the percentage of the year that N is not exceeded.3. The terrain types available depend on the calculation methods selected on the Models tab of the Microwave Radio Links Properties dialogue. Method.

How you access the Properties dialogue depends on whether you are creating a new microwave link or modifying an existing microwave link. The number must be from 1 to 10. 2. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. 4. In case of frequency diversity. port settings is not mandatory. Click OK. "Diversity" if it is used for frequency diversity. ) to expand the Links folder.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management dialogue. "Standby" for a standby channel (channel "m"). For other configurations. Define the following parameters: Link: the name of the microwave link. The context menu appears. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. The Properties dialogue appears.3 Defining Port Parameters In Atoll. 3. The number of ports you can define depends on the system configuration of the selected equipment and cannot exceed n+m. ports are used to configure channel(s) in detail. They have to be defined if you use dual polarized antennas. The microwave link’s Properties dialogue appears. 10. two channels with diversity status are required. 5. To create or modify a microwave link: 1. If you are modifying the properties of an existing site: a. 4. 11. Status: Either select "Main" if the channel is active (channel "n"). Transmission Attenuation: The transmission attenuation in dB. To define port parameters for all microwave links: 1. Right-click the Links folder. The number must be from 1 to 10. radio equipment with 1+1 configuration and hot standby. If you are creating a new microwave link: a. Right-click the microwave link whose port parameters you want to define. Click OK. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. 8. you can define either a frequency or the channels used. The Links New Element Properties dialogue appears. d. Click the Port Parameter Settings button. The corresponding frequency is indicated in brackets. ) to expand the Links folder. Click OK. Select Properties from the context menu. 2. Reception Attenuation: The reception attenuation in dB. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. b. 3. Modify the parameters described in "Definition of a Microwave Link" on page 185. The context menu appears. Click the Expand button ( 3. The table opens. select a Sub-Band for the SiteA of the microwave link. Rx port: The port number for the receiving equipment. Define the following parameters for each channel transmitted in one direction: Channel: The channel number. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 189 . 2.3. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Under Frequencies. Tx port: The port number for the transmitting equipment. d. 12. After defining the configuration for one direction. Right-click the Links folder. 6. The Ports Definition dialogue closes. or frequency diversity. Select Properties from the context menu. 7. The context menu appears. To define port parameters for a single microwave link: 1. 9. The context menu appears. Select Ports > Open table. Click the Expand button ( c. 7. Right-click the microwave link you want to modify. e. b. Defined the Half-band used on SiteA. you can define the opposite direction by clicking the Initialise Symmetrically button. You can configure port parameters for an individual microwave link or for all microwave links. c. Select the Radio tab. 13. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Click Apply. The Ports Definition dialogue appears. Polarisation: The signal polarisation. Select New from the context menu. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. Additional parameters appear.

The tools for working with microwave link templates can be found on the Microwave toolbar (see Figure 7. The pointer now changes ( ). but you can also create and modify microwave link templates. Site A: the name of the site defining one extremity of the link. you can create new microwave links based on link templates. The pointer now changes ( b. Select Between Sites from the menu. 5. On two existing sites using a link template. click the site that you would like to use as one extremity of the microwave link. If you are placing a new microwave link on two new sites: a. Click the arrow next to New Link button ( ) on the Microwave toolbar.Atoll User Manual Way: the link direction (AB or BA). Channel: the channel number. Each site in Atoll can support several microwave links. Click again on the map to indicate the location of the other end of the link. The Link Creation dialogue appears. The number must be from 1 to 10. Polarisation: the signal polarisation. Rx port: the port number for the receiving equipment. the following are explained: • • "Creating or Modifying a Microwave Link Template" on page 191 "Adding a Field to a Microwave Link Template" on page 191 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 190 . 5. In the Link Creation dialogue. Reception Attenuation: the reception losses attenuation in dB. The site is now one extremity of the microwave link. Select Using The Mouse On The Map from the menu. 7. Figure 7. To place a microwave link directly on the map using a link template: 1. b. and passive repeaters. In the Microwave toolbar. define the following parameters: Model: the link template you want to use in order to create the microwave link. This allows you to build your network quickly with consistent parameters. ). By default. Click OK. Status: Either select "Main" if the channel is active (channel "n"). 4. "Standby" for a standby channel (channel "m"). If you are placing a new microwave link on two existing sites: a.3. 3.112). You can create a microwave link in the following ways: • • Directly on the map between new or existing sites using a link template. 3. 2. In case of frequency diversity. 2. Click the arrow next to New Link button ( ) on the Microwave toolbar.112: The Microwave toolbar In this section. where SiteX is the name of the start site (existing or newly created) and SiteY is the name of the end site (existing or newly created). The number must be from 1 to 10.4 Placing a New Microwave Link Using the Microwave Link Template With Atoll. In the map window. In the Microwave toolbar. The pointer changes ( The sites that define the extremities of a microwave link can be already existing sites or Atoll will create new sites automatically at the location you clicked on the map. 4. select a link template from the list. Click once on the map to indicate the location of the first end of the link. 7. Transmission Attenuation: the transmission attenuation in dB. Site B: the name of the site defining the other extremity of the link. two channels with diversity status are required. To create a microwave link on two existing sites using a link template: 1.5 Managing Microwave Link Templates Atoll comes with microwave link templates. The microwave link is now created between the two sites. select a link template from the list. "Diversity" if it is used for frequency diversity.3. Tx port: the port number for the transmitting equipment. The corresponding frequency is indicated in brackets. ). Atoll names the newly created microwave links in the following manner: SiteX – SiteY. Move the pointer to the site that you would like to use as the other extremity of the microwave link and click it. transmitters.

or by letting Atoll find a higher location for it. In the dialogue that appears. The new link template has the same parameters as the microwave link it is based on. 7. although it might be visible in the map window.3 Deleting a Microwave Link Template To delete a link template: 1. 4. 2.2 Adding a Field to a Microwave Link Template To add. Select Manage Templates from the list.5. You can also change the position of the site by dragging it. 5. see "Modifying Microwave Sites and Microwave Links Directly on the Map" on page 191. Right-click the microwave link you want to use as template in the Map window. you must add an equivalent field to the Sites table or the field will not be taken into account. You can also create a link template based on a link template selected in the Link Template Properties dialogue. Click OK. Click OK. The Link Template Properties dialogue appears. select the link template that most closely resembles the link template you want to create and click Add. you can modify the properties of any link template. Therefore. The Link Template Properties dialogue appears.1 Creating or Modifying a Microwave Link Template You can create a link template based on an existing microwave link. The link template is deleted. In the Microwave toolbar.3. Note: If you add a field to the link templates. You can now create a new link template or modify an existing one: To create a new link template: Under Available Templates.5. select the template you want to delete. in a complex radio-planning project. modify or delete a field in the link templates: 1. 2. click the arrow to the right of the list. Select Manage Templates from the list.5. Select Manage Templates from the list. the Properties button to modify properties.3. The new link template will be available in the template menu. Click OK. The context menu appears. To create a link template based on an existing microwave link 1. 3. click the arrow to the right of the list. Click the Delete button. It is available in the list of the Microwave toolbar. by selecting the existing link template that most closely resembles the link template you want to create. click the arrow to the right of the list. 5. select the link template whose properties you want to modify and click Properties. The new link template has the same parameters as the one it is based on.3. Select Save As A Template from the context menu. As well. To modify an existing link template: Under Available Templates. In the Radio toolbar. For information on the fields available in the open window. 2. 3. However. 7. The Link Template Properties dialogue appears. 4. clicking them in the map window opens a context menu allowing you to select one link or site. In the Radio toolbar. 5. 7. The Properties dialogue appears. Under Available Templates. you can access the Properties dialogue of a site or link using the context menu on the Data tab of the Explorer window. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 191 .3. Click the Fields button.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management • "Deleting a Microwave Link Template" on page 191 7. Atoll lets you access the Properties dialogue of sites and links directly from the map. it can be difficult to find the data object on the Data tab. 4. 3. click the Add button to add a field. The Properties dialogue appears. To create a link template based on an existing link template or modify a link template: 1. or the Delete button to delete a user-defined field. 2. If there is more than one link between the same sites or if there are two sites in close proximity.6 Modifying Microwave Sites and Microwave Links Directly on the Map In Atoll. you can create a new template by only modifying the parameters that differ.

you can restrict 192 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .) - Undefined Records: Select this check box if you want the audit to verify if there are undefined multi-hops (i.. - - List All Verifications: Select this check box if you want to display all verifications performed in addition to detected inconsistencies. Other (XPIC. multi-hops with no link). but also to distinguish microwave links at a glance. Microwave link colour: You can set the microwave link colour to display information about the microwave link.3. The label is always displayed. You can display information from every field in that object type’s data table. Link definition: at least one direction must be selected.8 Checking Data Consistency You can perform an audit of the microwave link network. such as each site or microwave link. The following tools can be used to display information about microwave links: • Label: You can display information about each object. For information on defining the tooltips. such as each site or microwave link. equipment. For example. 7. Antenna Separation. doing engineering and interference studies that calculate the entire network would not only take a lot of time. the frequency defined must be within the frequency band limits. see "Defining the Display Type" on page 22. To perform an audit of the microwave link network: 1. you will probably only modify the data in the region for which you are responsible. 7. Tooltips: You can display information about each object. In such a situation. The audit allows you to verify the consistency and validity of some data. 3.. or to distinguish inactive from active microwave links. see "Defining the Object Type Tip Text" on page 24. might be responsible for the planning for only one city.e. or unused repeaters. define the parameters of the audit: Frequency Consistency: Select this check box if you want the audit to verify: Frequency band definition: The minimum frequency must be lower than the maximum frequency. Pattern attenuations are considered the same if they differ less than 1 dB. 2. because the information is only displayed when you move the pointer over the object. in the form of a tooltip that is only visible when you move the pointer over the object.): Select this check box if you want the audit to verify that: XPIFvalue of the equipment is a non-zero value when XPIC system is used on a link. Consequently. For information on defining the label.9 Setting the Working Area of an Atoll Document When you load project data from a database. etc. You can choose to display more information than in the label. the frequency band of antennas. Antenna separation is a non-zero value when space diversity is used on a link.7 Display Tips for Microwave Sites and Links Atoll allows to you to display information about microwave links in a number of different ways. In the Microwave Data Check dialogue. the number of channels must not exceed the number of channels allowed by the equipment. The Microwave Data Check dialogue appears. undefined point-to-multipoints (i. including from fields that you add. the channels must belong to the selected frequency sub-band. so you should choose information that you would want to always be visible. you can select "Discrete Values" to distinguish microwave links by frequency bands. You. however. too much information will lead to a cluttered display. Frequency sub-band definition: The frequency band must be defined. You can display information from every field in that object type’s data table. and when the horizontal pattern attenuation at 180° is the same as the vertical pattern attenuation at the 180° less the pattern electrical tilt angle. the antenna vertical and horizontal patterns must be correctly aligned at the extremities (Antenna patterns are correctly aligned when the horizontal pattern attenuation at 0° is the same as the vertical pattern attenuation at the pattern electrical tilt angle. it is not necessary. Atoll displays the results of the audit in the Events Viewer. For information on defining the microwave link colour.3.Atoll User Manual Modifying sites and links directly on the map is explained in detail in "Chapter 1: The Working Environment": • • • • • • • "Displaying the Properties of an Object" on page 18 "Selecting One of Several Microwave Links" on page 19 "Moving a Site Using the Mouse" on page 19 "Moving a Site to a Higher Location" on page 19 "Changing the Azimuth of the Antenna Using the Mouse" on page 19 "Changing the Antenna Position Relative to the Site Using the Mouse" on page 20 "Selecting Another Site for the Link Extremity Using the Mouse" on page 20. point-to-multipoints with no link). waveguides and frequency sub-band must be the same as the link frequency band and.e. For example. a complex microwave link planning project may cover an entire region or even an entire country. Click OK to perform the audit. in the form of a label that is displayed with the object.3. including from fields that you add. This enables you not only to display selected information. • • 7. see "Defining the Object Type Label" on page 23. excluded channels must belong to the list of channels and at least one channel must be available. Select Tools > Data Audit > Microwave Data Check from the context menu.

"Managing Microwave Link Profile Display Options" on page 194.1.4. see "Filtering Data" on page 62. see "Using a Focus Zone" on page 31. For information on filtering. in order to create a very precise selection of the sites and microwave links to be studied.4 Analysing the Path Profile Microwave links can be analysed in terms of the terrain and clutter profile between the two extremities in Atoll. "Displaying Microwave Link Clearance Values Along the Profile" on page 195.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management engineering and interference studies to the sites and microwave links that you are interested in and generate only the results you need. "Modifying Microwave Link Profile Values" on page 197 7. there are two ways of restricting the number of sites and microwave links studied. When a repeater is inserted on the link. You can create a graphic filter by either using an existing vector polygon or creating a new vector polygon. In this section. The main peak is the one that intersects the Fresnel ellipsoid the most. This enables you to keep only the sites and microwave links with the characteristics you want to study. "Printing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 195. "Studying Microwave Link Clearance" on page 194. with a green line indicating the line of sight (LOS). "Adding a Microwave Passive Repeater" on page 201. Before studying a microwave link. Atoll displays the terrain height along the profile as well as clutter classes and clutter heights when the visibility check box of the Clutter Classes folder on the Geo tab is selected. "Determining Microwave Link Antenna Heights" on page 200.4. its frequency band. you must configure its antennas. It includes any passive repeaters composing the link. equipment. and the propagation model you want to use. see "Using a Computation Zone" on page 30. In Atoll. the following are explained: • • • "Displaying the Path Profile" on page 193. Along the profile. 2. see "Filtering Data Using a Filtering Zone" on page 71. you can select which part of the profile you want to display: • • • Site A ==> Site P Site P ==> Site B Site B ==> Site P © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 193 . the following are explained: • • • • • • • "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. or from the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. each with its own advantages: • Filtering the desired sites and microwave links You can simplify the selection of sites and microwave links to be studied by using a filter. For information on graphic filters. it is displayed in the profile tab by a vertical line in the profile. The context menu appears. limits the number of sites and microwave links to be calculated. If you do not want to display the clutter along the profile. You can make a microwave link profile analysis using the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. 7. which in turn reduces the time necessary for calculations.1 Displaying the Path Profile In this section. For information on computation zones. You can combine a computation zone and a filter. Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map. 7. interference). You can filter sites and microwave links according to one or more fields. You can also open Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window using the Profile Analysis button ( the toolbar. this causes attenuation with diffraction displayed by a black vertical line (if the propagation model used takes diffraction into account). ) in The Profile tab provides an interactive real-time display of the microwave link profile from site A to site B or vice versa. In addition. you can clear the visibility check box of the Clutter Classes folder on the Geo tab. Select Engineering > Profile Analysis from the context menu.1 Viewing a Microwave Link Profile In Atoll. "Zooming In on the Profile" on page 194. or you can create an advanced filter by combining several criteria in several fields. A blue ellipsoid indicates the Fresnel zone between the transmitter and the receiver sites. The diffraction attenuation is displayed above the peak. At the top of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. The altitude (in metres) is reported on the vertical axis and the distance on the horizontal axis. it is possible to set a focus zone in order to filter the results displayed in reports (link budgets. To open the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window: 1. • Setting a computation zone Drawing a computation zone to encompass the sites and microwave links to be studied. if the signal meets an obstacle. For information on focus zones. you can make a profile analysis of a microwave link.

5. 7. either the unobstructed reflection paths only or both obstructed and unobstructed ones. 7. When the percentage of the Fresnel ellipsoid is different from 100%. Atoll displays the clearance (%) and the penetration of the Fresnel zone for each value of k. 3. 4.4. and the loss from this obstacle is displayed on the top of this perpendicular. A perpendicular from the horizontal axis is also drawn to mark the obstacle that introduces the highest loss in the link. you can hide or display the Fresnel zones between the two extremities of the microwave link. 6.1. Click OK. On the Reflection tab. while the second related to the second k value is shown in red. 2.4. F1 for the first k factor value and F2 for the second one. The Profile Display Options dialogue appears. both first and second. You can left-click the Link button in the Profile tab and choose from the context menu: • Properties to open the microwave link property dialogue.4. The first Fresnel ellipsoid corresponding to the first k value is shown in blue.3 Managing Microwave Link Profile Display Options The Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool enables you to manage parameters that affect the display of the profile.Atoll User Manual • • • Site P ==> Site A Site A ==> Site B (profile "broken" at Site P) Site B ==> Site A (profile "broken" at Site P) When a second repeater (Q) is inserted on the link. Select the microwave link to analyse. Select the microwave link to analyse. you can define the percentages of the first and second Fresnel ellipsoids to be shown. Here. Open the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. When displaying the clearance. 7. To manage the display of Fresnel ellipsoids. the clearance is referred to as F’. Note: When 100% of the Fresnel ellipsoid is displayed. The context menu appears. it indicates the tilts/direct ray. Select Display Options from the context menu. You can view the microwave link profile with two different values of the earth curvature factor (k factor).1. To open the microwave link profile display options window: 1. the azimuths. On the Display tab. and the angles of incidence for both antennas. F’1 for the first k factor value and F’2 for the second one. you can define whether the reflections should be displayed or not. Select Display Fresnel ellipsoids from the context menu. a green coloured line is drawn from the transmitter to the first obstacle’s highest point. Right-click the window where the profile is displayed. this feature is described in detail in the Optimising microwave link antenna heights section. 3. A common mode of operation would be to display the first Fresnel zone at 100% and the second at 60% so as to depict the minimum clearance requirement directly on the profile. you have to access the Display options dialogue for the profile and modify these parameters.4 Zooming In on the Profile Atoll enables you to zoom in on the profile. it is also possible to modify the antenna heights at both extremities manually and automatically. In addition.2 Studying Microwave Link Clearance The Profile tab allows you to display the clearance along the entire link profile. Open the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. To hide or display the Fresnel zones: 1. you can manage the horizontal and vertical axes graduations and the manner in which the curvature of the Earth is displayed. 194 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . and whether you want to display the antenna beamwidths for transmitter and receiver sites. 2. On the Ellipsoid and Antenna Beamwidth tab. and reflection paths you want to display. Right-click the window where the profile is displayed. The context menu appears. 4. 8.1. 7. These values can be set through the advanced options available by clicking the button ( ) opposite the Link list. the clearance is referred to as F. If there are obstructions in the path of the microwave link that introduce losses. the profile display options include Site Q as well. You can also display another Fresnel ellipsoid when a secondary antenna is installed at the receiver.

2. Open the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193.113). The window displays the following information for each selected point along the profile: Distance: The distance from the transmitting site. Click OK to print. Click in the profile on one of the four corners of the area you want to select. Select Actual Size (1:1) from the context menu.4. The context menu appears. 4. The context menu appears. To print the content of the Profile tab: 1. Right-click the window where the profile is displayed to open its context menu. Fresnel Ellipsoid Radius: The radius of the Fresnel ellipsoid for the first k factor value. Total Height: The altitude of the ground level more the clutter height. 5. 2. 2. In this section. Select Display the current point information from the context menu. (see Figure 7. To restore the initial profile: 1.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management To zoom in on the Profile: 1. Atoll zooms in on the selected area.4. Drag to the opposite corner. To display the details on a point of a microwave link profile: 1. 5. 4. When you release the mouse button. the following are described: • • "Using the Profile Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 195 "Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 196 7. Move the pointer along the profile. 3. 2.1. Select the microwave link to analyse. Atoll displays the details in a separate window. 3. 5.6 Displaying Microwave Link Clearance Values Along the Profile You can display the clearance values of a microwave link using either the Profile tab or the Values tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool. Right-click the window where the profile is displayed.1.4. Select Zoom In from the context menu. Select the microwave link to analyse. 4. Right-click the window where the profile is displayed. 6. Open the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193.1 Using the Profile Tab to Display Data of Each Point You can use the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool to display details on each point along the microwave link profile.1. A separate window opens displaying details of the selected point.6. Select Print from the context menu. - © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 195 . Right-click the window where the profile is displayed. Pointer Altitude (z): The altitude of the pointer. 7. Select the microwave link to analyse. Distance up to Optical Path: The clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid for the first k factor value. Select the microwave link to analyse.5 Printing a Microwave Link Profile You can print a microwave link profile. Open the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. Open the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. 3. This value is relative to the line of sight and corresponds to the difference of height between the line of sight and the current point. 7. The context menu appears. 4. 3.

This value is relative to the bottom of the Fresnel ellipsoid and is given for the first k factor value. When you place the pointer on this special cursor. The context menu appears. or from the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. 196 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .Atoll User Manual Figure 7. Clutter Height (m): the clutter height from clutter height files if available or from clutter class file. Distance: The distance from the transmitting site. Height (m): the altitude of the ground level (from DTM files). the pointer changes ( ) to indicate the location of the current point along the profile in the map window. This value is relative to the line of sight and corresponds to the difference of height between the line of sight and the current point.6. The Values tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window displays the following values for each point along the profile: Distance (m): the distance from the transmitting site. Clearance: The clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid for the first k factor value. 2. You can also access the Values tab by opening the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window and clicking the Values tab. Select Engineering > Values from the context menu. Atoll displays the details in a separate window.2 Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point You can use the Values tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool to view all the profile analysis data for each selected point along the microwave link profile. Total Height: The altitude of the ground level more the clutter height. Clutter: the clutter class. Category: the clutter category assigned to each clutter class when configuring the propagation model. This value is relative to the line of sight and corresponds to the difference of height between the line of sight and the current point.113: Microwave Link Analysis window – Profile tab As as you drag the pointer along the profile in the Microwave Link Analysis window. Ellipsoid Penetration (%): the penetration of the current point in the lower half of the Fresnel ellipsoid (percentage of the ellipsoid radius penetrated by the current point). Values tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool to display details on each point along the microwave link profile.1. Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map. Fresnel Radius (m): the radius of the Fresnel ellipsoid for the first k factor value Clearance (m): the clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid for the first k factor value. Pointer Altitude (z): The altitude of the pointer 7. To display the profile data using the Values tab: 1.4. Fresnel Ellipsoid Radius: The radius of the Fresnel ellipsoid for the first k factor value. the following information appears in a tool tip: Coordinates: The cursor coordinates given in the display coordinate system.

the altitude. the clutter height and the clutter category) can be edited in the table or using the mouse. 2. Click elsewhere in the table when you have finished updating the table.114: Penetration and clearance values on the Values tab 7..4. To edit profile values using the mouse: 1. the following are explained: • • • • • • • "Editing Profile Values" on page 197 "Displaying Reflection and Vegetation Zones" on page 198 "Copying and Pasting Profile Values" on page 199 "Exporting Profile Values" on page 199 "Importing Profile Values" on page 199 "Saving the Edited Profile Values" on page 199 "Refreshing the Profile Values" on page 199 7. Click the Edit button. Edit the content of the table by entering the value directly in the field.4. Open the Values tab as explained in "Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 196.1 Editing Profile Values Some values (e. You can edit the following columns: Altitude: The altitude (DTM) Clutter: The clutter class Clutter Height: The clutter height Category: The clutter category. The Value tab displays a table and a profile view (see Figure 7. where X is the highest resolution of clutter class and DTM maps. Open the Values tab as explained in "Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 196.115: The Values tab when editing.1. Figure 7.7. You can modify some profile values at any point along the profile and immediately check the impact of these modifications in the Profile tab.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management Figure 7.7 Modifying Microwave Link Profile Values The geographic details provided on the Values tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool are stored in a table. the clutter class. Right-click the profile view. 2. The resolution of the information given depends on the resolution of the geographic data: information is given every X metres.115). 3.g.1. To edit the profile values in the table: 1. 3. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 197 . In this section.

198 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . ii. The clutter classes are displayed with lines separating the clutter classes if clutter heights are defined or with points if clutter heights are not defined. You can see lines separating the clutter categories. i. ii. Clutter Height: Select Clutter Height if you want to edit clutter heights (see Figure 7.119: Clutter categories in edit mode. Click the point you want to edit. Clutter: Select Clutter if you want to edit clutter classes (see Figure 7. Figure 7. The pointer changes ( ).2 Displaying Reflection and Vegetation Zones When you are editing the profile as explained in "Editing Profile Values" on page 197. 7. 7. In the profile. The pointer changes ( ).118: Clutter classes in edit mode. Drag the point to its new altitude. Click the line.118). Click the line or point. Drag the line to change the area with the corresponding clutter category. you can view reflection areas and vegetation zones.Atoll User Manual 4. Atoll zooms in on the selected area. ii. i.7. Drag the point to its new clutter height.116: Ground in edit mode. i. The pointer changes ( ). click one of the four corners of the area you want to select. 6. Click the point you want to edit.116). Category: Select Category if you want to edit clutter categories (see Figure 7. Select Zoom In from the context menu.119). The pointer changes ( ). Drag the line or point to change the area with the corresponding clutter class.4. Select one of the following columns in the table: Altitude: Select Altitude if you want to edit ground altitudes (see Figure 7. ii. i. Figure 7. 5. Drag to the opposite corner and release the mouse button.117: Clutter heights in edit mode. Figure 7. Figure 7.117).1.

Reflection areas are displayed with a pattern ( ). 4. - - 7. clutter classes. and clutter categories) can be imported. press CTRL+U.1. The Value tab displays a table and a profile view (see Figure 7. To save the edited profile values: 1.7. The Value tab displays a table and a profile view (see Figure 7. you can save them in the link properties.1. Click the Actions button and select Commit Values to Link. 2. Right-click the profile view and select one of the following options from the context menu: Display Reflection Areas: Select Display Reflection Areas to view reflection areas taken into account in the reflection analysis and reflecting paths. 2. The Value tab displays a table and a profile view (see Figure 7. 7. 4. 7. Click the Actions button and select Import.115). Open the Values tab as explained in "Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 196. Open the Values tab as explained in "Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 196. 7. Click the Edit button.1. Open the Values tab as explained in "Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 196. Click the cell with the data you want to copy and drag to select the cells into which you want to copy the data. 2. If you want. To export profile values: 1. Open the Values tab as explained in "Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 196. 3. clutter heights. 3. 3. Click the Edit button.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management To display reflection areas and vegetation zones: 1. Click the Edit button. To copy the contents of the top cell of the selection into the other cells. 3.4. The Value tab displays a table and a profile view (see Figure 7. the changes are not automatically saved and will be lost if you select another link or if you close the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. Define export settings as explained in "Exporting Tables to Text Files" on page 49.7 Refreshing the Profile Values You can restore the original link profile values from the geographic data diles and replace the edited values. 4. Copy into the selected cells: To copy the contents of the clipboard into the selected cells. 2.4. To restore the original link profile values: 1. clutter classes. 2.7.4.4. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 199 . The Value tab displays a table and a profile view (see Figure 7.. Vegetation zones without foliage are displayed with with a pattern ( ). and clutter categories in the table. The Import dialogue appears.4 Importing Profile Values You can import data in the form of ASCII text files (in TXT and CSV formats) into the table of the Values tab.3 Copying and Pasting Profile Values You can copy and paste some profile values such as altitude. Hide Zones: Select Hide Zones to hide reflection areas and vegetation zones. 7. Click the Actions button and select Export. clutter heights. 2. Click the Edit button. Click the Edit button.7. Open the Values tab as explained in "Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 196. press CTRL+D.1.115). 3. Click the Edit button.6 Saving the Edited Profile Values When you edit the data in the profile table. Zones with foliage are displayed with with a pattern ( ).115). Display Slopes: Select Display Slopes to view the slope of the selected reflection area. Display Vegetation Zones without Foliage: Select Display Vegetation Zones without Foliage to view vegetation zones without foliage that Atolltakes into account when calculating vegetation losses.7. Open the Values tab as explained in "Using the Values Tab to Display Data of Each Point" on page 196.5 Exporting Profile Values You can export the entire table or selected columns to ASCII text files (in TXT or CSV formats) and MS Excel files. The Export dialogue appears.115). click the Actions button and select Paste.115).115).4.7. The Value tab displays a table and a profile view (see Figure 7. Define import settings as explained in "Importing Tables from Text Files" on page 50. To import data into the table: 1. Only editable values (i. You must already have selected Display Reflection Areas if you want to Display Slopes. To copy and paste profile values in the table: 1. Display Vegetation Zones with Foliage: Select Display Vegetation Zones with Foliage to view zones with foliage that Atolltakes into account when calculating vegetation losses.e. altitude. To copy the contents of the bottom cell of the selection into the other cells.1.

4. Select Optimisation Method from the context menu. from the context menu. 7.2. Right-click the antenna height pointer ( ). Atoll saves the current antenna height and tilt in the microwave link. To modify antenna heights using the mouse: 1. you can modify or optimise microwave links antenna heights. ). from the context menu. To perform an automatic optimisation for an antenna: 1. these height limits are displayed on the Profile tab. You can enter one or two values of the k factor and define for each of them a target clearance. Select Save Hx and Tilt. 2.2. 4. Click the antenna height pointer ( height. To modify the antenna height: 1. Right-click the antenna height pointer ( ). The context menu appears. where "x" is either "a" or "b" depending on the site. Note: You can specify a maximum pylon height for the receiving and transmitting sites not to be exceeded.4. 2. The Height Optimisation dialogue appears. Atoll saves the current antenna height and tilt in the microwave link. 4. you should define the antenna height to avoid any obstruction of the line-ofsight signal and reflections. Using the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. The context menu appears.2.4.1 Adjusting Microwave Antenna Heights Using the Mouse You can use the mouse to modify the antenna height of the extremity of a microwave link on the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. When defined. This parameter can be defined on the Other Properties tab of the Properties dialogue for each site. ) (the pointer changes ) and drag it up or down to modify the antenna 3. Open the Profile tab as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193.2 Defining Microwave Antenna Heights You can enter a new height for the antenna of the extremity of a microwave link on the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. 200 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Select Save Hx and Tilt. This parameter can be defined on the Other Properties tab of the Properties dialogue for each site. In this section. Atoll will determine antenna heights in order to fulfil the highest constraint. these height limits are displayed on the Profile tab. The context menu appears.2 Determining Microwave Link Antenna Heights When designing a microwave link network. 3. Click the button beside the microwave links list ( 3. Open the Profile tab as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. In Atoll.3 Automatically Optimising Microwave Antenna Heights Atoll enables you to automatically calculate antenna heights in order to avoid reflections and profile obstructions. the following are explained: • • • "Defining Microwave Antenna Heights" on page 200 "Defining Microwave Antenna Heights" on page 200 "Automatically Optimising Microwave Antenna Heights" on page 200. Note: You can specify a maximum pylon height for the receiving and transmitting sites not to be exceeded. When defined. Click the Actions button and select Refresh Geo Data.4. 2. 7. 7. Right-click the antenna height pointer ( ) and enter the exact antenna height. Atoll allows you to calculate and adjust the microwave link antenna heights at the two extremities to their optimum values. Select the optimisation method: Clearance Condition Method: The Clearance Condition Method is based on the clearance of the Fresnel ellipsoid. 7.Atoll User Manual 3. Open the Profile tab as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. where "x" is either "a" or "b" depending on the site.4. you can modify antenna heights using the mouse or enter new values and see the clearance and penetration parameters displayed.

4. This parameter can be defined in each site properties dialogue (Other Properties tab).. Site Site B or Repeater P Site B).3. and then enter the x-axis and y-axis coordinates. 7. "Creating or Modifying a Passive Repeater" on page 202. 7. The Properties dialogue has two tabs: • The General tab Name: The passive repeater name. the following are explained: • • • "Description of a Passive Repeater" on page 201. respectively. Antenna Position: You can modify the Antenna Position.. The second type is a plane reflector type passive repeater where a flat metal reflector is used to redirect the signal. These advantages mean that passive repeaters can be placed in relatively inaccessible areas. . Atoll can model both types of passive repeaters and provide you with access to all the relevant parameters. Right-click the antenna height pointer ( ).e. The following sections explain how Atoll models passive repeaters. distortions and rain etc. i.1 Description of a Passive Repeater The parameters of a passive repeater can be found in the passive repeater’s Properties dialogue. these are called back-to-back antenna passive repeaters.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management If you have out-of-date clutter class maps. Site: The site where the repeater is located (from the Sites table). "Placing a Passive Microwave Repeater on the Map Using the Mouse" on page 202. Only the height of the other antenna (assuming it is not loced as well) will be calculated to optimise the link. In Atoll. If defined. Hb and Tilts from the context menu to save the current antenna heights and tilts in the microwave link. it is not accessible for microwave link profiles involving one or more repeaters. these height limits are represented on the Profile tab. you can always restore the last antenna height value by selecting Restore from the same menu. Select the Take into account the reflection areas check box and define the range of k factor values (kmin and kmax) to be used during the antenna height optimisation if you want to take reflection into consideration. This enables you to prevent the antenna height from being modified during the optimisation process. There are two main types of passive repeaters. Minimum Diffraction Loss Method: Atoll determines antenna heights to minimise diffraction losses due to the main obstacle (i.4.3 Adding a Microwave Passive Repeater Passive repeaters are normally used to redirect the microwave signal around an obstruction. each traversing different type terrain. 9. Atoll takes this value into account for clutter categories from 6 to 14 and adds it to the clutter height. . Furthermore. The first type is where two antennas are placed back to back connected by a short feeder cable. Select Save Ha. these are often called passive reflectors or plane reflectors. This implies different propagation conditions for these two branches concerning fading. normally having different lengths and different inclinations. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 201 .. Passive repeaters divide the radio path into two branches.e. respectively. Right-click the the antenna height pointer ( menu appears.The context 8. and then enter the x-axis and y-axis offsets. a "repeater" is always a "passive repeater. Due to this property of passive repeaters they are also referred to as "beam benders". 6. ) for the site whose antenna height you want to optimise. 10. Note: You can specify a maximum pylon height for the receiving and transmitting sites not to be exceeded." In this section.Coordinates: Select this option if you want to enter the coordinates of the antenna position. You can also use the context menu to lock the antenna height.Relative to Site: Select this option if you want to enter the antenna position as offsets with respect to the site location. 7. It enables you to calculate optimum antenna heights for two-site microwave link profiles (e. X and Y. The context menu appears. This feature is only available for unbroken microwave link profiles. Choose Optimise to calculate the optimum antenna heights for both extremities. 5. Passive repeaters have the following advantages over active sites: • • • • • No power is required No regular road access is required No equipment housing is needed They are environmentally friendly Little or no maintenance is required. Dx and Dy. if you wish.g. you can estimate the growth of vegetation (Projected tree or foliage growth). it calculates antenna heights to get a clearance of 60% of the first Fresnel zone). Click OK.

4. 202 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . When you create a passive microwave repeater. through the passive repeater’s Properties dialogue. The context menu appears. described in "Description of a Passive Repeater" on page 201. define the following parameters: Under Antenna1. d. you can apply an additional filter by clicking the button ( ) beside the model field. Azimuth: The azimuth towards the site of transmission. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. 4. Click OK. Right-click the Links folder. you can choose the waveguide and define the length. e.3 Placing a Passive Microwave Repeater on the Map Using the Mouse In Atoll. Click the Expand button ( ) to the left of the Microwave Radio Links folder to expand the folder. 3. see "Copying and Pasting in Tables" on page 47. If you want. How you access the Properties dialogue depends on whether you are creating a new passive repeater or modifying an existing passive repeater. c. Under Antenna2. define the antenna height. you can add it to an existing site. You can access the properties of a passive repeater. you can do it quickly by editing or pasting the data directly in the Passive Repeaters table. The passive repeater’s Properties dialogue appears. define the antenna height. you can choose the antenna. c. you can choose the antenna. b. Tilt: The tilt angle towards the site of transmission. Tip: If you are creating several passive repeaters at the same time. the azimuth and tilt angles towards the site of transmission. For a reflector type repeater.2 Creating or Modifying a Passive Repeater You can modify an existing passive repeater or you can create a new passive repeater. 7. Atoll proposes in the list waveguides compatible with the selected antennas as defined in the Antenna/Guides Compatibility table. d. Select Passive Repeaters > Open Table from the context menu. the appear- ance of the button changes ( ). the azimuth and tilt angles towards the site of reception. f. If you are creating a new passive repeater: a. Modify the parameters described in "Description of a Passive Repeater" on page 201. b. Select Passive Repeaters > New from the context menu. You can open the Passive Repeaters table by rightclicking the Links folder on the Data tab of the Explorer window and selecting Passive Repeaters > Open Table from the context menu. If you are modifying the properties of an existing site: a. Right-click the passive repeater in the Passive Repeaters table.Atoll User Manual Frequency Band: The operating frequency band of the passive repeater and its position relative to the site. you can create a passive microwave repeater and place it using the mouse. Height: The reflector height. or have Atoll automatically create a new site. ) next You can access the Properties of the selected site and frequency band by clicking the Browse button ( to the corresponding item. To create or modify a passive repeater: 1. define these parameters: Surface: The surface area for the repeater. • The Type tab Type: Define whether the passive repeater is a reflector type or back-to-back antenna type repeater.4. and specify whether the antennas have a crossed polarisation. By default. The Passive Repeaters table appears. Select Record Properties from the context menu. You can click the Calculate button ( - For a back-to-back antenna type repeater. Under Waveguide.3. The Passive Repeaters New Element Properties dialogue appears. In this case. 2.3. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Right-click the Links folder. Atoll lists waveguides that operate in the frequency band defined for the repeater. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. When the filter is active. You can click the Calculate button ( ) to automatically calculate azimuth and tilt angles. The context menu appears. or modifying several existing passive repeaters. For information on copying and pasting data. 7. ) to automatically calculate azimuth and tilt angles. The context menu appears.

Calculation parameters include global parameters applied to all microwave links and link parameters such as geoclimatic and reliability parameters defined per link.1 Analysing a Single Microwave Link When you create a microwave link. One of the trajectories towards a repeater (if any). In practice. you can study it to test the effectiveness of the set parameters. Setting link parameters is explained in "Link Parameters" on page 159. you must assign a propagation model. Click the map to place the repeater. antenna parameters. You can assign a link class to all microwave links at once. For information on defining the properties of the new microwave passive repeater. radio parameters. The following terms are used in Atoll for passive repeaters and related parameters: • • Passive repeaters (maximum 2) along a microwave link are named repeater P and repeater Q respectively. A part of the link is called a "Section. Select Panel Reflector or Back-to-back Antennas from the menu according to the type of passive repeater you want to create.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management Atoll permits a maximum of 2 passive repeaters in a single microwave link. Site A Site P. 3. For example: Unidirectional link without repeater: 1 section. Ideally. The propagation model takes the radio and geographic data into account and computes losses along the microwave link path." A section can be: One of the directions of a bi-directional link. You can select it from the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab.5. Site Q Site B. Click the arrow next to New Repeater button ( ) on the Microwave toolbar. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 203 . or directly on the map. this performance level is never achieved over any microwave link due the continuously changing propagation conditions and possible problems in the equipment. Reliability analysis takes into consideration the parameters of fade margin. The repeater is placed on the map. In this section. or to a single microwave link. terrain roughness calculations. Site Q Site P. Site B Site Q. Note: You can also insert a repeater in a microwave link by selecting Insert Repeater from the microwave link’s context menu and then clicking on the microwave link where you want to insert the repeater. "Performing a End-to-End Reliability Analysis" on page 208. Microwave link classes are used to differentiate microwave link types and give target performance objectives to microwave links. The objective of carrying out reliability analyses is to estimate the non-availability or outage of a microwave link on annual basis and to determine the quality of connection over worst case or average monthly scenarios. define the microwave link class and related performance objectives and set the calculation parameters. This allows you to predict the received signal level and to calculate the thermal fade margin. transmission and reception parameters and other miscellaneous losses. Before analysing the microwave link reliability. see "Description of a Passive Repeater" on page 201. "Analysing Microwave Links" on page 206. Site P Site A. Select the microwave link. 2. Site P Site Q. to a group of microwave links. The operating frequency band of the repeater is the frequency band assigned to the microwave link and azimuth(s) for the repeater antenna(s) are calculated according to the directions of the two sections of the microwave link. a microwave link should be completely reliable 100% of the time. 4. Assigning a link class is explained in "Defining Microwave Link Classes and Performance Objectives" on page 154. diffraction loss. average annual temperature. Site A Site B and Site B Site A Bi-directional link with 2 repeaters: 6 sections. represented by the site symbol ( ). Defining global parameters is explained in "Global Parameters" on page 156. You can assign a propagation model to all microwave links at once. 7. the following are explained: • • • "Analysing a Single Microwave Link" on page 203.5 Analysing Microwave Link Reliability Reliability is the general term used to refer to the quality and availability of a microwave link obtained through assessing its performance according to the criteria defined in the relevant performance objectives. Assigning a propagation model is explained in "Using Propagation Models in Microwave Projects" on page 151. to a group of microwave links. 7. or to a single microwave link. To create a passive microwave repeater and place it using the mouse: 1. Site A Site B Bi-directional link without repeater: 2 sections. A microwave link reliability analysis determines whether a designed system will operate successfully. Atoll automatically creates a new repeater in the Passive Repeaters table and a new site in the Sites table that is assigned to the newly created repeater.

Choose Engineering > Required Margin from the context menu. azimuths. the operating frequency band of the microwave link. Microwave link required margin results on the EPO tab include the following information: • Link Specifications: Including the information about the sites at the two extremities of the link (name.1. a snapshot from the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window in order to facilitate direct visualisation and printing of the link profile with the link budget report and an extract of the map window showing the studied link and the surrounding area. Requirements: the required output power you can compare to the current output power displayed in brackets. passive repeater gains (if any). You can also open the Report tab by opening the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window and clicking the Report tab. the equipment installed at each site (name. modulation used. 2. i. its length and calculation parameters (propagation model. Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map. compatible digital hierarchy. heights. Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map. Moreover.1 Calculating Microwave Link Required Margins Atoll allows you to determine the margins required by the microwave link to meet the performance objectives defined in the link class.. altitude and coordinate system).2 Calculating a Microwave Link Budget Atoll provides you with a detailed microwave link budget tool. the following are explained: • • • • • "Calculating Microwave Link Required Margins" on page 204 "Calculating a Microwave Link Budget" on page 204.1. margin against discrimination reduction. gains. This is a comprehensive report and can be configured as described in the Configuring the performance objectives report display section. This tab contains the report generated after the calculation of required margins. microwave transceiver equipment installed at both sites with details such as the models. quality objectives (SESR. Rx Level: The reception level information at the receiver including the Bit Error Rate and the receiver sensitivity. tilts. The microwave link required margins are listed on the EPO tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window. 2. diameters and near fields. Select Engineering > Report from the context menu. modulation used. the thermal fade margin. tilts. how much you have to decrease or increase the maximum power and the required antenna diameter. site names. a basic budget including the operating frequency band. data rates. • • • • • 7. gains and diameters. location. Quality (Clear-Air): The data related to the margin calculations and results (acquired margin against dispersive fading. minimal channel bandwidths. you can read whether quality and availability objectives have been reached for both directions of the link and the specified BER values. Microwave link budget results on the Report tab include the following information: • Summary: Under Summary. transmitter powers. models for availability and quality calculations. "Printing and Exporting the Link Budget Report" on page 206 7. ESR.5. diversity antennas and repeater back-to-back antenna details such as the models. rate. calculated and required thermal fade margins and calculated and required composite fade margins) and the required total margin. repeaters (if any). capacity. their relevant required error performance objective probabilities and required margins) and the total required margin. margin against enhancements. ESR. To generate a microwave link budget for a single microwave link: 1. BBER) and availability objectives (SESR.Atoll User Manual In this section. any modifications made to the profile of the microwave link using the Profile tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window or any modifications in the geography of the microwave link profile made through the Values tab are taken into account in the link budget on the Report tab. it is possible to modify the properties of the microwave link. The context menu appears. digital hierarchy employed. Performance Objectives taken into account: The performance objectives considered in the margin calculations. or from the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab.5. Therefore. and altitudes for both extremities. whether discrimination reduction and enhancements are taken into account). or from the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. To calculate the microwave link required margins: 1. minimal channel bandwidth and the configuration). total losses comprising filter losses. capacities and configurations. BBER). antennas used at both sites with their respective models. This tool generates a comprehensive report for each studied microwave link as detailed below. Availability (Rain): The data related to the margin calculations and results (the error performance parameters. locations. azimuths. ATPC effects. Link specifications: Information relating to the microwave link design. Furthermore. "Modifying Microwave Link Calculation Parameters" on page 205. and immediately display the impact of the modifications in the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window (both Profile and Report tabs). or the calculation parameters. heights. the link length. the results provided in this report are calculated in real-time. The context menu appears. This will open the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window with the EPO tab displayed by default.e. Transmission parameters: Transmission related parameters for both extremities of the microwave link including the EIRP. • • 204 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . "Configuring the Link Budget Report Display" on page 206. the worst month quality (in % of time) and the average annual availability (in % of time). a global estimation of the cut off duration over an average year taking into account both link quality and availability. The Report tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window contains the link budget for the link being studied.

outage probability due to faults for the average year and the outage period for the average year and the performance objective. You can define the studied port. BBER (required)). quality objectives (SESR. 2. These results include the outage probability. Unavailability due to faults: Results depicting the unavailability of the microwave link due to equipment failure. earth curvature factor (k). 2. When you have finished modifying analysis parameters. fading due to discrimination reduction). availability model. details for the average year (rain fading. shared losses. click one of the following: Save in the Link: Click Save in the Link to save these changes in the microwave link properties and click OK to close the dialogue. the required C/I and total losses at reception comprising filter losses. diffraction losses. port connection losses. performance objectives (probabilities of SESR (required). These results include the outage probability. connection losses. To modify analysis parameters for a link: 1. shielding losses. To modify calculation parameters for analysis: 1. the corresponding frequency. quality model. the non-outage probability and the outage period for the worst month. the outage probability. BBER (required)). Select Calculation Parameters. Take Frequency Diversity Into Account: If you want to take frequency diversity into account. and waveguides and cable losses. Gain difference between antennas: Define the difference of gain between both antennas. ESR (required). or change calculation models.1. OK: Click OK without clicking Save in the Link to check the impact of the selected options on the report without modifying the microwave link properties. PL percentage. if enhancements and discrimination reduction are ignored. Geoclimatic parameters: Information about the type of environment and the climatic zone in which the link is operating. vegetation attenuation (displayed for information only because it is taken into consideration in total attenuation). The Microwave Radio Link Properties dialogue appears. if it is a main channel or a standby channel or a channel for frequency diversity. • • • • • • • • This is a comprehensive report and can be configured as described in "Configuring the Link Budget Report Display" on page 206. ESR (required). shared losses. enhancement forecast). 3.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management connection losses. overflow thresholds. free space loss. The context menu appears. losses due to water vapour. etc. The Hop Analysis Parameters dialogue appears. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 205 . fading due to discrimination reduction. water vapour density. rain attenuation. Click OK to check the impact of the selected options on the report. the non-outage probability and the outage period for the worst month. the nonoutage probability and the outage period for the average year. ESR. click the Actions button. thermal noise. In the Report tab (or the EPO tab). and waveguides and cable losses. In the Report tab (or the EPO tab). antenna losses and tropospheric scattering. losses due to dry air. temperature. select the Take Frequency Diversity into Account check box and define the number of separation channels. see "Global Parameters" on page 156. For further information. selective fading. 7. 3. performance objectives (probabilities of SESR (required). These results include availability of hot standby. You can set the following options: Take Space Diversity Into Account: If you want to take space diversity into account. select the Take Space Diversity into Account check box and define the following: Distance between antennas: Define the distance between main and diversity antennas.01% of time). the transmission and reception port numbers. Inverse Polarisation: Select the Inverse Polarisation check box if you want to take inverse polarisation into account. rain intensity (exceeding 0. Port Configuration: Port configuration related parameters for both directions. Unavailability due to rain: Results depicting the unavailability of the microwave link due to rain in both direction. BBER). details for the worst month (dispersive fading. interference. the port circulator and attenuator losses. 4.. Calculation parameters: Parameters according to which the calculations for the link budget have been performed such as the calculation methods used (propagation model.3 Modifying Microwave Link Calculation Parameters You can study the influence of some parameters on the microwave link engineering by changing some calculation options. Select Analysis Parameters for the Hop. Propagation: the nominal received signal level. BER values. effective earth curvature factor (ke) and the geoclimatic factor K. click the Actions button. shielding losses. the outage probability. for specified BER values and when interference is not taken into account. the nonoutage probability and the outage period for the average year. propagation results for both directions of the microwave link including total attenuation. epsilon and the type of path (LOS or NLOS). the channel. BBER). ESR. and the port and the channel for which the calculations have been performed (maybe the central frequency of the microwave link’s operating frequency band). for specified BER values and when interference is not taken into account.5. and availability objectives (SESR. The context menu appears. Reception parameters: Reception related parameters for both ends of the microwave link including the bit error ratios and sensitivities at the receivers. the polarisation. climatic factor. polarisation at both sites. port connection losses. Non-quality due to multi-path (Clear-Air): Results depicting the quality of the microwave link in both directions. space diversity and frequency diversity).

The computation zone is used to define the area where Atoll carries out calculations. The next time you configure a reflection analysis report. When working with a large network. Click one style. Microwave links in Atoll can be grouped in subfolders according to different property parameters (e. that are selected by the current filter parameters). availability and interference analyses and associated reports and statistics only take into account active microwave links (and not filtered 206 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . d. The computation zone is taken into account whether or not it is visible. select the AaBbYyZz button.5. you can click Open in the Report Configuration dialogue to open your configuration file with the same settings you used this time. In this section.4 Configuring the Link Budget Report Display You can configure the display parameters of the report generated under the Report and EPO tabs to display some or all of the parameters used in the calculations and results of the calculations with different styles. Select Export in order to export the link budget report in RTF format. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand a result category. you can decide whether or not to activate them. Centred and Align Right. 2. and intersect the computation zone. a. You can launch simultaneous link budget calculations for the microwave links grouped in a subfolder. To restore the selected results as initially or to refresh the list of results available.2 Analysing Microwave Links Atoll enables you to calculate multiple microwave link budgets for a group of microwave links simultaneously. select the Reset button. click the Actions button and select Configure Report. To configure the report display: 1. To print or export the report: 1.5 Printing and Exporting the Link Budget Report After you have configured the reports displayed in the Report and EPO tabs. it will be taken into account whether or not its visibility check box in the Zones folder of the Geo tab in the Explorer window is selected. d. the following are explained: • • • • "Setting a Microwave Link as Active" on page 206 "Defining the Content of the Link Budget Report" on page 207 "Calculating Multiple Microwave Link Budgets" on page 207 "Managing Link Budget Calculation Validity" on page 208 7. To restore the initial style. filtered (i. c. In the Report tab (or the EPO tab). b. Before calculating one or more link budgets. Click OK. 7. When you create a computation zone. To change the font. The results are displayed in the form of a report. Note: You can save the choices you have made in the Report Configuration dialogue as a configuration file by clicking the Save As button at the top of the dialogue and entering a name for the file in the Save As dialogue that appears. For information on the computation zone. select the Reset button. Atoll reduces both the time and computer resources necessary for calculations. 4.1 Setting a Microwave Link as Active Once microwave links are set up within a network. click the Actions button in the window to open its context menu..1. Click the Style tab. To hide a result.1. 7. a. 3. Click the Contents tab. the computation zone allows you to restrict your studies to the part of the network you are currently working on. b.Atoll User Manual 7. a.5. by frequency band). you can create a computation zone. you can print them or export them. The Report Configuration dialogue appears.e. In other words. Select Print in order to print the link budget report.. Choose how to align the paragraph. see "Using a Computation Zone" on page 30. Quality.5. if you have drawn a computation zone. b. In the Report tab (or the EPO tab). To display a result.2. clear its check box. select its check box. If there is no computation zone defined. By allowing you to reduce the number of microwave links studied.g. Atoll makes its calculations on all microwave links in the subfolder that are active and filtered and for the entire extent of the geographical data available. You will have to delete the computation zone if you no longer want to define an area for calculations.5. c. You can choose beween Align Left. Atoll carries out the calculation for all microwave links in the subfolder that are active.

Right-click the Links folder. To set an individual microwave link as active: 1.5. To remove a field from the list of Selected Fields. Select Activate Links from the context menu. see "Chapter 6: Managing Calculations in Atoll". 4. To set a group of microwave links as active. 2. 5. 4.2. The context menu appears. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. The context menu appears. inactive You can set an individual microwave link as active from its context menu or you can set more than one microwave link as active by activating them from the Links context menu. pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field. 7.2 Defining the Content of the Link Budget Report Before calculating the link budget. The objects will be displayed in the order of the fields in the Selected Fields list. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. The transmitter is now active. click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Links folder and rightclick the group of microwave links you want to set as active.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management microwave links). Click OK to validate the selection of fields to be displayed in the report. You can select contiguous fields by clicking the first field. The next time you configure a report. The context menu appears. The Links table appears with each microwave link’s parameters in a second row. Click the Expand button ( 3. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 207 . To set more than one microwave link as active using the Links context menu: 1. For each microwave link that you want to set as active. right-click the Links folder. Click OK to return to the Properties dialogue. select the field in the Available Fields list and click to move it to the Selected Fields list. In the Explorer window. Select Open Table. Select Link Budgets > Properties from the context menu.5. ) to expand the Links folder. 3. you can define the content of the link budget report. active microwave links are displayed in red ( links are displayed in grey ( ). select the field in the Selected Fields list and click to remove it. 3. c. Click Add.2. The selected microwave links are set as active. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. from top to bottom. 5. you can click Open in the Properties dialogue to open your configuration file with the same settings you used this time. The context menu appears. Once you have ensured that all microwave links are active. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 4. The Properties dialogue appears. 7. To define the content of the link budget report: 1. Select Active Link from the context menu. You can select non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRL and clicking each fields separately. select the fields that you want to display in the report. select the check box in the Activate column. Atoll displays a default set of fields and lets you select other information to be included in the report. To change the order of the fields. 3. select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list. Select the microwave links you want to set as active: To set all microwave links as active. To set more than one microwave link as active using the Links table: 1. b. Right-click the microwave link you want to activate. For information on choosing and configuring a propagation model and calculation parameters. ) in the Links folder. Define the content of the report: a. In the Field Selection dialogue.3 Calculating Multiple Microwave Link Budgets You can calculate a link budget for all microwave links or for a group of microwave links. 2. 2. To select a field to be included in the report. The Field Selection dialogue appears. The context menu appears. Right-click the Links folder. 2. Note: You can save the choices you have made in the Field Selection dialogue as a configuration file by clicking the Save As button at the top of the dialogue and entering a name for the file in the Save As dialogue that appears. you can set the propagation model and other calculation parameters.

Select Link Budgets > Calculate from the context menu. The progress of the calculations is displayed in the Event Viewer window. you can quickly perform a link budget for a group of links. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. outage probabilities) are saved in the Atoll document. You can access each microwave link’s properties by double clicking the corresponding record in the report. Atoll indicates the characteristics of the link (sites. unavailability due to rain. 2. The context menu appears. "Adding a Microwave Link to a Multi-hop Link Using the Mouse" on page 209. and its quality and availability.. calculation options. the following are explained: • • "Creating Multi-hops" on page 208 "Performing a End-to-End Reliability Analysis" on page 210 7. "Setting all Microwave Links of a Multi-Hop Link as Active" on page 210.4 Managing Link Budget Calculation Validity Link budget calculations performed for a group of microwave links (i. unavailability due to faults). 208 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Atoll enables you to perform end-to-end reliability analysis over multi-hops. In general practice. "Mapping Multiple Multi-hop Links and Microwave Links Globally" on page 210. Atoll removes existing calculations. This report lists the results for all studied microwave links in the selected directions (site A site B/site B site A) and for the defined BER values. For the first two reasons. If geographic data maps have been updated. microwave multi-hop links are used for two purposes. Atoll only recalculates non-existent and invalid microwave links. Right-click the subfolder under the Links folder for which you want to calculate link budgets. antennas and equipment installed).e. It displays the transmission parameters (EIRP. a multi-hop is managed as a group of microwave links. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Links folder.5. the signal level received. various losses. b. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. "Creating a Multi-hop on the Map Using the Mouse" on page 209.. Select Link Budgets > Force Calculations from the context menu.5. 2.). All the results are provided in both the directions of the microwave link being studied. 7. various losses.Atoll User Manual To perform link budget calculations on a group of microwave links: 1. To recalculate the link budget for a subfolder of links under the Links folder: a. 3. The context menu appears.g. you must force Atoll to recalculate. In this section. The context menu appears. So.2. To recalculate the link budget for the entire Links folder: Right-click the Links folder. To force Atoll to recalculate the link budget: 1. A microwave link can be common to more than one multihop as well. If microwave link properties have been modified. and geo-climatic parameters.). In this section.3.3 Performing a End-to-End Reliability Analysis AtollMulti-hop microwave links. etc. Notes • • You can stop any calculations in progress by clicking the Stop Calculations button ( ) in the toolbar. 7. the fade margin. It also details the propagation calculation (total attenuation) and the calculations related to link engineering (quality (Clear-Air). intermediate results such as propagation. Calculations can become invalid for different reasons: • • • If a calculation method or option has been changed. or multi-hops. if you added a new clutter class map). Atoll displays the link budget report. reception parameters (sensitivity.1 Creating Multi-hops In Atoll. 3. Atoll automatically detects invalidity of the calculation when starting calculations and makes the recalculation. to construct a microwave connection over areas that do not provide line-of-sight and to transfer signals through microwave links over large distances. etc. are sets of two or more microwave links that are interconnected to get to a destination. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. once calculations have been performed for all the links. and recalculates the link budget. Right-click the Links folder. In the last case (e. including valid ones.5. the following are explained: • • • • • "Creating a Multi-hop" on page 209.

The Multi-hops folder opens. The next microwave link in the multi-hop links series is initialised based on the parameters of the preceding one (by inversing the site parities). Select the Links tab. Click the Expand button ( opens. d. Click on the map in each place you want to end a link and start a new link. 3. b. Select Add a Link from the context menu.5. 3. Right-click on the multi-hop link. Enter or modify the following fields on the General tab: Name: The Name field is filled automatically by Atoll. 2. Select New… from the context menu.3. Assign links to the multi-hop: a. The Multi-Hops New Element Properties dialogue appears. Click OK.1. 7. Click the button of the Microwave Radio Links folder. Or a. ).3 Creating a Multi-hop on the Map Using the Mouse To create a new multi-hop link using the mouse: 1.3. By default. The context menu appears.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management 7. 7. Right-click the new multi-hop link and select Properties from the context menu. b. 4. The Properties dialogue appears. The Microwave Radio Links folder opens. Double-click at the location you want to define as the end of the multi-hop link. On the map. The Microwave Radio Links folder ) to expand the Multi-hops folder. b. The Multi-hops folder opens. 5. Open the context menu of the multi-hop link to which you want to add a microwave link: Either a. 7. Select a link from the Link column. Note: The Other Properties tab will appear if you have defined additional fields in the Multihops table. Atoll uses this information with the multi-hop length to calculate the performance objectives required for the multi-hop.3. The context menu appears. Once you have selected a multi-hops class. Multi-Hops Class: Select the multi-hops class from the list. Click the Multi-hop button ( ) on the toolbar. 9.1. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. in the map window. click the line of the multi-hop link to which you want to add a microwave link. click the microwave link you want to add to the multi-hop link. The microwave link is added to the list of links forming the multi-hop link and assigned an order automatically. 8.1. Atoll creates an empty multi-hop link in the Multi-hops folder. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 209 . Right-click on the multi-hop link to which you want to add a microwave link.5. The end site of the preceding link is considered to be the start site for the next link within a multi-hop link. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Multi-hops folder. - 6. Enter a number in the Order column to set the position of this link in the multi-hop.5. The pointer changes ( ). Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. 11. In the map. but can be modified. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. 4. The pointer shape changes to 3. Right-click on the Multi-hops folder. 2.1 Creating a Multi-hop To create a new multi-hop link using the Multi-hops folder: 1. 10. you can view and modify the class properties by clicking the Browse button ( Comments: Enter any comments for this new multi-hop. Atoll names the newly created multi-hop link in the following manner: "Multi-hopsX". The context menu appears. Click OK. Click on the map to create the first site of the multi-hop link.2 Adding a Microwave Link to a Multi-hop Link Using the Mouse To add a microwave link to a multi-hop link using the mouse: 1. where "X" increments with each instance of a multi-hop link. c. 2.

4. monthly and annual outage periods. If no site exists. Transmission site characteristics: the frequency band. Summary: Atoll indicates if quality and availability objectives have been reached for both directions of the link. 2. In this table. This calculation is based on the ITU-R 530-5/8/10 recommendations. sub-band. Expand the Multi-Hops folder by clicking the button 3. 5. In the Explorer window. Note: Links within a network that are part of multi-hop links but are based on other technologies. active microwave links are displayed in red ( ) in the Multi-Hops folder. are also supported in the calculation. and polarisation of each transmitting site. 3. Quality and availability analyses only take into account active microwave links and not inactive or filtered microwave links). Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. inactive links are displayed in grey ( ). 7. delete. transmitters. BBER) compared to the required performance objectives and unavailability due to faults comprising annual outages due to faults and annual outage period.5. 2. add. Select Analysis from the context menu. 7. The End-to-End Analysis dialogue appears. Do one of the following: Select Activate Links to make all microwave links of the multi-hop link active. Right-click the multi-hop that you want to analyse.4 Mapping Multiple Multi-hop Links and Microwave Links Globally Atoll allows you to map multiple microwave links to the multi-hop links . Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. availability (percentage over average year) and failures (percentage over year). To map multiple links to multi-hop links: 1. 4. 7. you can display reflection areas along the link profile and analyse the location of the reflection point and its impact on the received signal level.6 Studying Reflection Studying reflection is essential to designing any microwave link network. quality (percentage over a month).1.3. To change the activity status of all microwave links of a multi-hop: 1. Atollcalculates the reflection point using 2-Ray model. 210 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Select Mapping Between Multi-hops and Links from the context menu.3.2 Performing a End-to-End Reliability Analysis Atoll enables you to perform end-to-end reliability analyses over multi-hop links. Select Deactivate Links to make all microwave links of the multi-hop link inactive.1. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. Atoll will create new sites automatically at the location you click. you can modify. margins.Atoll User Manual The sites that define the extremities of a multi-hop link can be already existing sites. To perform an end-to-end reliability analysis over a multi-hop link: 1. ESR. channels. In Atoll. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. The context menu appears. The interference can generate a fading (called reflective fading) that can lower down the received signal.3. 4. and passive repeaters. containing all the multi-hop links and their corresponding microwave links. The Multi-Hop Links table appears. total length of the multi-hop link. and change the order of the links that make up a multi-hop link. A reflected signal that can reach the receiver with enough strength and with a certain delay as compared to the direct signal can generate interference. Right-click the multi-hop link whose activity status you want to set. 2. Click the Expand button ( 3. ) to expand the Multi-Hops folder.5. quality indicators (probabilities of SESR.5 Setting all Microwave Links of a Multi-Hop Link as Active You can activate or deactivate all microwave links belonging to a multi-hop link. It contains the following information: Multi-hop link characteristics: the microwave links forming the multi-hop link. Right-click the Multi-Hops folder. Multi-hop link budget (both directions): Clear-air quality and unavailability due to rain including total outage ratio. Each site in Atoll can support several microwave links. 7. The context menu appears. such as optic fibre links. Reception characteristics: reception thresholds. The context menu appears.5.

or the reflection point is out of the reflection area. The reflection zone is determined from antenna heights and ground altitude at the transmitter and receiver sites. Interference can be destructive when the reflection point is located within the reflection area and the reflected signal is received at the receiver side (i. - 7. Orange: The reflection point is within the reflection area but the reflected signal is obstructed. - 6. The context menu appears. For information on assigning clutter categorries to clutter classes in the propagation model properties. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 211 .1 Displaying Reflection Atoll displays reflection areas along the profile and provides information about the interference generated by the reflected signal. the reflected signal is not obstructed). Display the critical reflection zone when k factor varies: Select the Display the critical reflection zone when k factor varies check box if you want to display the reflection zone regardless of clutter categories. This one is used to determine the reflection point. Under Display tide levels. 2. 5. it is not obstructed). For information on defining the range of k factor values.e.6. Atollcolours the pattern and highlights the corresponding unobstructed reflected path if there is one. The reflection can create destructive interference. Reflection areas are represented with a hashed pattern and unobstructed reflected signals by orange lines. The reflection does not create destructive interference. Red: The reflection point is within the reflection area and the reflected signal is received at the receiver side (i. the following are explained: • • • "Displaying Reflection" on page 211. Under For the selected area. if there is a reflection point within the reflection area. You can display additional information regarding reflected paths. The option is automatically selected after you have displayed reflections as explained in the paragraph above. "Solutions Against Reflections" on page 215. you can select the following options: Display the specular reflection point: Select the Display the specular reflection point check box if you want to display reflection areas along the link profile and unobstructed reflected paths. "Analysing Reflections" on page 212. Display the microwave link profile as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. Obstructed reflected signals are represented with orange dashed lines. Display all the paths: Select the Display all the paths check box if you want to display all possible reflected signals within the reflection area.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management Clutter categories are taken into account in the reflection study and must be assigned to clutter classes in the microwave propagation model properties before analysing reflections along the profile. The context menu appears. see "Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters" on page 214. Display the reflection plan: Select the Display the reflection plan check box in order to display the reflection slope. To display reflection areas: 1. it is not based on the defined clutter categories. For information on defining the range of k factor values. see "Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters" on page 214. 3. 7. Right-click the Profile tab. Select Display Reflections from the context menu. see "Working with the Microwave Propagation Model" on page 151 Reflection point can have different locations as the k factor vary during the day. Display the microwave link profile as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. To display additional information: 1. 2. 3. Under For All Reflection Zones.e. Select Display Options from the context menu. select the Reflection tab. select the Display tide levels check box in order to display the height variation due to tides above the sea water clutter category. the reflection analysis has to be performed for different k factor values. you have to check if this zone is a reflection area and in this case. In this section. see "Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters" on page 214. 4. Click one reflection area. For information on defining the height variation. 4. The Profile Display Options dialogue appears. you can select the following options: Display the reflections for the k factor range: Select the Display the reflections for the k factor range check box if you want to display unobstructed and obstructed reflected paths calculated for the defined range of k factor values. The colour indicates if the reflection can generate destructive interference. Then. Right-click the Profile tab. Green: Either there is no reflection point. In the Profile Display Options dialogue. Display the obstructed reflections: Select the Display the obstructed reflections check box if you want to display obstructed reflected signals. Atolldisplays reflection areas and unobstructed reflected signals calculated for the first k factor value defined in the Profile tab. Therefore. The reflection does not create destructive interference.

99% of the average year in millimetre per hour. To display a detailed analysis of reflection areas: 1. 2. For more information on how the ground type is determined.1 Displaying the Reflection Analysis Report Atoll provides detailed analysis of reflection areas and their impact on microwave links. The Study of reflections and diversity window appears. i. 5. Link Specifications: You will find data on the studied microwave link: Longitude: The site position on the x-axis. Relative Humidity: The relative humidity in %. the profile should not include repeaters.. Display the microwave link profile as explained in "Viewing a Microwave Link Profile" on page 193. Right-click the reflection area. see the Technical Reference Guide. The Report tab contains the following sections: Summary: The Summary part provides information on the impact of the reflection on the direct signal. Click a reflection area. Geoclimatic Parameters: You will find geoclimatic parameters defined for the studied microwave link: Ground Characteristics: The Ground Characteristics part contains the following information: - - - Reflection area geometry: The Reflection area geometry part contains the following information: 212 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . If required. Humidity Type: The humidity type depends on the clutter category. Geoclimatic factor (K): The K factor which models geo-climatic and terrain effects on climate.Atoll User Manual Note: Reflection paths and reflective surfaces can only be visualised and analysed over unbroken microwave link profiles. Height: The site altitude. Atoll recommends some solutions to minimise the reflection effects such as changing the receiver antenna tilt or implementing diversity techniques. "Very dry" is considered for built-up area and dry ground clutter categories. Angle at A between direct and reflected ray: The angle between the direct and the reflected paths at Site A. Ground Type: It can be either scattering. "Water or very wet" is considered for wet terrains. it displays optimal antenna and frequency separations to be used with diversity techniques for the k factor defined in the Profile tab. It depends on the roughness. Water Vapour Density: The water vapour density in grams per cubic metre. or reflecting. The context menu appears. 7. Latitude: The site position on the y-axis.e. Coordinate System: The display coordinate system set in the . Select Reflection and Diversity Analysis from the context menu. "Configuring the Reflection Analysis Report" on page 214. 7. "Slightly wet or moderatly dry" is used for rural open. Frequency Band: The operating frequency band selected in the microwave link properties. Temparature: The average temperature (in °C) of the zone in which the microwave link operates. Effective Coefficient Reflection: The reflection coefficient of the reflection area. Length: The microwave link length. It consists of two tabs: the Report tab displayed by default and the Attenuation Graphs tab.atl document. Right-click the Profile tab. or intermediate. 4.6.2 Analysing Reflections In this section. Rainfall Rate (exceeded during 0. The context menu appears.6. tree covered and cryosphere clutter categories. the length of the link and the transmitter antenna height above the reflection area. 6.01% of the average year): The rainfall observed 99. Critical specular reflection point: This indicates if there is a reflection point for the selected reflection zone. In addition. 3. Total Reflection Area Length: The length of the selected reflection zone and the total length including all reflection zones into brackets. the following are explained: • • • "Displaying the Reflection Analysis Report" on page 212. Terrain Roughness Factor: The terrain roughness factor.2. 7. Select the Report tab. Earth Curvature Factor (k): The k factor defined in the Profile tab. Select Display Reflections from the context menu. fresh and sea water clutter categories. Grazing angle of reflected ray: The grazing angle and the incidence angle of the reflected path on the reflection slope plane are complementary angles. "Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters" on page 214.

kavg corresponds to the k factor value defined in the Profile tab. if enhancements and discrimination reduction are ignored. quality model. you can select the following information: - - Geoclimatic Parameters: Under Geoclimatic Parameters. Calculation Methods: The calculation methods used (propagation model. see "Global Parameters" on page 156. see "Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters" on page 214. Direct Signal Attenuation: The attenuation of the direct signal at the receiver side. Availability Objectives: The availability objectives (SESR. Polarisation: The antenna polarisation. This is the sum of the attenuation due to antenna discrimination and the attenuation due to ground reflection. see "Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters" on page 214.9% of time. Total Attenuation: The total attenuation of the reflected signal at the receiver side. the support type and custom fields. Median Value of the k factor: the k factor value observed 50% of time. For information on defining the kmin and kmax. Environment Type: The terrain type as defined in the link properties. Conductivity: The terrain conductivity in S/m. you select the corresponding check boxes: Summary: Under Summary. kavg and kmax). space diversity and frequency diversity). Climatic Zone: The climatic zone as defined in the link properties. Climatic Factor: The geoclimatic factor as defined in the link properties. Attenuations: The Attenuations part contains the following results calculated for the k factor value defined in the Profile tab: Reflected Signal Attenuation: The attenuation of the reflected signal at the receiver side. <Field Selection>: The results listed after can be calculated for three k factor values (kmin. you can select the following information: Detailed Study: You can read if the specular reflection point is within the reflection area. The signal attenuation is due to the receiver antenna (Attenuation due to antenna discrimination) and refractivity (Attenuation due to refractivity). you can select the following information: - - Calculation Parameters: Under Calculation Parameters. Diversity Frequency: The second channel frequency when diversity frequency is used. kmin and kmax can be defined in the Parameters for Reflection Analysis of the Link dialogue. Maximum Possible Attenuation: The strongest attenuation experienced by the direct signal at the receiver side. BBER) to be considered for the link. Specular Reflection Factor: The specular reflection factor. calculation on the diversity antenna. The value is defined in the link properties. Terrain Profile: The terrain profile. Calculated Channel: The calculated channel. ESR. you can select the following information: - Ground Characteristics: The Ground Characteristics part contains the following information: - © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 213 . ESR. Refractivity Gradient: The refractivity gradient near the earth’s surface (in N-units/km) as defined in the link properties. Rain Height (0°C isotherm): The height of the top of the rain column above mean sea level from the 0°C isotherm. Quality Objectives: The quality objectives (SESR. Terrain Irregularity: The terrain irregularity. kmin and kmax can be defined in the Parameters for Reflection Analysis of the Link dialogue. Sites: Sites related parameters such as the pylon height. kavg corresponds to the k factor value defined in the Profile tab. The value is calculated according to refractivity conditions defined for the link. if the reflected signal is obstructed. when configuring the report as explained in "Configuring the Reflection Analysis Report" on page 214. The signal is attenuated by the receiver antenna (Attenuation due to antenna discrimination) and because it is reflected by the ground (Attenuation due to ground reflection). - Link Specifications: Under Link Specifications. <Field Selection>: Atoll recommends optimal antenna and frequency separations to be used with diversity techniques for three k factor values (kmin. Atmospheric Pressure: The atmospheric pressure (hPa) as defined in the link properties. The value is read in the Geoclimatic Parameters file. Equipment: The equipment parameters for both link extremities (SiteA and SiteB). Fog: the fog intensity in %. Effective Earth Curvature Factor (ke at 99. Percentage of time when the refractivity gradient (<100m) is <-100N-units/km: The percentage of the average year where the refractivity gradient value of -100N-units/km is not exceeded. diversity and back antenna properties for both link extremities (SiteA and SiteB) and repeaters (SiteP and SiteQ). kavg and kmax). For information on configuring the channel to be studied. For information on defining the kmin and kmax.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management Angle at B between direct and reflected ray: The angle between the direct and the reflected paths at Site B. you can select the following information: - - Transmission: Under Transmission. Surface Reflection Coefficient: The surface reflection factor. <Custom Fields>: The custom fields available in Links table. availability model. Permitivity: The terrain permitivity. and if the reflected and direct signals arrive in phase.9%): the k factor value observed 99. - - Additional results appear if. Antennas: Main. BBER) to be considered for the link.

Zone Location: The distances from Site A at which the reflection area starts and ends. To configure the reflection analysis report: 1. Path difference (direct/reflected) (m): The difference in path length between direct and reflected signals.Atoll User Manual Divergence Factor: The divergence factor. 5. b.6. Click the AaBbYyZz button to change the font. Note: You can save the choices you have made in the Report Configuration dialogue as a configuration file by clicking the Save As button at the top of the dialogue and entering a name for the file in the Save As dialogue that appears. Click OK. Location of the specular reflection point: The distance of the specular reflection point from Site A.2. For information on defining the kmin and kmax.2. The Parameters for Reflection Analysis of the Link dialogue appears. Antenna heights above the reflection plan: The antenna heights at SiteA and SiteB above the reflection plan. Display the reflection analysis report as explained in "Displaying the Reflection Analysis Report" on page 212. a. 2. For information on defining the kmin and kmax. see "Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters" on page 214. kmin and kmax can be defined in the Parameters for Reflection Analysis of the Link dialogue. Click a style. Tau corresponds to the difference in path length between direct and reflected signals expressed in wavelength. Reflected path delay: The delay of the reflected path in ns. 3. kavg and kmax). In addition. To restore the initial style. c. Tau(kmax)-Tau(kmin): The difference between Tau calculated for kmax and Tau calculated for kmin. b. click the Reset button. you can access and modify the global calculation parameters and the microwave link parameters. select its check box. Click the Actions button and select Configure Report. To display a result. Click the Actions button and select Analysis Parameters for the Hop. <Field Selection>: Select the <Field Selection> check box in order for Atoll to display the results listed after for three k factor values (kmin. 2. select the reflection area to be considered in the reflection analysis: 214 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . you can select the following information: 7.3 Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters You can study the influence of some parameters on the reflection analysis. you can click Open in the Report Configuration dialogue to open your configuration file with the same settings you used this time. you can select the following information: - - Attenuations: Under Attenuations. Display the reflection analysis report as explained in "Displaying the Reflection Analysis Report" on page 212. see "Modifying Reflection Analysis Parameters" on page 214. kavg and kmax). Click the Expand button ( ) to expand a result category. Centred. Click the Style tab. d. Reflection area geometry: Under Reflection area geometry. To restore the selected results as initially or to refresh the list of results available. Under Analysis Mode. clear its check box. 3. 7. then there is no minimum (destructive interference at the receiver side due to the reflected signal) that is experienced with the critical k factor range and diversity can be avoided. If the difference is lower than 1. If the difference exceeds or equals 1. d. kavg corresponds to the k factor value defined in the Profile tab. c. Select the paragraph alignment by selecting Align Left. or Align Right.2 Configuring the Reflection Analysis Report You can configure the display parameters of the reflection analysis report to display some or all of the parameters used in the calculations and results of the calculations with different styles. The next time you configure a reflection analysis report. a. kmin and kmax can be defined in the Parameters for Reflection Analysis of the Link dialogue. select the Reset button. then there is at least one minimum that is experienced with the critical k factor range and diversity may be implemented depending on how well the signal is reflected and whether there is significant discrimination against surface reflections from one or both of the antennas. To hide a result. kavg corresponds to the k factor value defined in the Profile tab. The Report Configuration dialogue appears.6. 4. <Field Selection>: Select the <Field Selection> check box in order for Atoll to display the results listed after for three k factor values (kmin. To define reflection analysis parameters: 1. Click the Contents tab.

You can choose between the Root Mean Square method. Under Antenna heights above the reflection plan. 6. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 215 . 5. For more information on these calculation methods. Atoll displays the difference of signal strength between the direct path and the reflected path (i. Display the reflection areas as explained in "Displaying Reflection" on page 211. 3. To check the recommended antenna height and frequency separations: 1. For more information on these calculation methods. Display the reflection analysis report as explained in "Displaying the Reflection Analysis Report" on page 212. You can choose between the Simplified Method and the Method with equivalent reflection coefficient. You can also use it to optimise the height and frequency separations. or by using diversity techniques with the antenna/frequency separations recommended in the Summary part of the reflection analysis report. 7. Atoll makes the reflection analysis on the selected reflection area. select the range of k factor values: kmin Factor: the lowest k factor value to be considered in the reflection analysis. 4. Global Calculation on all reflection areas: If you select this option. see the Technical Reference Guide. 2. To access the global calculation parameters: 1. see the Technical Reference Guide. Under Terrain Height Irregularity. Right-click the Profile tab. Click OK. 7. Atoll takes into account all reflection areas along the profile in the reflection analysis. select the method to be used to calculate antenna heights above the reflection plan. select the method to be used to calculate the indirect signal amplitude. kmax and the kavg) and transmission frequencies. for different receiver antenna heights and transmission frequencies. Click the Actions button and select Calculation Parameters. 9. To access the microwave link parameters: 1. The Graph Parameters dialogue appears. It consists of two tabs: the Report tab displayed by default and the Attenuation Graphs tab. Display the reflection analysis report as explained in "Displaying the Reflection Analysis Report" on page 212. Click the Actions button and select Display Options. Click the Actions button and select Link Properties. by using the antenna discrimination capabilities and tilting the receiver antenna as indicated in the Summary part of the reflection analysis report. select the method to be used to calculate terrain height irregularity. Select Reflection and Diversity Analysis from the context menu. The context menu appears. Under Effect due to tide level above sea water. Atoll provides you with a tool you can use to check whether the recommended antenna height and frequency separations are valid over a range of k factor values. select the Take into account height variations of check box and define the corresponding height. Under Amplitude calculation of the indirect ray. for different k factor values (kmin.e. kmax Factor: the highest k factor value to be considered in the reflection analysis. you can identify whether ground reflection is a problem for the link. effects of reflections can be minimized by carefully positioning the antenna heights as explained in "Studying Reflection" on page 210. the Standard Deviation method and the Interdecile Range method. The Study of reflections and diversity window appears. You can also display the difference of signal strength between the direct path and the reflected path as a function of: The k factor. 2. 8. Under Refractivity. You can choose between the Simplified Method and the Method with linear regression on the area. Select the Attenuation Graphs tab.6. 4. By default. 6. Click a reflection area. 5. the attenuation of the reflected path compared to the direct path) as a function of the antenna height.3 Solutions Against Reflections At the end of the reflection analysis. In this case. The transmission frequency.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management Calculation on the selected reflection area: If you select this option. kmax and the kavg) and receiver antenna heights. see the Technical Reference Guide. For more information on these calculation methods. for different k factor values (kmin. 2.

frequency planning in microwave networks is of extreme importance not only for interference reduction at the initial stage of the network but also to envisage for future modifications in the network. 216 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . define the transmission frequency values. The Graph Parameters dialogue appears. 3. there is a list of interference conflicts created due to this newly introduced link. A logical approach is to define a number of specific frequency plans. Under k Factor Selection. 2. Under Vertical Axis. 6. to be considered for the analysis. Display the reflection areas as explained in "Displaying Reflection" on page 211. Main Frequency and Other Frequency. select the graphs to be displayed and how you want to colour them. Under Transmission Frequency Selection. 9. Click a reflection area. The process of frequency selection in microwave systems is accomplished with interference minimisation being the most important objective. The Study of reflections and diversity window appears. For each new link created in any environment. define the antenna height values. 4. 5. 7. 11. or keep clear the Automatic Bound Calculation check box and define these values manually (Max Attenuation and Min Attenuation). the median k factor value). 10. The optimal separations for the different k factor values are displayed. Main Antenna and Other Height.Atoll User Manual Figure 7. Thus. The optimal separations calculated for the different k factor values are displayed. Select the Variable Definition tab. To optimise the antenna height and frequency separations: 1. Under Graph Selection. kavg and kmax. The value calculated for the kavg factor is used to initialise the diversity frequency (main frequency + separation) and the other frequency values (main frequency + 2*separation). Click OK. It consists of two tabs: the Report tab displayed by default and the Attenuation Graphs tab. You can redo the analysis by considering other separations. Click the Actions button and select Display Options. kmin.e. 11. Max Bound: The upper value on the horizontal axis. Diversity Antenna. Under Receiver Antenna Height Selection. Click OK. to be considered for the analysis.7 Planning Microwave Link Channels Planning microwave link networks involves a number of areas of analysis. The value calculated for the kavg factor is used to initialise the diversity antenna height (main antenna height . 10.e. For information. then divide each plan into a high segment and a low segment. Select the Display tab. The context menu appears. Min Bound: The lower value on the horizontal axis. You can choose between the receiver antenna height. It is common experience that such modifications in existing network designs introduce a number of interference problems that could have been avoided during the initial design of the same network. each containing a fixed number of specific frequencies. Right-click the Profile tab. 9. Under Horizontal Axis. either select the Automatic Bound Calculation check box in order to let Atoll automatically determine the upper and lower values of the vertical axis. Select Reflection and Diversity Analysis from the context menu. define the k factor values. you can select the following: Ordinate: Select what you want to display on the horizontal axis. 8. the k factor and the transmission frequency. You can redo the analysis with these values.120: Study of Reflection and Diversity – Attenuation Graph 7. Atoll 7. to be considered for the analysis. Atoll displays the keff factor at 99% (i. You can redo the analysis by considering other separations. 8. There are various ways to accomplish this particular objective.separation) and the other height (main antenna height + separation) values. Select the Attenuation Graphs tab. Diversity Frequency. the k factor value not exceeded 99% of the average year) and the keff factor at 50% (i. They are automatically calculated by Atoll.

Click the Expand ( ) button to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. The context menu appears. 6. Click on the Data tab of the Explorer window. "Working with the Frequency Spectrum Analyser" on page 219.7. 4.1 Checking Microwave Link Site Parities You can verify the parity of sites either on the map or in a report. To perform a site parity check and display the results on the map: 1. 9.1. Select Interference > Channels Distribution per Site > Display on the Map from the context menu. 4.2 Creating a Report on Site Parities Atoll enables you to create a report displaying site parities. Select the Add to Legend check box in order to add the displayed icons to a legend. the following are explained: • • "Checking Site Parities on the Map" on page 217 "Creating a Report on Site Parities" on page 217. Enter the position of icons relative to the site (in dpi). the transmitter and receiver get assignments in opposite segments. 5. You can also hide the site parities using the context menu. results are displayed in the Channel Distribution table. Upper: The site is assigned frequencies from the upper half-band. To create a report displaying site parities: 1.1. "Using the Search Tool to Display Channel Reuse" on page 218. 5. If the transmitter frequency is in the high block. that are selected by the current filter parameters). "Performing Semi-automatic Channel Search" on page 218. When an assignment is made.7. 7. Select the operating frequency bands for which you want to check the parities of the microwave link extremities. ) ) 3. Atoll checks the site parities of all the microwave links working at the selected frequency bands. Click the Expand ( ) button to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. 3. Right-click the Links folder. Multiple: The site is assigned frequencies from the lower and upper half-bands. 3.. Click the Expand ( ) button to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. The context menu appears. The Channel Distribution dialogue appears. Lower: The site is assigned frequencies from the lower half-band. Once Atoll has finished checking site parities.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management The idea is to basically allow frequency assignments to be made in pairs. Click OK. The Channel Distribution table contains the following information. you can hide them by clicking the Channel Arrangement ( button again. 2. Unspecified: No frequency is assigned to the site. Channels Distribution per Site and Generate Report from the context menu. The context menu appears. 7. Click on the Data tab of the Explorer window.1 Checking Site Parities on the Map Atoll enables you to view the site parities on the map and thereby detect any possible parity conflicts.7. In this section. To hide the site parities using the context menu: 1. the receiver frequency will be in the low block and vice versa. Right-click the Links folder. In this section. Atoll takes into consideration the sites of microwave links which are active. the following are explained: • • • • • "Checking Microwave Link Site Parities" on page 217. Click OK to start the calculations. "Displaying Third-order Intermodulation Products" on page 220 7. and which intersect the computation zone. Right-click the Links folder. 2. 7. You can also open the Channel Distribution dialogue using the toolbar by clicking the Channel Arrangement ( button. 6. with each pair having minimum separations. 2. Once the site parities are displayed on the map. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 217 . Choose an icon for the different cases. Select Interference. 4. 8. Click on the Data tab of the Explorer window. filtered (i. The Channel Distribution dialogue appears.e. Select the operating frequency band for which you want to check the parities of microwave link extremities. Select Interference and Hide Channel Distribution from the context menu.

The Search Tool window provides you with the following options: To restore the initial microwave link colours: Click the Reset Display button in the window. Cause: Information provided for multiple parity only.7. Select a Sub-band. partially covers the selected channel) are displayed in green. Links using a channel which is completely covered by the selected channel are displayed in purple. Longitude: The longitude of the site. links using the selected channel in the same sub-band are displayed in red. Site: The name of the site. 3. Select a Frequency Band. Site B . select the Co-channel Only check box.e.. Select a Channel. links using a channel which completely covers the selected channel are displayed in orange. 9. 7.3 Performing Semi-automatic Channel Search The semi-automatic channel search tool in Atoll ranks channels according to a definable cost function enabling you to find the best channel or channels to allocate to a microwave link. or in the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. You can sort and filter data in the Channel Distribution table. For more information. Lower: The site is assigned frequencies from the lower half-band. 6. This channel search is performed according to the interference received or transmitted per channel. 7. To perform a semi-automatic channel search for a microwave link: 1. If you selected the Co-channel Only check box. 3. If you only want the selected Channel to be displayed. Define in which half-band (Lower or Upper) you want to search for the channel. 2. partially covers the selected channel) are displayed in green and all other links are displayed in grey. Links using the selected channel in the same sub-band are displayed in red.Atoll User Manual Frequency Band: The operating frequency band. Parity: The parity of the site.e. The Search Tool window appears. All other links are displayed in grey. If you selected the Same Sub-band Only check box. Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map. you can use the Search Tool to search for channels. Links using a channel which overlaps the selected channel (i. Multiple: The site is assigned frequencies from the lower and upper half-bands. The Search Tool allows you to view channel reuse on the map. links using the selected channel in the same sub-band are displayed in red.7.Site A. The context menu appears.. To display all channel arrangements available for the selected frequency band: Click the Frequency Plans button and resize the Search Tool window by dragging the lower border of the window. Click the Conditions tab and define the following: Link Directions to Calculate: Select the check box of the directions of the link to be calculated (Site A Site B. links using a channel which overlaps the selected channel (i. Select the MW Channel tab. Latitude: The latitude of the site. see "Sorting Data in Tables" on page 60 and "Filtering in Data Tables by Selection" on page 62. Links using a channel which completely covers the selected channel are displayed in orange. Click View > Search Tool. Unspecified: No frequency is assigned to the site. links using an adjacent channel to the selected channel in the same sub-band are displayed in blue and all others are displayed in grey. 7. or both). 4.2 Using the Search Tool to Display Channel Reuse In Atoll. 218 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 2. Upper: The site is assigned frequencies from the upper half-band. If you only want the links with the selected frequency Sub-band to be considered. 5. 8. The Semi-Automatic Channel Search dialogue appears. Click Search. select the Same Sub-band Only check box. links using a channel which is completely covered by the selected channel are displayed in purple. Select Planning > Semi-automatic Search from the context menu. Atoll gives the name of microwave links whose the site has a multiple parity. To find a channel using the Search Tool: 1. Links using an adjacent channel to the selected channel in the same sub-band are displayed in blue.

The channels to be analysed: Select Use all the channels of the sub-band if all the channels can be allocated. The red line shows the total noise level received on the interfered channel and each blue line represents the signal level transmitted on each interfering channel. The minimum threshold degradation. the values must be separated with either a comma. always off or taken into consideration according to geometric correlation. This tool calculates and draws a graph representing the channels used along with the interference levels received on each channel of a half band. 2. Click the Parameters tab and define: The earth curvature factor (k factor).4 Working with the Frequency Spectrum Analyser Atoll can display a channel usage histogram within any microwave link’s operating frequency band enabling you to allocate unused or less used channels where required.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management Under Channels to Study: Frequency Sub-Band: Select the frequency sub-band from the list of available frequency sub-bands from to the frequency band of the microwave link being studied. You can enter or paste a list of channels. To open the spectrum analyser: 1. - 5. For example. set the parameter to 3000%. Under Channel Weightings. Site A Half-Band: Select the frequency half-band to calculate (lower or upper) for the transmission site (the opposite half-band is assigned to the reception site). The I Levels on the Band tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window opens (see Figure 7. entering 20-22 corresponds to entering 20 21and 22. In order to take into account all the potential interferers. or a space. Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map. by entering the first and last channel of the range separated by a hyphen. you can find the channels with least interference levels in order to allocate them to microwave links. If there are more than one interfering signals. or horizontal and vertical). use the slider to define the weight given to the interferer and victim channels. this is the percentage of the bandwidth to be considered when searching for interferers. or a semi-colon. You can also enter a range of channels available. The maximum distance around the studied site to find potential interfering sites. You can locate the channels on which there is the least or no interference and allocate these "free" channels where required. or vertical. in terms of the related costs.7. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 219 . - The link polarisation to be considered in the calculation. Atoll calculates a cost for each channel and each defined polarisation (either horizontal. 7. select Restrict the list of potential channels and define the channels available. Whether automatic transmission power control is to be considered on the useful signal.Received Interference Levels Option Atoll calculates the interference levels on each channel of the frequency half-band (lower or upper) of the microwave link and represents them as vertical lines on the graph. Whether automatic transmission power control on interfering signals is to be considered always on. only the peak value is displayed on the graph. Through this graph. The results window displays the list of channels sorted in increasing order with respect to their corresponding costs. or in the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. 4. If only some channels of the frequency sub-band can be allocated. It is then possible through this results window to allocate the best channels to the link by selecting the channels to assign and clicking the Commit button. Note: Each vertical line representing the interference level received at any channel depicts the peak signal value. Click Calculate to launch the calculations. The interfered useful bandwidth (%): The parameter enables Atoll to filter the interferers. Select Planning and Frequency Spectrum from the context menu.121: The I Level on the Band tab . are the ones listed on top of the list. This implies that the best available channels.121): Figure 7. The context menu appears.

and can therefore interfere with the desired behaviour. . They are important because they fall within the vicinity of the original frequency components. Atoll can calculate third-order intermodulation products. Received interference levels: Select the Received interference levels option in order to display channels used along with the interference levels received on each channel of a half band. Actions > Properties: Click Actions and then select Properties from the menu in order to open the Properties dialogue of the studied microwave link. . Actions > Report: Click Actions and then select Report from the menu in order to display a detailed report on the calculated intermodulation products. Site A if you selected Site A . . Actions > Print: Click Actions and then select Print from the menu in order to print the content of the I Levels on the Band tab.. in general. .The third-order intermodulation products belonging to the studied frequency band. Non-linear systems generate harmonics. To calculate third-order intermodulation products: 1. forming additional signals at frequencies that are not. .Site A) and calculates the third-order intermodulation products for each transmission channel of the frequency half-band of the microwave link.e.The studied microwave link and the selected hop.5 Displaying Third-order Intermodulation Products Intermodulation is caused by non-linear behaviour of the signal processing being used.e. Intermodulations: Select the Intermodulations option in order to display third-order intermodulation products.122: The I Level on the Band tab . Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map. For information on global parameters. You can change the following options at the top of the I Levels on the Band tab: Hop: Select the hop to be studied. i.A snapshot of the I Levels on the Band tab..The transmission frequencies used by the site.Intermodulations Option Atoll shows the transmission and reception frequencies used by the studied site (i. at harmonic frequencies of either.Atoll User Manual You can change the following options at the top of the I Levels on the Band tab: Hop: Select the hop to be studied. meaning that if the input of a non-linear system is a signal of a single frequency (e. Site A Site B or vice versa. Select Planning and Intermodulation Products from the context menu.Site B or Site B if you selected Site B . Only frequenies within the frequency band of the studied microwave link are represented. These new frequencies are called intermodulation products (IMPs). i. or from the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab.Site A. then the output is a signal which includes a number of integer multiples of the input frequency (i. 2. Actions > Calculation Parameters: Click Actions and then select Calculation Parameters from the menu in order to define global calculation parameters. Site A Site B or vice versa.The studied site.e. see “Working with the Frequency Spectrum Analyser” on page 219.. Site A if you selected Site A . Actions > Properties: Click Actions and then select Properties from the menu in order to open the Properties dialogue of the studied microwave link. see “Displaying Third-order Intermodulation Products” on page 220. Atoll displays a tool tip when you place the mouse cursor on each vertical line. For information on displaying the third-order intermodulation products. 2f1.Site B or Site B if you selected Site B . 4f1. 5f1.g. Frequencies are represented by vertical lines and reported on the horizontal axis. - - 220 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . f1). The report contains the following information: .7. green lines show the frequencies used for reception and red lines represent the third-order intermodulation products. i. etc. see “Global Parameters” on page 156. For information on displaying the received interference levels. For information on global parameters. - - 7. 3f1. The I Levels on the Band tab of the Microwave Link Analysis Tool window opens (see Figure 7..e.. The context menu appears. see “Global Parameters” on page 156.The reception frequencies used by the site.). Intermodulation occurs when the input to a non-linear system is composed of two or more frequencies.. Actions > Calculation Parameters: Click Actions and then select Calculation Parameters from the menu in order to define global calculation parameters.122): Figure 7. The signals of different frequencies are mixed together.e. The blue lines indicate the frequencies used for transmission.

. you can change the interference computation method and base it on any of the propagation models available on the Modules tab. transmitter mask. and intersect the computation zone. You can define a protection level for each victim–interferer microwave transceiver equipment pair by defining the protection levels (in dB) for each delta frequency (in MHz). i. These IRF graphs will be used to reduce the interference between victim and interferer microwave equipment when calculating interference. When studying the interference between transmission equipment and reception equipment.8. 7. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 221 . capacity. "Performing an Interference Analysis on a Single Microwave Link" on page 224. Atoll verifies that the transmission equipment and the reception equipment have the same manufacturer. Polarisation and equipment signatures. Atoll merges the transmitter mask and the receiver mask of equipment in order to determine the IRF graph. To create or modify an IRF graph: 1. "Managing Interference Calculation Validity" on page 226.. In this section. capacity and modulation. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. "Displaying Interference on the Map" on page 226. among all microwave links in the network. the interference reduction factor (IRF) is a method of reducing interference on the received signal.8 Analysing Interference Atoll includes comprehensive interference analysis features based on the ITU 452-11 recommendations. the following are explained: • • "Defining IRF Graphs Manually" on page 221 "Defining IRF Graphs with the Assistant" on page 222. Otherwise. the following are explained: • • • • • • "Interference Reduction Factor" on page 221. Atoll proceeds as follows: 1.1. and receiver mask graphs defined at the equipment level or theoretical graphs. Right-click on the Links folder. Atoll determines the IRF graph during the process of calculating interference. Atoll first verifies whether an IRF graph is defined for the transmission equipment-reception equipment pair in the IRF table. For information on the computation zone. In this section. If so. "Performing an Interference Analysis on Multiple Microwave Links" on page 225. When calculating interference levels received for any microwave link. 7. Atoll calculates all the microwave links in the group that are active. The context menu appears. However. IRFs defined on the IRF table if available T/I curve. or the theoretical "T⁄I" graphs if not (for more information on the theoretical graphs.1 Interference Reduction Factor As the name indicates. Atoll uses it. always off or based on a calculated geometric correlation.8. the interference in Atoll are calculated according to the ITU-R 452-11 recommendations. 2.1 Defining IRF Graphs Manually You can define IRF graphs using the IRF table. By default. or the theoretical graphs if not. Atoll uses either the graphs defined for the equipment if available. The following parameters are taken into account when calculating interference: • • • • • Interferer ATPC can be user-defined as always on. Atoll also considers the adjacency of frequency bands. filtered (i. or modulation are not the same. Potential interferers. "Using IRF in Interference Calculations" on page 224. see "Using a Computation Zone" on page 30. see "Theoretical Graphs" on page 136). Interference calculation between links and over the network can be performed for a single link as well as for any user-defined group of links.e. The IRF is a function of the difference between the central frequencies of the interfered signal and the interfering signal. If so. You can set a number of interference calculation parameters including the calculation radius. Atoll uses either the graphs defined for the equipment if available. microwave links with equipment operating frequency bands that overlap the operating frequency band of the microwave link being studied. The following sections describe the modelling of IRF in Atoll. 2. that are selected by the current filter parameters). Co-channel and adjacent channel interference. If the equipment manufacturer. Atoll uses T⁄I graphs to determine the IRF graph.e. 7. received interferer signal threshold and geo-climatic correlation factor between links.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management Actions > Print: Click Actions and then select Print from the menu in order to print the content of the I Levels on the Band tab. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder 3. Atoll searches for potential interferers in the network operating in the same frequency band. are the active and filtered microwave links whose transmitter – receiver trajectory intersects or passes through the computation zone and whose interfering transmitter – interfered receiver distance is less than a given value. The IRF graphs defined in the IRF table are used during the calculation of interference.

Click the Data tab in the Explorer window.1. Select Equipment > IRF > Open Table from the context menu. 7. Select Equipment > IRF > Edit Grid from the context menu. The context menu appears. Atoll presents the entries where the transmission and reception equipment present the possibility of interference.124). Right-click on the Links folder. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder 3. Note: If you are creating a new IRF graph.Atoll User Manual 4. Click OK.124: IRF record Properties dialogue 8. 9. Under Protection values in the Properties dialogue. Double-click in the left margin of the record to open its Properties dialogue (see Figure 7.123). use the row marked with the New Row icon ( ) 7. Figure 7. enter a protection level (in dB) for each delta frequency (in MHz).2 Defining IRF Graphs with the Assistant Atoll provides an assistant to allow you to define IRFs between transmission and reception transceiver equipment. Select the name of the Victim equipment from the list. Figure 7. 2. 4.123: IRF table 5.8. The resulting graph is displayed on the right of the Properties dialogue.123). The IRF Setting dialogue appears (see Figure 7. Select the name of the Interferer equipment from the list. To use the assistant to define IRFs: 1. When you select a frequency band and the equipment manufacturers with equipment that operate in the same frequency band. 6. The Trunk Types table appears (see Figure 7. 222 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .

d. Select Add Record from the context menu. To create an IRF graph between the transmission and reception equipment using equipment graphs or theoretical graphs: a. Only equipment manufactured by the selected manufacturer are displayed in the grid. Select the RX Equipment Manufacturer from the menu. A dialogue appears. Click OK. delete an IRF graph. Select the Frequency Band from the menu. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. b. Under Enter graph values. b. To delete an IRF graph between the transmission and reception equipment: a. or create an IRF graph using equipment graphs or theoretical graphs: To define an IRF graph between the transmission and reception equipment: a.125: IRF Setting dialogue 5.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management Figure 7. Select Delete from the context menu. Select the TX Equipment Manufacturer from the menu. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 223 . The context menu appears. enter a protection level (in dB) for each delta frequency (in MHz). Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. You can now define an IRF graph. Only equipment manufactured by the selected manufacturer are displayed in the grid. c. Select Calculate from Masks from the context menu. 6. Right-click on the cell of the grid that coincides with both entries. Only equipment operating in the selected frequency band is displayed in the grid. The IRF Calculation dialogue appears. The resulting graph is displayed on the right of the dialogue. 7. 8. The context menu appears. The context menu appears. b.

the channel. 7. and the port and the channel for which the calculations have been performed (maybe the central frequency of the microwave link’s operating frequency band). availability model. azimuths.8. earth curvature factor (k).Calculation parameters: Parameters according to which the calculations for the link budget have been performed such as the calculation methods used (propagation model. antennas used at both sites with their respective models.Port Configuration: Port configuration related parameters for both directions.8. The context menu appears. the port circulator and attenuator losses. and altitudes for both extremities. gains and diameters. modulation used. locations. digital hierarchy employed. shared losses. or the theoretical "T/I" graphs if not. microwave transceiver equipment installed at both sites with details such as the models. d. Select Planning >Interference Details from the context menu.Summary: A summary of the link being studied. port connection losses and waveguides and cable losses. . total losses comprising filter losses.Geoclimatic parameters: Information about the type of environment and the climatic zone in which the link is operating. rain intensity (exceeding 0.Link specifications: Information relating to the microwave link design. worst month quality. the corresponding frequency. It checks that the transmission equipment and the reception equipment have the same manufacturer. average annual availability and whether quality and availability objectives are reached for both directions of the link and the specified BER values. effective earth curvature factor (ke) and the geoclimatic factor K. In this case. site names. Atoll uses T/I curves in order to calculate the IRF graph. gains. connection losses. or the theoretical graphs if not. . passive repeater gains (if any).Transmission parameters: Transmission related parameters for both extremities of the microwave link including the EIRP. thermal fade margin. diameters and near fields. If defined. heights. It proceeds as follows: 1. the IRF graphs defined in the IRF table are used during the interference calculation. and view the interference connections between the microwave link extremities being studied and their interferers and victims respectively. port connection losses. shielding losses. polarisation at both sites. You can easily define the parameters for studying each microwave link.3 Performing an Interference Analysis on a Single Microwave Link Atoll enables you to carry out interference studies on any microwave link of the network. . the required C/I and total losses at reception comprising of filter losses. diversity antennas and repeater back-to-back antennas details such as the models. Under Reception Filter. select either "As Equipment" to use the transmission spectrum graph defined for the equipment. . Atoll first checks if an IRF graph is defined for the transmission equipment .2 Using IRF in Interference Calculations As explained in "Interference Reduction Factor" on page 221. overflow thresholds. f. its operating frequency band. heights. Else. Under Transmitter Filter. capacities and configurations.Atoll User Manual c. It uses either the graphs defined for equipment if available.01% of time). data rates. azimuths. thermal noise thresholds. capacity and modulation.Reception parameters: Reception related parameters for both ends of the microwave link including the bit error ratios and sensitivities at the receivers. Click OK.reception equipment pair in the IRF table. g. Click OK to close the IRF Setting dialogue. 7. visualise the results in the form of reports and tables. tilts. it uses it. The report includes the following information: . capacity or modulation are not the same. 2. whether it is a main channel or a standby channel or a channel for frequency diversity. the transmission and reception port numbers. Right-click the microwave link either directly on the map. the polarisation. Finally. select either "As Equipment" to use the receiver selectivity graph defined for the equipment. 2. or in the Links folder of the Explorer window’s Data tab. a global link estimation taking into account both link quality and availability is provided over an average year. The results are displayed in the following tabs: Qualitative summary: This tab contains a qualitative report generated after the study of interference over any given microwave link. temperature. it determines the IRF graph during the interference calculation. When studying interference between a transmission equipment and a reception equipment. minimal channel bandwidths. connection losses. water vapour density. Define the calculation step stated in frequency spacing (MHz). It uses either the graphs defined for equipment if available. quality model. and waveguides and cable losses. tilts. length. climatic factor. 9. or select a theoretical "receiver selectivity" graph compatible with the operating frequency band of the reception equipment. transmitter powers. e. shared losses. shielding losses. ATPC effects. PL percentage. Atoll merges the transmitter mask and the receiver mask of equipment in order to calculate the IRF graph. . . repeaters (if any). or select a theoretical "transmission spectrum" graph compatible with the operating frequency band of the transmission equipment. To perform an interference analysis on a microwave link: 1. A dialogue containing details of the interference analysis appears. 224 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Click Run to calculate the IRF graph. If the equipment manufacturer.

Define the content of the report: a. diffraction losses.4. vegetation attenuation (displayed for information only because it is not considered in the total attenuation). the non-outage probability and the outage period for the average year. free space loss. quality objectives (SESR. To remove a field from the list of Selected Fields. select the field in the Selected Fields list and click to remove it. space diversity and frequency diversity).1 Defining the Content of the Interference Report Before calculating interference on multiple microwave links. Interference: Calculation parameters taken into consideration for the interference study (power control. 3.8. total interference in clear-air. You can select non-contiguous fields by pressing CTRL and clicking each fields separately. These results include the outage probability. fadings due to discrimination reduction. selective fading. To define the content of the interference report: 1. antenna losses and tropospheric scattering. These results include availability of hot standby. To change the order of the fields. propagation results for both directions of the microwave link including total attenuation. In this section. threshold degradation for rain. select the fields that you want to display in the report. Interferer tabs: List the microwave links that are interfered by the given extremity of the microwave link being studied along with relevant details of the interference study. Unavailability due to rain: Results depicting the unavailability of the microwave link due to rain in both directions. Atoll displays a default set of fields and lets you select other information to be included in the report. details for the worst month (dispersive fading. You can select contiguous fields by clicking the first field. maximum distance. Non-quality due to multi-path (Clear-Air): Results depicting the quality of the microwave link in both directions. and availability objectives (SESR. - - - - - - - Victim tabs: List the microwave links that interfere the given extremity of the microwave link being studied along with relevant details of the interference study. enhancement forecast). the non-outage probability and the outage period for the worst month. the outage probability. ESR. pressing SHIFT and clicking the last field.8. for the specified BER values and whether interference is taken into account. minimum threshold degradation. The context menu appears. whether enhancements and discrimination reduction are ignored. the non-outage probability and the outage period for the worst month. The Field Selection dialogue appears. for the specified BER values and whether interference is taken into account. the outage period for the average year and the performance objective. Propagation: The nominal received signal level. The Properties dialogue appears. if space and frequency diversities are used. fading due to discrimination reduction). Interference Details: List the microwave links that interfere the given extremity of the microwave link being studied and the microwave links interfered by the given extremity of the microwave link being studied. BBER (required)). interfered useful bandwidth) and results of interference calculations over the microwave link (threshold degradation. In the Field Selection dialogue. The objects will be displayed in the order of the fields in the Selected Fields list. "Calculating Multiple Microwave Link Budgets" on page 207. b. Click Add.4 Performing an Interference Analysis on Multiple Microwave Links Atoll enables you to calculate interference for a group of microwave links simultaneously or over the entire network of microwave links. nominal received carrier power level. 7. Select Interference > Properties from the context menu. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 7. Right-click the Links folder. BBER (required)).Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management interference. ESR (required). 4. 2. Interference results are displayed in the form of a report whose the content you can define. BBER). select the field in the Available Fields list and click to move it to the Selected Fields list. performance objectives (probabilities of SESR (required). epsilon and the type of path (LOS or NLOS). rain attenuation. These results include the outage probability. correlation area. losses due to dry air. To select a field to be included in the report. outage probability due to failures for the average year. from top to bottom. total interference in rain and C/I). you can define the content of the interference report. Unavailability due to failures: Results depicting the unavailability of the microwave link due to equipment failure. the outage probability. losses due to water vapour. ESR (required). performance objectives (probabilities of SESR (required). the non-outage probability and the outage period for the average year. BBER). the following are explained: • • "Defining the Content of the Link Budget Report" on page 207. details for the average year (rain fading. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 225 . ESR. select a field and click or to move it up or down in the list.

you can quickly perform interference studies for a particular link or a group of links. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. and recalculates interference. The context menu appears. 3. You can view details of each microwave link. The next time you configure an interference report. © Forsk 2010 226 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited .6 Displaying Interference on the Map After calculating interference on a microwave link. The details are displayed in a detailed interference results window including five tabs as described in "Performing an Interference Analysis on a Single Microwave Link" on page 224.5 Managing Interference Calculation Validity Interference calculations. To display interference connections on the map 1. If microwave link properties have been modified. Click OK. you can click Open in the Properties dialogue to open your configuration file with the same settings you used this time. 7.g. Select Interference > Calculate from the context menu.2 Calculating Interference on Multiple Microwave Links You can Atoll to calculate interference levels for a group of microwave links.Atoll User Manual c. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Links folder. Calculations can become invalid for different reasons: • • • If a calculation method or option has been changed. You can access each microwave link’s properties by double-clicking the corresponding record in the Victim/Interferer tabs. performed on a group of microwave links. Atoll removes existing calculations. 2.8. including valid ones. Right-click the Links folder. To force Atoll to recalculate interference: 1. Note: You can save the choices you have made in the Field Selection dialogue as a configuration file by clicking the Save As button at the top of the dialogue and entering a name for the file in the Save As dialogue that appears. You can also reset existing calculations and not recalculate interference afterwards by selecting the Interference > Reinitialise. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 5. The context menu appears. In the last case (e. To recalculate interference for a subfolder of links under the Links folder: a. This report lists the results for all studied microwave links in the selected directions (site A site B/site B site A) and for the defined BER values. If geographic data maps have been updated. you must force Atoll to recalculate.4.. 2. 3. you can display the result on the map. The progress of the calculations is displayed in the Event Viewer window. Click the microwave link on the map. b. if you added a new clutter class map). including valid ones. 1. So. Notes: • • You can stop any calculations in progress by clicking the Stop Calculations button ( ) in the toolbar. Click the Victims and Interferers Links button ( ) in the toolbar. by double-clicking the record in the report. are saved in the Atoll document. 2. Right-click the subfolder under the Links folder for which you want to recalculate interference.8. Atoll removes existing calculations. Atoll displays the interference report. once calculations have been performed for all the links. To recalculate interference for the entire Links folder: Right-click the Links folder. You can also perform interference analysis over the entire network of microwave links. For the first two reasons. The context menu appears. Atoll automatically detects the calculation invalidity when starting calculations and makes the recalculation. 7. Atoll only recalculates non-existent and invalid microwave links. 7. Select Interference > Force Calculations from the context menu. Click OK to return to the Properties dialogue.8. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder.

When the interference connections are displayed on the map. Select Interference and Display Options from the context menu. 2.9 7. and passive repeaters. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder.9. Right-click on the Point-to-Multipoint folder. The pointer changes to ( ). Atoll displays these interferers and victims for both extremities of the studied microwave link by inwards and outwards pointing arrows respectively. Select New from the context menu. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 227 . 3. "Setting all Microwave Links of a Point-to-Multipoint Link as Active" on page 229. Click the Data tab of the Explorer window. 3.1 Creating a Point-to-Multipoint Link In Atoll. or editing the point-to-multipoint links table. you can view and modify its properties by clicking the browse button ( ). "Deleting a Point-to-Multipoint Link" on page 230. Click the New PMP button ( ) on the toolbar. a point-to-multipoint link can be managed as a group of single-hop microwave links (which can contain repeaters) connected to a hub. created automatically at the location you clicked on the map. You can define the ways in which interferer and interfered link extremities will be displayed on the map. The sites that define the hub or sites of a point-to-multipoint link can be already existing sites or new sites. "Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link Using the Mouse" on page 230. To create a new point-to-multipoint link using the Point-to-Multipoint folder: 1. Click the map at each place you want to insert a new link. Each site in Atoll can support several microwave links. 3. using the point-to-multipoint link folder.1. Click on the map to create the hub of the point-to-multipoint link. transmitters. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. 4. The context menu appears. To create a new point-to-multipoint link by using the mouse: 1. The context menu appears. 4. "Deleting a Microwave Link from a Point-to-Multipoint Link" on page 230. This feature helps you in easily locating the microwave transmitters that are neither interfering with the link nor being interfered by it. The Point to Multipoint New Element Properties dialogue appears. "Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link" on page 229. 7. The Interference dialogue opens. but can be modified. You can create a point-to-multipoint link in several different ways: • • • using the mouse. you can use the tool tip to show further information about each interference connection by placing the cursor on it. 1. In this section. Enter or modify the following fields on the General tab: Name: The Name field is filled automatically by Atoll.9. Atoll creates a new site where you click. 5. A point-to-multipoint link is used when microwave links must be made between one site and a fixed number of other sites. Right-click on the Links folder. "Mapping Microwave Links to Point-to-Multipoint Links Globally" on page 229. 2. Frequency Band: You must select a frequency band when you create a point-to-multipoint link. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. "Adjusting the Antenna of the Point-to-Multipoint Hub Using the Mouse" on page 231 7. Double-click when adding the last link to complete the point-to-multipoint link. If you do not click an existing site. 2. 4. the following are explained: • • • • • • • • • • "Creating a Point-to-Multipoint Link" on page 227.1 Advanced Configuration Point-to-Multipoint Links A point-to-multipoint link is a set of microwave links connected to a hub. "Point-to-Multipoint Link Properties" on page 228. You can choose different types of lines and colours to depict the interference connections on the map and select if you want to make them visible.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management The interferer and victim connections between the studied microwave link and its interferers and victims are displayed on the map. You can hide them by clicking the Victims and Interferers Links button ( ) again. Once you have selected a frequency band. "Adjusting the Antenna of the Point-to-Multipoint Hub" on page 230.

d. you can view and modify its properties by clicking the browse button ( Type: Select the type: TDMA or FDMA. and filter tools.1.2 Point-to-Multipoint Link Properties You can modify point-to-multipoint link properties either individually or globally. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. including user-defined fields. Select Properties from the context menu. 6. and Site. Display: The Display tab allows you to manage the display of point-to-multipoint links depending on their attributes. The context menu appears. Table: The Table tab helps you to manage contents. Click the c. of the point-to-multipoint table.1. 6. enter the details of the new point-to-multipoint link. see "Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-toMultipoint Link Using the Mouse" on page 230 To create a new point-to-multipoint link using the Point-to-Multipoint table: 1. 7.9. Click OK. 228 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. Select Open Table from the context menu. The context menu appears. 2. button of the Point-to-Multipoint folder. Frequency Band. You can also organise point-to-multipoint links by using Atoll’s group. A global setting is applied to all the filtered point-to-multipoint links. 5. Comments: Enter any comments for this new point-to-multipoint link. To add microwave links to the created point-to-multipoint link. Right-click on the Point-to-Multipoint folder. 5. 3. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder.9. Once you have selected the hub site. and the contents of tool tips using the tip tool 6.2.9. Antenna: Select the antenna and its parameters. The Point to Multipoint table appears. To add microwave links to the created point-to-multipoint link. Click OK. The Point-to-Multipoint Properties dialogue appears. 2. The context menu appears. Open the context menu of the point-to-multipoint link: On the Data tab of the Explorer window: a. Right-click on the Point-to-Multipoint folder. where "X" increments with the creation of each new point-to-multipoint link. the following are explained: • • "Modifying Global Properties" on page 228 "Modifying Individual Properties" on page 228. The following fields must be filled: Name. In the row marked with the new row icon ( ). 4. Click the button of the Microwave Radio Links folder. labels on the map. to manage the legend.1 Modifying Global Properties To manage the point-to-multipoint link properties globally: 1. Atoll creates an empty point-to-multipoint link item in the Point-to-Multipoint folder.2 Modifying Individual Properties To edit the properties of a point-to-multipoint link: 1. 7. By default. Atoll names the newly point-to-multipoint link "PMP HubX". The Microwave Radio Links folder opens. sort. ). In this section. 4. The Point-to-Multipoint folder opens.Atoll User Manual Nodal Site: You must select the site that will be the hub of the point-to-multipoint link. Right-click on the point-to-multipoint link whose properties you want to edit.2. b. . see "Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-toMultipoint Link Using the Mouse" on page 230.1. 7. Enter or modify the data on the following tabs of the Point-to-Multipoint Properties dialogue: General: The General tab lets you organise folders and assign or save a configuration. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. 3.

Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. Click OK. active microwave links are displayed in red ( ) in the Multi-Hops folder. © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 229 . Enter or modify the data on the following tabs of the Point-to-Multipoint Properties dialogue: General: The General tab lets you organise folders and assign or save a configuration. Display: The Display tab lets you to select and customize the icon symbolising the point-to-multipoint link on the map. Right-click the new point-to-multipoint link and select Properties from the context menu.5 Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link Before you can define a microwave link as part of the point-to-multipoint link. 7. edit. Select one of the following: Activate Links: Select Activate Links to make all microwave links of the point-to-multipoint link active. 7. 5. and filter tools.3 Setting all Microwave Links of a Point-to-Multipoint Link as Active You can activate or deactivate all microwave links belonging to a point-to-multipoint link. 2. 2. Select Properties from the context menu. To change the activity status of all microwave links of a point-to-multipoint link: 1. Select the Links tab. The PMP/Link Mapping table opens. The context menu appears.9. 5. In this table. 4. and add the links that make up a point-to-multipoint link. 7. For information on creating links. Links: The Links tab lets you add. delete. The context menu appears. The Properties dialogue appears. Right-click the Point-to-Multipoint folder. Click the Data tab in the Explorer window. you can modify. and delete microwave links. Be sure to select the antenna icon of the point-to-multipoint link hub. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. sort. Select PMP/Link Mapping from the context menu. see "Definition of a Microwave Link" on page 185. 7. The context menu appears. An Other Properties tab is available if you have added fields to the Point-to-Multipoint table. 4. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. 2.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management On the map: a. 2. The point-tomultipoint icon changes ( Note: ). In the row with the new row icon ( ). The microwave link is added to the point-to-multipoint link. 6.1.9. the microwave link must first exist between the site of the hub of the point-to-multipoint link and another site. Right-click on the point-to-multipoint icon.9.1. Click the Expand button ( 3. 3.4 Mapping Microwave Links to Point-to-Multipoint Links Globally To map microwave links to point-to-multipoint links globally: 1. Select the antenna icon of the point-to-multipoint link hub whose properties you wish to change. The Properties dialogue appears. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. 4. Right-click the PMP hub whose activity status you want to set. You can also organise multi-hops by using Atoll’s group.1. In the Explorer window. Click the Expand button ( 3. ) to expand the Point to Multipoint folder. To add a microwave link to a point-to-multipoint link: 1. b. ) to expand the Point-to-Multipoint Links folder. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. inactive links are displayed in grey ( ). Deactivate Links: Select Deactivate Links to make all microwave links of the point-to-multipoint link inactive. containing all the pointto-multipoint links and the corresponding microwave links. 3. Do not select the site icon ( ). select a link.

) to expand the Point-to-Multipoint Links folder. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. Right-click the point-to-multipoint link to which you want to add a microwave link. click the microwave link you want to add to the point-to-multipoint link. When selecting a point-to-multipoint link. Right-click on the point-to-multipoint link. Select Delete from the context menu.1. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder.1. The context menu appears. The microwave link is deleted. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. In a pointto-multipoint link. However. b. For information on creating links. 7. 230 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . Click the Expand button ( c. On the map. To add a microwave link to a point-to-multipoint link using the mouse: 1. select the line of the point-to-multipoint link you want to delete. Right-click the microwave link you want to delete from the point-to-multipoint link. On the map.9 Adjusting the Antenna of the Point-to-Multipoint Hub When a microwave link consists of only two sites.9. Or a. On the map.1. after the point-to-multipoint has been created. see "Definition of a Microwave Link" on page 185. You can also delete a point-to-multipoint link by deleting the row associated with it in the Point-to-Multipoint table.9. 2. other factors such as the addition of new microwave links may mean that the settings of the hub antenna need to be readjusted. To make Atoll recalculate the settings for the point-to-multipoint hub antenna: 1. the height. The pointer shape changes ( ).6 Adding a Microwave Link to a Point-to-Multipoint Link Using the Mouse Before you can define a microwave link as part of the point-to-multipoint link. Click the Expand button ( ) to expand the Microwave Radio Links folder. Select Delete from the context menu. The point-to-multipoint link is deleted. ) to expand the Point-to-Multipoint Links folder. 6. ) to expand the Point-to-Multipoint Links folder. azimuth. The context menu appears. d. 4. The context menu appears. Select Add a Link from the context menu. Atoll can recalculate the settings for the point-tomultipoint hub antenna. Select the Data tab of the Explorer window. The context menu appears. 4. the microwave link must first exist between the site of the hub of the point-to-multipoint link and another site. Right-click the point-to-multipoint link of which you want to recalculate the hub antenna settings. Click the Expand button ( 3. Note: Deleting a microwave link in this manner does not delete the corresponding sites even if there are no other links or transmitters related to that site. The microwave link is added to the list of links forming the point-to-multipoint link. it is impossible for the antenna on the hub to be directly aligned with the antenna on each link. 2. The context menu appears. Open the context menu of the point-to-multipoint link you want to delete: Either a. 7. 7. 2. Right-click the point-to-multipoint link you want to delete.9. select the microwave link you want to delete. Deleting a point-to-multipoint link from the table does not delete the corresponding sites even if there are no other links or transmitters relating to that site. Click the Expand button ( 3. Consequently.9. and tilt of the antenna are calculated as a average of that needed for all link antennas. b.8 Deleting a Point-to-Multipoint Link To delete a point-to-multipoint link: 1.7 Deleting a Microwave Link from a Point-to-Multipoint Link To delete a microwave link from a point-to-multipoint link: 1. Do not select the site icon ( ). 5.Atoll User Manual 7. be careful to select the line representing the point-to-multipoint link.1. the antenna on each site is aligned with the other antenna. 2. Atoll calculates these settings for the point-to-multipoint hub antenna when the point-to-multipoint link is created. 3.

click the Calculate button ( ) to the right of the Tilt field. Select the antenna icon of the point-to-multipoint hub. Select Properties from the context menu. select the Transfer the misalignments to links check box. Click OK to update the values for the point-to-multipoint antennas. If you want Atoll calculate the effect of the recalculated values for the hub antenna on the link antennas.1. When the values for the point-to-multipoint hub antenna are recalculated. 9.Chapter 7: Microwave Link Project Management 5.9. 2. 8. In the "Antenna" subsection. The point-to-multipoint icon changes ( now rotate it manually. 7. Click the antenna icon (the point changes: ) and rotate it to its new azimuth. ) and you can © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 231 . 7. A dialogue appears with the recalculated height. Select the General tab of the Properties dialogue.10 Adjusting the Antenna of the Point-to-Multipoint Hub Using the Mouse To use the mouse to adjust the azimuth of the point-to-multipoint hub antenna: 1. and tilt values for the point-to-multipoint hub antenna. the point-to-multipoint link antennas may need to be adjusted accordingly. The Properties dialogue appears. 6. azimuth.

Atoll User Manual 232 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .

searching by 73 coverage prediction exporting results 37 geogrphic export zone. displaying using focus zone 31 report. printing (MW) 126 antennas. defining 33 report. displaying for microwave links 194 column headers formatting 45 columns changing width 45 displaying 46 freezing 46 hiding 46 moving 46 © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 233 . creating 123 point-to-multipoint link. 225 single microwave link. calculating for 204 C cables creating (MW) 137 microwave 137 channel search. adjusting 230 point-to-multipoint link. adjusting with the mouse 231 single antenna patterns. editing (MW) 125 archiving all modifications to the database 87 only site data to the database 87 automatic backup 90 configuring 90 recovering a backup 91 availability objectives microwave links. 140 heights. copying (MW) 126 antenna patterns. examples 64 formatting column headers 45 formatting table columns 45 freezing columns 46 hiding columns 46 importing data 50 moving columns 46 opening 41 opening record properties from table 44 pasting data 47 printing 52 restoring after filtering 64 sorting 60 B backup 90 configuring 90 recovering a backup 91 BER graphs creating (MW) 136 budget configuring report (MW) 206 multiple microwave links. adjusting automatically (MW) 200 heights. semi-automatic (MW) 218 clearance.Index Index A antenna antenna patterns. creating from 30 Connection Properties 85 context menu 17 renaming objects 17 coordinate system 81 setting 82 coordinates. displaying using hot spot zone 31 coverage predictions restricting sites studied (MW) 192 cursors 40 CW Measurement Analysis Tool printing data 56 D Data tab 15 data tables adding a field 42 changing column width 45 changing row height 45 copying data 47 deleting a field 43 displaying columns 46 editing 43 exporting data 49 filtering 60 filtering by selection 62 filtering by several criteria 63 filtering. calculating for 206. importing (MW) 125. optimising (MW) 200 microwave 123 microwave antenna properties 125 microwave. 132 changing relative position on the map 20 compatibility with equipment (MW) 138. 139 compatibility with equipment. defining 156 unfreezing 46 computation zone drawing 30 editing 34 Fit to Map Window 30 importing 30 polygon. adjusting (MW) 200 heights. assistant (MW) 139.

value intervals 22 display coordinate system 81 Distance Measurement tool 28 document creating from database 79. exporting to 51 XML files. creating from 34 grouping 56 by a property 56. creating from 30 Find toolbar 72 focus zone creating 31 editing 34 explanation 31 Fit to Map Window 31 importing 31 polygon. properties of (MW) 131 Explorer window 15 Data tab 15 Geo tab 15 layers 16 Modules tab 15 using tabs 15 G Geo tab 15 geographic export zone creating 33 Fit to Map Window 34 importing 34 polygon. 80 geographic data 79 information needed to create 79 microwave data 79 microwave equipment 79 refreshing from the database 86 setting basic parameters 81 document templates. importing from 52 database archiving all modifications 87 archiving only site data 87 connecting to 84 Connection Properties 85 creating a document from 84 refreshing document 86 resolving data conflicts 88 working with 83 digital hierarchy 132 display changing properties 21 defining display type 22 display type. using for 69 filtering data tables by selection 62 H hot spot zone creating 31 editing 34 explanation 31 Fit to Map Window 31 importing 31 using to display coverage prediction report 31 234 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . 139 compatibility with antennas. 84 creating from template 79.Atoll User Manual sorting by one column 61 sorting by several columns 61 unfreezing columns 46 viewing properties 42 XML files. 71 with subfolders 71 filtering zone deleting 33 drawing 29 Fit to Map Window 30 importing 30 polygon. see "templates" DTM maps representing different areas 111 data tables by several criteria 63 examples 64 restoring after filtering 64 using a polygon 29. creating from 31 using to display coverage prediction report 31 folder configuration 69 applying a saved configuration 70 creating 70 deleting 71 exporting 70 importing 70 reapplying current configuration 70 frequency bands long-haul (MW) 145 medium-haul (MW) 146 microwave 146 short-haul (MW) 146 frequency planning (MW) 216 frequency sub-bands microwave 147 E equipment compatibility with antennas (MW) 138. 140 importing (MW) 132 transceiver. unique 22 display type. 57 by several properties 58 examples 59 with subfolders 71 F field adding to a table 42 deleting from a table 43 filter site list. discrete values 22 display type. assistant (MW) 139. using for 69 transmitter list.

Index I interference analysis several links (MW) 226 single link (MW) 224 interference analysis (MW) 221 interference reduction factor table (MW) 134. 225 budget. 132 availability objectives. 178. 140 interference reduction factor (MW) 133. optimising 200 antenna patterns. creating 137 calculation parameters 156 calculation parameters. analysing 226 interference reduction factor 133. importing 125. 214 classes. editing 125 site parity 217 site parity.452 model 153 microwave propagation model 151 multi-hop links. mapping links to 229 profile analysis 193 quality objectives. point-to-multipoint. creating 190 simple link. 178. calculating for single link 204 budget. copying 126 antenna patterns. studying 176. adjusting automatically 200 antenna heights. 221 IRF. configuring report 206 cables 137 cables. 139 antenna/equipment compatibility assistant 139. setting 82 measuring distances on the map 28 medium-haul frequency bands (MW) 146 microwave error performance events 155 microwave error performance objectives 155 microwave error performance parameters 155 Microwave Link Analysis printing 56 Microwave Link toolbar 75 microwave links 173 antenna heights. defining 155 reliability analysis 203 required margins. 221 LOS between sites. modifying 154 clearance. 221 using assistant (MW) 135. inserting (MW) 203 performance objectives 154 point-to-multipoint link 227 point-to-multipoint links. creating a report on 217 site parity. calculating 204 restricting sites studied 192 semi-automatic channel search 218 simple link. mapping simple links to 210 multi-hop. 179 line of sight area (MW) 176 lines editing 34 link. displaying 194 equipment. 139. creating 123 antennas. setting as active 206 simple links 185 single antenna patterns. see point-to-multipoint links Location Finder searching by coordinates 73 searching by text property 73 long-haul frequency bands (MW) 145 M manufacturers (MW) 123 map centring on a selected object 28 exporting as image 40 measuring distances 28 moving 27 printing 52 refreshing display 72 saving as image 39 Map toolbar 74 measurement units. see "interference reduction factor" L label 23 Lambert Conformal-Conic projection 81 layers 16 legend adding object type 24 displaying 24 displaying Legend window 29 printing Legend window 56 line of sight area intersection of areas (MW) 184 studying (MW) 176. intersection 184 LOS between sites. displaying on the map 217 sorting by site 58 spectrum analyser 219 studying LOS between sites 176 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 235 . printing 126 © Forsk 2010 antenna properties 125 antenna/equipment compatibility 138. 140 antennas 123 antennas. analysing 224 interference on several links. adjusting 200 antenna heights. 179 microwave ITU-R P. importing 132 error performance events 155 error performance objectives 155 error performance parameters 155 finding by site 58 frequency bands 146 frequency planning 216 frequency sub-bands 147 global properties. creating 154 classes. modifying 205. calculating for multiple links 206. defining 156 grouping by site 58 interference analysis 221 interference on a single link. creating 208 passive repeater 201 passive repeater. defining 156 budget.

using as 31 geographic export zone. deleting 191 transceiver equipment. adjusting with the mouse 231 creating 227 deleting 230 deleting a link from 230 global properties 228 links. creating from 54 profile analysis microwave 193 options (MW) 194 printing (MW) 195 reflections.452 model 153 microwave propagation model 151 Microwave Propagation Model. 57 grouping by several properties 58 grouping. adding 191 template field. creating 137 workflow 173 Microwave Propagation Model defining parameters 151. using as 34 printing zone. defining parameters 151. mapping to 210 reliability analysis 210 multipoint link. 27 passive microwave repeaters creating 202 performance objectives microwave links 154 Point Analysis window printing 56 points editing 34 point-to-multipoint link adding a link 229. see point-to-multipoint link multi-user environment 83 O objects changing transparency 23 deleting 17 displaying 16 displaying properties 18 grouping 56 grouping by a property 56. studying (MW) 210 Values tab (MW) 196 viewing (MW) 193 profile values exporting data 199 importing data 199 projection coordinate system 81 Lambert Conformal-Conic projection 81 Universal Transverse Mercator projection 81 propagation model microwave ITU-R P. deleting 191 template field. 71 using as filtering zone 30 printing antenna patterns (MW) 126 CW Measurement Analysis Tool 56 data tables and reports 52 defining print layout 54 docking windows 56 Legend window 56 map 52 Microwave Link Analysis 56 Point Analysis window 56 print preview 55 profile analysis (MW) 195 recommendations 53 Test Mobile Data Analysis Tool 56 printing zone drawing 53 Fit to Map Window 54 importing 54 polygon. 57 switching between property dialogues 18 236 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 . examples 59 hiding 16 label 23 tip text 24 visibility scale 23 P Page Setup. 153 properties changing display 21 grouping objects by 56. see "printing" Panoramic window 14. mapping to 229 properties 228 polygon deleting polygon filter 33 drawing a polygon filter 29 editing 34 focus zone. using as 54 using as computation zone 30 using as filter 29. modifying 191 template.Atoll User Manual template field. 153 microwave radio links template 79 Modules tab 15 multi-hop links 208 adding links to 209 creating 208 links. properties of 131 trunk types. creating 132 waveguides 137 waveguides. 230 creating 227 mapping links 229 properties 228 point-to-multipoint links 227 adding links 229 antenna. adjusting 230 antenna. adding on the map 230 links.

changing 23 trunk types. choosing 27 Search toolbar 75 searching for map objects 72. microwave 137 windows cascading 14 docking 14 floating 14 X XML © Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 237 . defining 155 T table columns formatting 45 tables.Index Q quality objectives microwave links. see "tip text" toolbar icons 74 Map 74 Microwave Link 75 Search 75 Standard 74 Vector Edition 75 transceiver equipment properties of (MW) 131 transmitter list 67 adding 68 adding transmitter 68 creating 68 editing 69 editing filter 69 transparency. see "data tables" templates 79 deleting (MW) 191 field. deleting (MW) 191 field. modifying (MW) 191 microwave radio links 79 Test Mobile Data Analysis Tool printing 56 tip text 24 tool tips. 73 short-haul frequency bands (MW) 146 site moving on the map 19 moving to a higher location 19 properties. adding (MW) 191 field. microwave creating 132 R redo 72 reflection analysis report display (MW) 214 reflections studying (MW) 210 refresh 72 from the database 86 reliability analysis (MW) 203 renaming 17 default object names 17 repeaters passive repeater (MW) 201 passive repeater. using as 69 site parity. inserting (MW) 203 reports printing 52 required margins. accessing from the map 18 site list 67 adding 68 adding site 68 creating 68 editing 69 filter. accessing from the Explorer window 18 properties. microwave creating 137 waveguides. calculating (MW) 204 row height changing 45 rulers displaying 28 S scale level. microwave link 217 creating a report 217 displaying on the map 217 sorting sorting tables by one column 61 sorting tables by several columns 61 with subfolders 71 spectrum analyser (MW) 219 Standard toolbar 74 station template creating (MW) 191 modifying (MW) 191 subfolders creating 71 U undo 72 Universal Transverse Mercator projection 81 user configuration 66 creating 67 exporting 67 importing 67 V Vector Edition toolbar 75 visibility scale 23 W waveguides creating (MW) 137 waveguides and cables.

Atoll User Manual exporting data tables to 51 importing data tables from 52 Z zooming choosing a scale 27 in on a specific area 27 238 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited © Forsk 2010 .

© Forsk 2010 Unauthorized reproduction or distribution of this document is prohibited 239 .

510665.8. Jiadu Commercial Building.3 AT283_UMM_E2 December 2010  Head Office 7.com . Guangzhou. Tianhe Hi-Tech Industrial Zone.Suite 3100 Chicago.France Tel: +33 562 747 210 Fax: +33 562 747 211  US Office 200 South Wacker Drive . rue des Briquetiers 31700 Blagnac .forsk. R. 66 Jianzhong Road. 3/F.USA Tel: +1 312 674 4846 Fax: +1 312 674 4847  China Office Suite 302.User Manual Microwave Links version 2. P. No. IL 60606 . West Tower. of China Tel: +86 20 8553 8938 Fax: +86 20 8553 8285 www.

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful